Technical Diary

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.
PREFACE
After a great endevor WBSEBEA has published this tech-nical diary with the profound support & contribution from different members at all level. West Bengal Engineers' Association invites valuable suggestions from our member towards enrichment of the knowledge base technical diary in the next version. Any error which has been inadvertently incorporated in this diary may be communicated to this end for future guidance. Secretary West Bengal State Electricity Board Engineers' Association
INDEX
Content 1. Year Callender 2. STD Code No. 3. I.S.D. 4. World time Chart 5. Air Distance 6. Road Distance 7. Greetings 8. National information 9. Festivals 10. Conversion facter 11. Graphical symbols. 12. Priliminaries of Tower loading concept 13. Concept of Tower foundation 14. Drawing for 220kv & above transmission system. 15. 132/220/440 kv transmission system. 16. Typical substation equipment specification 17. Typical F.L. current rating of transformer. 18. Amorphous core transformer 19. 33/11 kv substation (Indoor type) 20. 33/11 kv of substation (out door type) 21. Basic technology of functional details of transformer 22. Transformer testing 23. Transformer protection. 24. Inspection & maintenance schedule of transformer & circuit breaker 25. Maintenance scheduleof transforemr equipments. 26. Test report of transformer 27. Test report of CB 28. Significance of importance of tests of transformer oil. 29. Online reclamation of transformer oil 30. DBPC oxident for reclaimed transformer oil. 31. Mixing of transformer oil. 32. Approximate requirement of major materials for R.E. works. 33. Typical S/C data for 33/11 kv Transformer 34. Clearance 35. Gap setting 36. Relays 37. Earthing 38. Battery Page No. 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 25 43 44 48 50 50 51 52 54 73 80 98 105 109 114 116 126 130 132 135 138 140 142 147 184 193
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 39.Multiplying ftactor for calculating size of capacitor 40. Regulation constant for overhead line. 41. Transformer loss calculation 42. Surge impedence & economic loading of a overhead line. 43. Fuse wire rating 44. Cable rating 45. Current rating of motor. 46. Current rating of Almunium conductor 47. Permissible span of overhead lines. 48. Weight of materials . 49. Wattage of electrical domestic appliances. 50. Rating of electrical equipments. 51. Assessment of bills incase of L & MV consumers. 52.Conversion factor MVA. Vs. AMPS. 53. Trouble shooting of felxicom type MRI 54., Trouble shooting of Analogic type MRI. 55. Display item of ABB Meter 56. Accucheck Meter connection diagram 57. Data for civil work 58. Planning of Building 59. Salient features by WBSERC 60. VSAT Technology 61. Network security 62. Reference 202 204 205 210 211 212 218 219 224 225 228 229 232 233 234 236 238 240 243 244 246 250 254 256
YEAR - 2006
January 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 February 7 8 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 March 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 April 14 15 16 17 18 4 5 6 7 1 8 2 9 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 May 18 19 20 21 22 30 31 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 June 23 24 25 26 27 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Week
5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
10
13 14 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 27 29 30 31
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday 1
22 29 23 24 25 26 27 28
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5
July Monday 4 Tuesday 5 Wednesday 6 Thursday 7 Friday 1 8 Saturday 2 9 Sunday 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
August 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 29 23 30 24 31 25 26 27 28
September 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
October 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
November 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 28 22 29 23 30 24 25 26 27
December 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3 4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4
WBSEBEA - 6
STD CODE NO
A Abohar 01634 Adipur 0283686 Adilabad 08732 Adoni 08512 Adoor 04734 Agartala 0381 Agra 0562 Ahmedabad 079 Ahmednagar 0241 Aizwal 0389 Ajmer 0145 Akbarpur (up) 05111 Akola 0724 Alamuru 08853-82 Alibaug 02141 Aligarh 0571 Alipurduar 03561-55 Allahabad 0532 Alleppy 0477 Almora 05962 Alur 08172 Alwar 0144 Amlapurum 08856 Amravati (MP) 0721 Ambaji 02749 Ambala 0171 Ambikapur 07774 Amethi 0536 Amritsar 0183 Anmand 02692 Anant Nag 01932 Anavatti 08184 Asansol 0341 Aska 06822 Attur 04282 Aurangabad (BR) 06186 Aurangabad (MH) 0240 Ayodhya 05276 Azamgarh 0546 B Baad Badarpur Badrinath Bagdogra Bakreswar Balaghat Balasore Balia Ballarpur Ballavipur Banda (UP) Bangalore Bankura Barabanki Baragarh Barakar Barauni (BGS) Bareilly 08386 03845 01381 0353 034667 07632 06782 0549 07174 02841 0519 080 03242 05242 06646 0341 06343 0581 Baroda (GUJ) 0265 Basti 05542 Begun 01474 Begusarai 06342 Belgaum 0831 Berhampur (Orissa) 0680 Berhampur (WB) 03482 Bhabhua 06189 Bhadarak 06784 Bhagalpur 0641 Bhandara 07184 Bhavnagar 0278 Bhawani Patna 06670 Bhilai 0788 Bhilwara 01482 Bhopal 0755 Bhubaneswar 0674 Bhusawal 02582 Bijapur 08352 Bikaner 0151 Bilaspur (MP) 07752 Bokaro Steel 06542 Bolangir 06652 Bolpur 03463 Bulandshahar 05732 Bongaigaon 03664 Burdwan 0342 Burla 066382 Buxar 06183 C Calicut 0495 Cambay 02698 Cannanore 0497 Chakdah 03473 Champa 07819 Chandanpur 06752 Chandigarh 0172 Chandipur 06785 Chandrapur (MP) 07172 Chanchal 03513 Chapra 06152 Chas 06548 Chatrapati 045685 Chennai 044 Chatrapur 06811 Chidambaram 04144 Chirala 08594 Chittaranjan 0341 Chittore (A.P) 08572 Chittorgarh 01472 Chowdwar 0671792 Chowk 02146 Cochin 0484 Coimbatore 0422 Contai 03220 Coochbehar 03582 Coonoor 0423 Cuddalore 04142 Cuttack 0671 D Dadri Dalhousie Daltongunj Daman Danapur (PT) Darbhanga Darjeeling Deesa Dehradun Dehari on Sone Deogarh Deoghar Dewas Dhanbad Diphu Dhubri Diamondharbour Dibrugarh Digha Dimapur Dispur (GH) Durg Durgapur Dwaraka E Elnaji Eluru Erapatty Ernakulam Erode Etawah F Faizabad Falta Faridabad Faridkot Fatehpur (UP) Ferozepur Ferozabad G Gadwal 08546 Gandhinagar (GUJ) 02712 Gandhinagar 0481 Gangotri 01377 Gangtok 03592 Ganjam 06811 Gaya 0631 Gazipur 0548 Ghatal 03225 Ghatkesar 084152 Giridih 06532 Goa (Punjim) 0832 Gokul 05664 Goal Para 03663 Golaghat 03774 Gorakhpur 0551 05272 031722 0129 01639 0518 01632 05618 04858 08812 0428685 0484 0424 05682 05737 01899 06562 02636 0612 06272 0354 02744 0135 06128 06641 06432 07272 0326 03671 03662 03174 0373 03220 03862 0361 0788 0343 02892 Gudawal Gulmarg Guntur Gurazala Gurgaon Guwahati Gwalior H Hailakandi Haflong Haldia Hamirpur (UP) Hapur Hardoi Haridar Hassan Hathras Haveri Hazaribagh Hazipur (BIHAR) Hissar Hojai Hospet Hossur Husnabad Hyderabad I Ichalkaranji Imphal Indore Islampur (MH) Ismailabad Itanagar Itarsi J Jabalpur 0761 Jagalpur 07782 Jagadishpur (Sultan)05362 Jagatpur 0671 Jaipur (Raj) 0141 Jalgaon 0257 Jallundhar 0181 Jammu 0191 Jamshedpur 0657 Jarora 07414 Jaunpur 05452 Jeypore 06854 Jhansi 05172 Jharia 0326 Jharsuguda 06645 Jhumritilaiya 06534 Jhunjhunu 01592 Jhusi 053287 Jodhpur 0291 Jorhat 0376 Junagadi (Guj) 0285 Junagarh (Orissa) 06672 0230 03852 0731 02342 01744 0360 07572 03844 03673 03224 05282 0122 05852 0133 08172 05722 08375 06546 06224 01662 03674 08394 08337 08721 040 074824 01953 0863 08649 01272 0361 0751
WBSEBEA - 7
STD CODE NO
K Kakdwip Kakinada Kalimpong Kalka Kalunga (RKL) Kanchipuram Kannauj Kanyakumari Kanpur Kapurthala Karimnagar Karimganj Karnal Kashipur Katihar Katni Khajuraho Khamaria Khammam Khanna Kharagpur Khurda Khurja Kisanganj Kodaikanal Kohima Kolhapur Kolkata Koraput Korba Kota Krishnagar Kundara Kurnool Kurseong Kyalanur L Lanka Latur Lucknow Ludhiana Lumding M Madhubani Madurai Mahabaleshwar Mahabalipuram Maharajgung (up) Maina (MP) Maldah Malkapuram Mangalore (PCR) Mangalore Mani Manipal (Udipi) Masauri Masur (SMO) 06276 0452 02168 04113 05523 07560 03512 0891 08534 0824 08255 08252 06129 08376 0367485 02382 0522 0161 036746 03210 0884 03552 017852 06619 04112 05694 04652 0512 01822 08722 03843 0184-72 05947 06452 07622 076861 05416 08742 01622 03222 06755 05738 06456 04542 04866 0231 033 06852 07759 0744 03472 04755 08518 03554 08152 Mathura Mayapur (W.B) Merut How Midnapore Mirzapur Moghalsarai Mohara Mokama Monghyr Moradabad Moranhat Mumbai Motihari Mussoorie Muzaffarpur Muzaffar Nagar Mysore N Nagarcoil 04652 Nagpur 0712 Naini 0532 Nainital 05942 Nalanda 061194 Nalbari 03624 Nandikal 08159-86 Narasannapeta 08942 Nasik 0253 N awada 06324 New Bongaigaon 03664 New Delhi 011 Nizamabad 08462 Noida 0577 Nowgaon 03672 North Lakhimpur 03752 O Obaa Okha Ooty Osmanabad Ozar P Paburia Palghat Panagarh bazar Panaje Panduah Panipath Paradeep Pathankot Patialala Patina Phagwara Pilibhit Pondicherry Portblair Pratap Garh 06847 0491 0343 08251 09113 01742 06722 0186 0175 0612 01824 05882 0413 03192 05342 05445 02892 0423 02472 02533 0565 03472 0121 073183 03222 05442 05412 0171 06133 06344 0591 037543 022 06252 01362 0621 0131 0821 Premnagar Pune Puri Purnia Purulia Puttur (Kerala) Q Quilandy Quilon R Raibareilly 0535 Raichur 08532 Raigarh 07762 Raipur (MP) 0771 Rajahmundry 0683 Rajgar (MP) 07372 Rajganjpur 06624 Rajgir 06119 Rajkot 0281 Rajnagar 06729 Rameswaram 04573 Ramgarh Cantt. 06553 Rajganjpur 06624 Ramnagar 05419 Ranchi 0651 Raniganj 0341 Ratlam 07412 Raxaul 06255 Rayagade 06856 Renukut 054461 Rewa 07662 Rishkesh 0136-4-11 Rohtak 01262 Roorkee 01332 Rourkella 0661 Rupanarayanpur 03444 S Sagar 08183 Sagar (MP) 07582 Sahugunj 06436 Saidapur 08473 Salem 0427 Samastipur 06274 Sambalpur 0663 Sanglo 0233 Satana 02555 Satna 07672 Secunderabad 040 Seoni 07692 Shahjhanpur 05842 Shaktinagar (VS) 054463 Shillong 0364 Sibsagar 03772 Silchar 03842 Siugguri 0353 Simla 0177 Sindri 06544 04961 0474 013583 020 06752 06454 03252 08251 Sirsa (UP) Sitamarhi Swan Sonepat S rinagar Srirampur Sundargarh Surat Suri T Taccode Tajpur Talchar Tanuku Tezu Tejpur Thal Thane Tinsukia Tiruneveli Tirupati Tiruvellore Trichur Trivandrum Triveni Tumkur Tundla Tura Tuticorin U Uchagaon Udaipur Udhampur Udipi (Monipal) Ujjain Ullal Uliasnagar Unnao Upleta Utkamong (Ooti) Uttarkashi V Vadipatti Vapi Vairag Valakom Valliur Varanasi Vashi Vasko Vellore Vijayawada Visavadar Visakhapatnam Vissannapet Vizianagram Virindaban W Wardha Warora Whitefield Wokha Y Yamunanagar Yamunotri Yeotmal Z Zaheerabad 0831 0294 01992 08252 0734 0824 0251 0515 02826 0423 01374 04543 02638 02184 047570 04637 0542 022 08345 0416 0866 02873 0891 086737 08922 05664 07152 071763 08045 0386 01732 01379 07232 084512 08253 062752 06765 08819 03804 03712 021433 022 0374 0462 08574 04116 0487 0471 03167 0816 05611 03651 0461 053289 06226 06154 01264 0194 02422 06622 0261 03462
WBSEBEA - 8
ISD CODE NO
Country Angola
Argentina
Code 244
54
City
Luanda Buenos Aires Cordoka Mendoza
Code
2 1 51 61 8 7 3 2 9 51 2 41 3
Country
Greece
Code
30
City
Athens Piraesus
Code
1 1 39 2
Guyana
592
Corprivertion Georgetown
Australia
61
Ad elaide Brisbane Melbourne Sydney Perth
New Amsterdam Hongkong Hungary
3 852 36 Hongkay Budapest Derbrecer 1 1 32 361 21 631 51 1 30 42 2 2 2 6 2 75 6 3 45 6 2 51 2 1 8 63 71 54 91 3 95
Imonesia
62
Ban jakapta
Bangladesh
880
Bogra Dhaka Khulna
Iran
98
Asara Mashar
Belgium Bhutan Brazil
32 975 55
Antwerp
Iraq
964
Baghdad Babylon
Brasilia Rio De Janeiro
61 21 2 1 613 416 42 2 1 21 4 7 8 5 3 3 2 66 1 1 30 421 40 30 Maldives 960 Macedonia Malaysia 389 60 Iibya 218 Kuwait Iebanonl 965 961 Jordan Kenya Korea (South) 962 254 82 Japan 81 Itally 39 Israel 972
Nastriya Bethlehem Jerusalem Ramalla Rome Malano Kyoto Osaka Tokyo Yokohama Amman Nairobi Pusan Seoul Kuwait Grand Beirut Zahle Benina Sabh Sert Skopje Kualalumpur Kuantan Malf
Burma
95
Mandalay Rangoon
Canada Chile
1 56
Chawa Toronto Conception Santiago Beijng
SChina Colombia Cuba Denmark 57 53 45
Shangae Medlin Havana Aalborg Horsens Naestved
Egypt
20
Alexandria Cairo Port Said
Fiji France Germany
679 33 49
Suya Paris Berlin Breman Hamburg Berlin
WBSEBEA - 9
ISD CODE NO
Country
Mexico
Code
52
City
Acapuloo Mexico city
Code
746 5 61 671 20 1747 9 71 4 9 1 2 51 21 42 51 54
Country
Spain
Code
34
City
Badalona Vigo
Code
3 86 1 51 31 31 22 1 4 2 2 2 41 42 044 2 4 6 21 272 71 81 61 907 312 212 218 702 215 415 202 37 2 43 11
Namibia
264
Industira Tsumlo
Sri Lanka Sudan
94 249
Colombo Medani Port Sudan
Nepal Netherlands
977 31
Kathmandu Amsterdam Holland
Switzerland
41
Berne Geneva Zurich
New Zealand
64
Aukland Hamilton Ellington
Taiwan
886
Taichung Taipel
Nigeria
234
Abuja Lagos
Thailand
66
Bangkok Thonbiri
Norway Oman Pakistan
47 968 92
Oslo Musoat Islamabad Karachi Lahore Rawalpindi
Turkey Uganda Undant U.A.E.
90 256 7 971
Anhara Entebbe Kier Abudhabi Dubai Sharjah
Peru
51
Areouota Lima14
United Kingdom
44
Birmingham Bristol London (Inner) London (Outer) Manchester
pOLANO
48
Bedzin Sopot
33 58 31 91 095 812 3 3 1 1 21 12 11 Vietnam Yugos Lavia Zimbabway 84 381 263 Uzbekistan Venezuela 7 58 USA 1
qATAR Rowna
974 40
Doha Buzao Oradea
Alaska Chicago Newyork Hollywood Lasvegas (ny) Phladefhia San Francisco Washington DC Tashrent Carasas Varacay HBBelgrade
Russia
Moscow St. Piherbuze
Saudi Arabia
966
Al Khobar Damman Layla
Senegal Singapore Somalia South Africa
221 65 252 27
Dahar Singapore Mogadisclo Cape Town Pretoria Johannesburg
..
WBSEBEA - 10
WORLD TIME CHART

STANDARD TIMES AT 12 NOON IN INDIA
Country Abudhabi (United Arab Emirates) Addis Abada (Ethopia) Amsterdam (Netherlands) Anchorage (Alaska) Antigoa (West Indies) Athens (Greece) Auckland (New Zealand) Baghdad (Iraq) Bahrain Bandar Seri Begawan (Brunei) Bangkok (Thailand) Barbados (West Indies) Beirut (Lebanon) Bermuda Blantyre (Malawi) Bagota (Colombia) Boston (USA) Brisbane (Australia) Brussels (Belgium) Budapest (Hungary) Cairo (Egypt) Caracas (Venezuela) Chicago (Usa) Colombo (Srilanka) Copenhegen (Denmark) Dacca (Bangladesh) Damascus (Syria) Daes Salam (Tanzania) Darwin (Australia) Delhi (India) Detroit (USA) Dhahran (Saudia Arabia) Doha (Qatar) Dubai (United Arab Emirates) Entebbe (Uganda) Frankeurt (Germany) Freeport (Bahamas) Georgetown (Guyana) Hong Kong Honolulu (Hawai) Istanbul (Turkey) Jeddah (Saudi Arabia) Johannesburg (South Africa) Karachi (Pakistan) +/Hours (IST) Country Khartoum (Sudan) Kolkata (India) Kingston (Jamaica) Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia) Kuwait Leningrand (USSR) Lima (Peru) London (England) Los Angeles (USA) Lusaka (Zambia) Madrid (Spain) Mauritius Melbourne (Australia) Mexico City (Mexico) Miami (USA) Montreal (Canada) Mumbai (India) Nairobi (Nenya) Nadi (Fiji) Nassau (Bahamas) New York (USA) Nicosia (Cyprus) Osaka (Japan) Oslo (Norway) Panama City (P.R.) Paris (France) Perth (Australia) Philadelphia (Usa) Prague (Czechoslovakia) Rangoon (Burma) Rome (Italy) St. Lucia (West Indies) Seychelles Singapore Stockholm (Sweden) Sydney (Australia) Tel Aviv (Israel) Tokyo (Japan) Toronto (Canada) Trinidad (West Indies) Valletta (Malta) Vienna (Austria) Washington Do (USA) Zurich (Switzerland) +/-3 -10 +2 -2 -3 -10 -5 -13 -3 -4 -1 +4 -12 -10 -10 -2 +6 -10 -10 -3 +3 -4 -10 -4 +2 -10 -4 +1 -4 -9 -1 +2 -4 +4. -3 +3 -10 -9 -4 -4 -10 -4 Hours (IST) 8.30 am -12.00 noon 1.30 am 2.00 pm 9.30 am 6.30 am 1.30 am 6.30 am 10.30 am 8.30 am 7/.30 am 10.30 am 4.30 pm 12.00midnig 1.30 am 1.30 am 12.00 noon 9.30 am 6.30 pm 1.30 am 1.30 am 8.30 am 3.30 pm 7.30 am 1.30 pm 7.30 am 2.30 pm 1.30 am 7.30 am 1.00 pm 7.30 am 2.30 am 10.30 am 2.00 pm 7.30 am 4.30 pm 9.30 am 3.30 pm 1.30 am 2.30 am 7.30 am 7.30 am 1.30 am 7.30 am
-1 10.30 am -2 9.30 am -4 7.30 am -22 2.00 pm -9 2.30 am -3 8.30 am +6 6.30 am -2 9.30 am -1 10.30 am +2 2.30 pm +1 1.30 pm -9 2.30 am -3 8.30 am -9 2.30 am -3 8.30 am -10 1.30 am -10 1.30 am +4 4.30 P M -4 7.30 am -4 7.30 am -3 8.30 am -8 2.30 am -11 12.30 am 12.00 noon -4 7.30 am + 12.30 pm - 3 8.30 am - 2 9.30 am +4 4.00 pm 12.00 noon -10 1.30 am -2 9.30 am -2 9.30 am -11 0.30 am -2 0.30 am -4 7.30 am -10 1.30 am -9 2.45 am +2 2.30 pm -22 2.00 pm -3 8.30 am -2. 9.30 am -3 8.30 am - 11.30 am
WBSEBEA - 11
AIR DISTANCES DISTANCE SHOWN IN THOUSAND KILOMETERS 1 KILOMETER = 0.621 MILE

Amsterdam Athens Auckland Bahrain Bangkok Mumbai Dubai Frankfurt Hong Kong Jakarta KualaLumpur London Chennai Manila Melbourne Osaka Paris Perth Rome Seoul Singapore Sydney Taipei T okyo Zurich 2.2 18.1 4.8 9.2 6.9 5.2 0.4 9.3 14 1. 10.2 0.4 7.9 10.4 16.5 9.0 0.4 14.1 1.3 8.6 10.5 16.6 13.7 9.3 0.6 2.2 17.5 2.8 7.9 5.2 3.3 1.8 8.5 9.8 8.7 2.4 6.2 9.6 14.9 9.3 2.1 12.3 1.1 8.3 9.0 15.3 9.0 9.5 1.6 18.1 17.5 14.7 9.6 12.3 14.2 18.2 9.1 7.6 8.7 18.4 13 1. 8.0 2.6 9.0 18.6 5.3 18.4 9.6 8.4 2.2 8.9 8.8 18.4 4.8 2.8 14.7 5.4 2.4 0.5 4.4 6.4 7.0 6.0 5.1 3.4 7.4 12.1 8.5 4.8 9.5 3.9 7.1 6.3 12.5 6.5 8.3 4.3 9.2 7.9 6.9 5.2 5.2 3.3 0.4 1.8 9.3 1 4 10.2 1. 8.5 9.1 6.4 1.7 4.3 6.0 9.8 8.7 0.4 7.9 10.4 16.5 9.0 2.4 6.2 9.6 14.9 9.3 8.0 0.4 14.1 2.1 12.3 1.3 1.1 8.6 10.5 16.6 13.7 9.3 8.3 9.0 15.3 9.0 9.5 9.6 8.4 0.6 1.6
9.6 12.3 5.4 3.0 4.9 9.0 1.7 2.3 1.2 9.5 2.2 2.2 7.4 4.2 9.4 5.4 8.8 3.7 1.4 2.4 3.0 1.9 6.6 4.3 4.7 3.6 7.0 1.0 5.1 9.8 6.3 7.0 7.3 6.2 5.6 3.9
14.2 18.2 0.5 4.9 1.9 4.8 6.0 4.4 9.0 6.6 4.8 9.2
7.6 8.7 18.4 1 3 1. 7.0 6.0 2.3 1.2 4.7 3.6 6.6 5.5 5.1 3.4 9.5 2.2 7.2 1.0 5.5 2.9
2.6 9.0 18.6 4.8 9.4
5.3 18.4 9.5 5.4 3.9 8.8 6.2 4.3 1.0 9.3
2.2 8.9 8.8 18.4 4.3 9.0 6.5 4.8 0.3 9.3
7.4 12.1 8.5 2.2 5.1 7.4 4.2 9.8 6.3
7.1 6.3 12.5 6.5 8.3 3.7 1.4 7.5 2.5 4.6
7.0 7.3. 5.2 9.0
5.6 3.9 10.1 5.0 6.7 6.8 5.8 12.0 6.6 7.9 8.6 10.3 16.5 9.4 9.4 2.2 2.6 5.5 0.9 4.6 0.3 7.4 0.8 2.9
6.9 1 6 7.6 1.
9.2 1 2 9.9 1. 3.3 2.5 3.3 2.5
0.7 7.6 10.3 16.3 9.2 9.6 3.8 1.1 2.8 2.5 7.4 2.5
0.5 13.8 0.6 6.0
6.6 1 2 1. 5.5 5.5 2.9 9.9 0.7 7.6
1.2 1 7 3.6 1. 1.2 10.6 2.6
5.2 5.8 1 6 1. 6.4 4.6 10.4
3.0 10.9 4.2 9.7 1.4 7.2
5.3 3.7 5.8 1 1 1. 6.6 3.2 5.3 10.0 0.8 7.6
9.6 1 7 10.6 1. 3.8 1.1 7.4 2.5 3.6 2.6
8.2 10.8 16.9 9.5 8.2 4.8 6.3 2.7 8.8 6.1
0.4 14.5 8.0 6.3
8.9 10.9 17.0 9.8 9.6 5.9 2.9 2.5 2.4 8.3 6.0 0.8 4.9 9.1 4.7 6.8
6.9 10.3 1 6 16.3 1. 7.6 5.2 9.2 0.5
2.8 2.5 10.8 4.8 5.2 6.4 16.9 8.8 5.8 4.6 9.5 6.1
6.3 2.7 10.8 7.8 16.8 7.8 9.6
4.9 10.4 2.7 16.0 8.0 9.7 1.1 5.0
6.3 1.0 3.0 10.4 4.0 7.5 8.2 16.3 7.8 1.7 0.4 9.4 0.5
9.6 1 6 10.4 1. 6.0 3.04.2 14.5 9.3 10.9 9.7 2.2 2.6 7.4 0.8 2.9 5.5 4.6
0.4 8.0 10.8 16.8 9.6 6.3 4.9 2.7 8.0 14.3
14.3 13.3 1.1 13.3 9.0
0.0 10.7 17.0 9.8 9.7 3.9 3.3 6.4 8.5 13.8 9 9
9.0 13.8 4.3 6.8 1.0 8.6
1.4 7.2 10.4 16.0 9.7 8.9 5.9 2.5 2.4 6.3 1.0 3.0 8.3 0.8
9.0 10.0 16.0 9.6 4.7 4.7
0.7 8.8
5.0 9.00 3.9 10.0 3.3 16.3 6.4 8.5 9.6 9.9 0.7
8.7 1.5 1.2
5.8 10.3 12.0 16.5 6.6 7.9 4.8 9.4 9.4 0.3
0.9 0.3 10.9 2.9 5.5 6.6 17.0 9.1 3.7 3.2 5.8 5.3 9.8 4.7 9.6 6.8
6.0 4.9 10.7 0.7 7.8 17.0 7.5 1.7 8.2 0.4 9.8 9.7
4.0 3.2 5.3 10.3 7.3 7.8 1 66 2.1 2.1 9.6 9.6
7.5 10.1 2.5 4.6 9.0 5.0 6.7 6.5
8.7 6.3 1.5 3.2 1.2 5.3
9.3 1 1 10.0 1.
0.8 7.6 10.4 16.3 9.4
0.5 13.8
8.8 10.8 16.6 9.5 9.16
WBSEBEA - 12
ROAD DISTANCE OF MAJOR CITIES

BHUBANESWAR LUCKNOW PANJIN PONDICHERRY CHANDIGARH HYDERABAD AHMEDABAD BANGALORE M UNMBAI CHENNAI NAGPUR KANPUR KOLKATA COCHIN INDORE JAIPUR PATNA DELHI NASIK PUNE - 1142 -
DISTANCE IN KILOMETERS AGARTALA AGRA AHMEDABAD ALLAHABAD AMRITSAR ASANSOL BANGALORE BARODA BHOPAL BHUBANESWAR CALICUT CHANDIGARH CHENNAI COCHIN COIMBATORE DELHI GWALIOR HUBLI HYDERABAD IMPHAL INDORE JABALPUR JAIPUR JAMSHEDPUR JULIANDUR KANPUR KOLHAPUR KOLKATA LUCKNOW LUDHIANA MADURIA MEERUT MUMBAI NAGUR NASIK PANJIM PATNA PONDICHERRY PUNE RANCHI SHILLONG SHIMLA SURAT TRIVANDRUM VARANASI VIJAYAWADA VISAKHAPATNAM
3305 855 1207 1332 1842 1514 119 571 1829 1648 1135 1848 1832 1669 886 852 1101 1220 3067 442 901 625 1870 1285 1168 911 2006 1133 1220 1922 1092 552 999 504 1165 1656 1818 675 1781 2698 1254 273 2197 1329 1491 1857
3824 1819 1514 1652 2453 2187 1408 1379 1430 520 2268 334 546 333 2019 1700 391 566 3489 1601 1335 2049 1842 2416 1855 484 1883 1900 2358 432 2072 1033 1034 1035 440 2071 303 839 2098 3120 2387 1284 690 1763 638 1004
2286 1556 1829 1102 2202 523 1430 1604 1175 1923 1994 1225 1895 1633 1754 1496 1620 1063 2100 1355 1087 1775 439 2413 1283 1622 480 1266 2088 1687 1822 1691 830 1516 1455
2998 449 1135 892 223 1503 2268 1181 990 1994 2741 2406 2814 2669 248 568 2101 1702 2752 1052 1046 510 1566 154 661 1910 1691 748 105 2785 381 1657 1234 1466 2028
3493 4304 2708 1957 2278 1848 1832 1790 2216 2603 3011 200 886 643 446
3330 2891 1253 1220 1086 691 442 803
2801 2281 1863 2252 3593 2696 3365 3507 1681 3661 3442 230 290 1242 369 1208 785 1005 1715 885 2119 1229 552 999 504 1165 1656 1818 675
625 1168 2006 1133 673 707 1304 193 799 926 1888 789 226
237 1444 618 1155 1419 402 1952 1465 945 1854 1431 1665 2237 1531 2765 1875 825 2040 1122 1746 2300 395 2024 1955 440 2071 303 839
1899 1258 1693 1394 556 1601 1127 813 379 191
1857 2544 1262 334 546 2019 1739 1763 1151 1517 1925 741
2049 1855 1883 1900 1033 1034 1035 789 1230 1937 1311 735 585 1456 703 433 774 789 345
457 1158 1582 1735 454 605 1143 1016 1679 810
1225 1895 1745 715 222 2494 2406 2814 248
1063 1335 910 1998 1702 1053 704 1795 112 1804 912 1964 1453 1134 806 497
1775 1283 480 1266 1691 830 1516 1455 862 1387 1608 2523 2260 2346 2339 1171 1483 1193 510 661 1691 576 2476 566 984
748 1657 1234 1466 2028 1332 1568 1678 909 2096 162 1173 798 2601 548 1169 800 2434 410 1005
- 669 2157 669 - 2565
2187 2049 1678 2038 1367 1172 1366 2457 2385 2347 2446 1351 1580 1390 2369 2218 2057 2297 1192 1441 1241 263 351 481 1442 280 1232
426 195 2412 2157 2565 1834 2246 319
569 1408 985 1220 1782 1086 2319 1429 359 1085 666 641 995 739 468 891 1467 406 2000 1110 646 754 190 1998 653 437 765 1469 865 545
638 774 1854 704 1112 1453 3298 4035 2503 1795 1804 1529 1885 2187 2457 806 800 263
486 1060 999
1060 1772 2032 1851 1483 1253 1516 1334
2923 2744 999 733 1483 589 405
2533 2134 1620 1979 3316 2455 3218 3360 1534 3460 337 405 845 1347 891 689 1620 543 1167 917 1472 867 308 855 1869 768 589 445 414 1115 1205 1963 523 943 1088 736 1697 1003
584 1143 257
298 1176 1015 1248 1488 1115 2300 1300 838 1958 1097 1788 2229 473 1799 979 868 1778 1354 1591 2146 1460 2785 791
1637 2306 1317 2617 3082 375
1578 1477 1821 1171 1253 578 689 870
2049 2385 481 910 934 1664 1678 2347 1442 2038 2446 2552 3027 569 310
517 - 1010 79 1278 777 1103 1813 596 2217 1312 1518 1779 2045 1858 426 1050 456 2091 2047 907 247 1472 1010 598 570 963 2081 1220 1849 974 621 1840 2102
1516 1620 1334 768
79 963 790 1783
- 1370 866 1182 1883 566 2200 1391 803 1770 1280 1528 1805 1395 2720 1726 872 2561 333 1238
1756 1115 995 2091 1470 739 468 754 815 589 445 414
480 326 2539 2266 2741 66
2496 2345 2110 2424 1458 1568 1467 327 537 1497
453 1468 994 1242 1805 934 2434 1440 - 861 861 197 584 1856 1336 164
1367 1351 1408 1172 1580 985
1176 1278 2081 1370 1015 777 1220 866
700 1247 993 1334 882 701 701 1679 1363 209 - 1804 739 501 - 2264 2738 739 2264
1366 1390 1220 909 798 1782
1248 1103 1849 1182 2496 1613 974 1885 596 621 566 1856
197 700 584 1247
765 1115 1205 1115 865 1963 545 623
862133220962601 1086 1469 1387 1608 560 1739 2113 1579 1953 980 792 426 2568 1678 1480 2383 119 1325 3051 1014 1973 2110 162 548 2319 1173 1169 1429 1767 2455 1214 2929 3666 2134 2525 2933 368
993 1679 1804
2349 2217 1840 2200 1336 1334 1363 1300 1314 2102 1391 1243 726 414 164 882 209
501 1758 1142
1434 1333 2554 2309 1821 1171 983 607
912 1816 958 1615 1630 30219*35 1975
2164 1699 1251 1610 2947 2086 2800 2925 1019 3051 2968 629 846 1610 867 1776 1353 1567 2130 1434 2687 1797 301 747 262 913 1742 1789 432 792 2827 622 1533
1695 1593 1182 713 218 1950 1901 2309 765
932 1296 1912 1375
1261 2150 1197 925
2782 2611 2376 2690 1376 1834 1742 795 315 677
286 1590 729 1399 1524 280 1063 1116 39 1428 876 1664 595 816
433 1102 1724 799 1468 1861
271 1255 637 1433
1754 1519 1245 16905 1010
1891 1687 879 1742 1376 876 1596 1206 1334 961 1182
WBSEBEA - 13
GREETINGS
National a) Kind rememberence and all good wishes for the independence day. b) Sincere greetings for the republic day. c) Long live the republic Election a) Hearty congratulations on success in Election b) Best wishes for your success in the Election Festival Heartiest Diwali Greeting Id Mubarak Heartiest Bijoya Greetings A Merry Christmas to you My Heartiest Holi Greetings to you Heartiest Pangal Greetings Heartiest Onam Greeting Heartiest Ugadi Greeting Wish you a happy Bihu A Happy Easter Heartiest Greetings on Buddha Jayanti Heartiest Guru Ravidas Purnima Greetings Special Occations A Happy New Years to you Many Happy Returns of the day Greeting on the duation of Paryushan
Day of Universal Forgiveness. Hearty Congratulation on the new Arival. Heartiest Congratulation on Griha Pravesh Wedding Best Wishes for a long & happy Married life Many Heaven's choicest Blessing be showered on the young couple. Wish you both a happy & prosperous Wedded life Convey our Blessings to the Newly Married couple. Best Wishes on your Wedding anniversary. General Congrtualation of the Distinction conferned to you. Hearly congratulations on your success in the Examiantion Best Wishes for a safe & pleasant journey Many Thanks for your Good wishes which I/ We reciprocate Most Hearitily Congratulations Loving Greetings. Wishing the function Every Success. Many thanks for your kind massage to greeting. Best Wishes for your success in the Examination.
WBSEBEA - 14
NATIONAL INFORMATION
States Andhra Pradesh Assam Arunachal Pradesh Bihar Delhi Goa Gujrat Haryana Himachal Pradesh Jammu & Kashmir Main Language Telugu Assemise Tribal Hindi Hindi Konkani, Marathi Gujrati Hindi Hindi, Pahari Kashmiri Capital Hyderabad Dispur Itanagar Patna New Delhi Panaji Gandhinagar Chandigarh Shimla Jammu (Winter) Srinagar (Summer) Karnataka Kerala Madhya Pradesh Maharashtra Manipur Meghalaya Mizoram Nagaland Orissa Punjab Rajasthan Tamilnadu Tripura Uttar Pradesh Wet Bengal Kanada Malayalam Hindi Marathi Manipuri Tribal Mizo Angami Oriya Punjabi Hindi Tamil Tripuri Hindi Bengali Bangalore Trivandrum Bhopal Mumbai Imphal Shilong Aizwal Kohima Bhubaneswar Chandigarh Jaipur Chennai Agartala Lucknow Calcutta Best Season Nov. to Mar Oct to May Oct to May Oct to Mar Oct to Mar Oct. to May Oct to Mar Oct to Mar April to Oct Dec. to Mar Apr. to Oct. Nov. to Apr Oct to Apr. Sept to March Nov to May Sep to Apr. Nov to Mar Oct to May Oct to Mar Oct. to Mar Oct to Mar Oct to Mar Nov. to Mar Sept. to Mar Oct to Mar Oct to Mar 192 39 443 308 22 22 21 17 156 50 7 130 10 294 88 Area in 100 sp.km 277 79 89 174 1.5 3.8 196 44 56 22
WBSEBEA - 15
LIST OF FESTIVAL - 2006

NAME OF FESTIVALS
NEW YEAR'S DAY ID-UD-ZOHA MAKAR SANKRANTI / PONGAL NETAJI BIRTHDAY REPUBLIC DAY SARASWATI PUJA SREE PANCHAMI MUHARRAM SHIV RATRI DOL-JATRA/HOLI GOOD FRIDAY YEARLY BANK CLOSING RAMNAVAMI MAHAVIR JAYANTI BENGALI NEW YEAR MAY DAY RABINDRAJAYANTI FATEHA-DOAZ DAHAM BUDDHA PURNIMA JAMAI SASTHI RATHJATRA GURU PURNIMA BIRTHDAY OF BHANU BHAKT (FOR DARJEELING DIST) RAKHI PURNIMA INDEPENDENCE DAY JANMASTAMI SABEMIRAJ SABEBARAT MAHALAYA HALF YEARLY BANK CLOSING DURGA PUJA EKADASI OF DURGA PUJA LAXMI PUJA DIPAWALI/KALIPUJA ID-UL-FITRE JAGADDHATRI PUJA BHATRIDWITIYA GURUNANAK BIRTH DAY X-MAX DAY WEDNESDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY TUESDAY SATURDAY FRIDAY THURS DAY MONDAY-WEDNESDAY TUES DAY FRIDAY SATURDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY TUESDAY SUNDAY MONDAY 9TH AUGUST 15TH AUGUST 16TH AUGUST 22THAUG 9THSEPTEMBER 22ND SEPTEMBER 28TH SEPTEMBER 29TH SEP-2ND OCT 3RD OCTOBER 6TH OCTOBER 21STOCTOBER 25TH OCTOBER 10TH NOVEMBER 24TH NOVEMBER 5TH NOVEMBER 25TH DEC. SUNDAY WEDNESDAY SATERDEY MONDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY FRIDAY THURSDAY SUNDAY TUESDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY FRIDAY TUESDAY SATURDAY MONDAY TUESDAY TUESDAY SATURDAY MONDAY TUESDAY TUESDAY TRURS DAY
DAYS
DATES
1ST JANUARY 11TH JANUARY 14TH JANUARY 23RD JANUARY 26TH JANUARY 3RD FEBRUARY 3RDFEBRUARY 9TH FEBRUARY 26TH FEBRUARY 14TH MARCH 14TH MARCH 1ST APRIL 7TH APRIL 11TH APRIL 15TH APRIL 1ST MAY 9TH MAY 11TH APRIL 13TH MAY 13TH JUNE 27TH JUNE 11THJULY 13 TH JULY
WBSEBEA - 16
CONVERSION FACTORS
Quantity Length Imperial Unit Inch (in Foot (ft) Yard (yd) Furlong (fur) Mile International nautical mile (for Navigation) Ounce (oz) Pound (ib) Stone Ton Square inch (in2) Square foot (ft2) Metric Unit Milimeter (mm) or Centimeter (cm) Centimeter or meter (m) Meter or Kilometer (km) Kilometer (km) 1 mole = 1862 m Gram (g) Gram or Kilogram (kg) Kilogram (kg) Tonne (t) Square centimeter (cm2) Square centimeter (cm2) or Square meter (m2) Square meter (k2) Square meter (m2) Hectare (ha) Hectare (ha) Square kilometer (km2) Cubic centimeter (cm2) Cubic meter (m3) Cubic meter (m3) Cubic meter (m3) Mililiter (ml) Mililiter (ml) or liter (1) Liter (1) or cubic leter (m3) cubic liter (m3) or magaliter (ML) Newton (N) Kilonewton (kN) Kilopascal (k Pa) Kilopascal (kPa) or megapascal (MPa) Megapascal (MPa) Milibar (mb) Kilometer per hour (km/h) Imperial to Metric Unit 1 in = 25.4 mm 1 ft = 30.5 cm 1 yd = 0.194 m 1 fur = 301 m 1 mole = 1.61 km 1 km = 3.28 ft. 1 oz = 28.3g 1 lb = 254 g 1 s tone = 6.15 kg 1 ton = 1.02 t 1 in2 = 6.45 cm2 1 ft2 = 929 cm2 Metric to Impertal Unit 1 cm = 0.39 in 1 m = 3.28 ft 1 m = 1.09 yd 1 km = 4.97 fur 1 km = 0.621 mile
Mass
1 g = 0.0358 oz 1 kg = 2.20 lb 1 kg = 0.157 stone 1 t = 0.984 ton 1 cm2 = 0.155 in2
Area
Square yard (yd2) Perch (p) Rood (rd) Acre (ac) Square mile Volume Cubic inch (in2) Cubic foot (ft3) Cubic yard (yd3) Bushel (bus) Fluid ounce (fl oz) Pint (pt) Gallon (gal) Acre foot Pound-force (1bf) Ton-force (tonf) Pound per square inch (psi) Atmosphere (atm) Ton per square inch (ton/in2) Inch per mercury (in Hg( (for navigaton) Velocity Mile per hour (mph) Knot (kn) (for navigation) Degree Fahrenheit (F) Pound per cubic inch (ib/in2) Ton per cubic yard Energy British thermal unit (Btu) Therm (for electrical energy) Horsepower (hp) Minute (min)
1 yd2 = 0.836 m2 1 p =25.3 m2 1 rd = 0.101 ha 1 ac = 0.405 ha 1 sq.mile = 2.95 km2 1 in2 = 16.4 cm3 1 ft3 = 0.0283 m3 1 yd3 = 0.765 m3 1 bus = 40.0364 m3 1 ft oz = 28.4 ml 1 pt = 568 ml 1 gal = 4.55 liter 1 acre foot = 1230 m3 = 1.23 ML 1 lbf = 4.45 N 1 tonf = 9.95 Kn 1 psi = 6.89 kP2 1 atm = 9;.96 101 kPa 1 ton/in2=15.4 MPa 1 in Hg=33.9 mb 1 mph=1.61 km/h =1 kn=1.58 km/h oC=5/9 (F-32) 1 1b/in2=2.7 g/cm3 1 1b/in3=27.7 t/m3 1 ton/yd3=1.33 t/m3 1 Btu = 1.06 KJ 1 therm=106 MJ =kWh=3.60 MJ 1 hp=0.746 kW 1 min=60s 1 h = 1600s
1m2 = 108 yd2 1 m2=0.395 p 1 h a = 9.88 rd 1 ha = 2.47 ac 1 Km2=0.386 sq.mile 1 cm3=0.610 in3 1 m3=35.3 ft.2 1 m3=1.31 yd3 1 m3=27.5 bus 1 ml = 0.0352 ft. oz 1 ml = 1.76 pt 1 m3 = 220 gel 1 ml=0811 acre foot 1 N = 0.225 1bl 1 kN = 0.100 tonf 1 kPa = 0.145 psi
Volume (fluid)
Force
Pressure
1 mPa = 09.87 atm 1 MPa=0.647 ton/in2 1mb=0.0295 in Hg 1 km/h=0.621 mph
Temperature Density
Degree C elcius (oC) Gram per cubic cm (g/cm2) =tonne per cubic meter (t/m3) tonne per cubic meter (t/m3) Kilojoule (KJ) Megajoule (MJ) Kilowatt hour (kWh) Kilowatt (kW) Second (s) hour (hr)
oF=9/5 (C+32) 1 g/cm3=0.036 inch 1 t/m=0.0316 1b/in3 1 t/m=0.752 ton/yd2 1 KJ=0.948 Btu 1 MJ=9.48x103 therm 1 kW=1.34 hp
Power Time
WBSEBEA - 17
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS
for use in connection with interior electrical installation Description B.1. CONTROL GEAR AND DISTRIBUTION FUSEBOARDS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Main fuse-board without switches, lighting ... ... ... Main fuse-board with swi tches, lighting ... ... .... Main fuse-board without switches, power ... ... ... Main fuse-board with switches, power Distribution fuse - board without switches, lighting ... Distribution fuse-board with swticehs, lighting ... Distribution fuse - board without switches power ... Distribution fuse-board with sitches power ... Main switches, lighting .. .. Symbol Description 19. Bulk-head fitting 20. Power factor capacitor (when installed remote from the lamp unit 21. Lighting outlet connection to an emergency system 22. Choke (when installed remote from the lamp unit) B.3. SWITCH OUTLETS 23. One-way switch 24. Two-way switch 25. Intermediate switch 26. Pendant switch 27. Pull Switch B.4. SOCKET OUTLETS 28. Socket-outlet, 3 pin 5 A 29. Socket outlet and switch combined. 3 pin 5 A 30. Socket - outlet, 2pin 15A. 31. Socket-outlet, 3 pin 15A 32. Socket-outlet and switch combined, 2 pin 15A. 33. Socket outlet and switch combined 3 pin 15 A.
CW R C
Symbol
10. Main s witchs, power ... ... 11. Meter ... ... ... B.2. CEILING OUTLETS 12. Single light pendams .. ... 13. Counter weight pendant .. ... 14. Rod pendant 15. Chain pendant 16. Light Bracket 17. Batten lampholder 18 . Water - tight light fitting
BN WT
B.5. FIXED HEATING OUTLETS 34. Convention heater 35. Electric unit heater 36. Immersion heater 37. Thermostat 38. Immersion heater with incorporated thermostat
WBSEBEA - 18
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Description 39. Self-conditioned electric water heater 40. Humidistat B.6. BELLS AND BUZZERS 41. Bell push 42. Bell 43. Buzzer 44. Indicator (at 'N', Insert number of ways) 45. *Relay B.7. CLOCKS 46. Synchronous clock outlet 47. Impulse clock outlet 48. Master clock B.8. FIRE ALARMS 49. Fire alarm push 50. Automatic contact 51. Bell connected to fire alarm 52. Fire alarm indicator (at 'N' Insert number of ways) B.9. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 53. Amplifier .. 54. Control board 55. Microphone outlet N
H
Symbol
Description 56. Loudspeaker outlet B.10.RADIO RECEPTION OUTLETS 57. Receiver outlet 58. Aerial B.11. FIXED APPARATUS OUTLETS 59. Ceiling fan
Symbol
VV

60. Braket fan 61. Exhaust fan
v v v
62. Fan regulator 63. Cooker control unit B.12. EARTHING 64. Earth point 65. Surge diverter B.13. OTHER SYMBOLS 66. Pilot or corridor lamp 67. Indicator (buzzer may be added if required) 68. Relay N
A .....
69. Reset position 70. Horn or hooter 71. Siren
This general symbol is applicable to any system by the addition of an identifying symbol (appropriate to particular system) in the upper half, for example, bell system relay. Where items of operations are combined, the symbols may be combined, for example, idicator and bell At 'N' insert the number of ways.
WBSEBEA - 19
PRELIMINARIES OF TOWER LOADING CONCEPT

1. Classification of Loads : (a) Climatic Loads : Related to Reliability requirements (b) Failure containment Loads - Related to security requirements (c) Construction & maintenance Loads - Related to safety requirements. Climatic Loads : Due to action of wind on conductor / G.W., insulator and do not act continuously. This load shall be determined under either of the following climatic conditions which every is more stringent. (i) 100% design wind pressure at everyday temperature. (ii) 36% design wind pressure at minimum temperature. Failure containment Loads : These loads comprises of (i) Anti cascading loads (ii) Torsional and longitudinal loads. (a) Cascade failure may be caused by failure of items such as insulators, hardware, joints, failures of major components due to defective materials. (b) Caused due to breakage of conductors and groundwires. Construction & maintenance Loads : During construction and maintenance of Transmission Lines. Computation of loads : (A) Transverse load, (B) Longitudinal Load (C) Vertical Load Transverse Load - Reliability requirements - Normal condition (i) Wind load on tower structures, conductors, ground wires and insulator strings. (ii) Component of mechanical tension of conductor and ground wire due to line deviation. Transverse load : FWt - FWe - FWt - Fwd whereFwt - Wind on tower body Fwe - Wind on Conductor GW Fwi - Wind on insulator Fwd - Mechanical tension Longitudinal Load - No load for suspension or tension tower but only for D.E. Tower Vertrical Load - Due to wt. of conductor / groundwire, insulator and asscesories and S/W of tower str on weight span. Security requirements : Broken wire condition. Transverse Loads : For tangent type tower - 75% of W.L. on insulator, conductor / groundwire and tower body, for tension tower Full wind on insulator, conductor / groundwire and tower body. Component of mechanical tension due to line deviation. 50% of tension At 32o & 75% Full wind for conductor Suspension 100% of tension At 32o & 70% Full wind for Groundwireq Tower Tension AT 32o Full wind Longitudinal Load : 50% of tension at 32o, 75% Full Wind- for Suspension Tower 100% of tension at 32o Full Wind- for Tension Tower For D.E. Tower - nil
(a)
(b)
(c)
(A)
(B) (C)
(A) (i) (ii)
(B)
WBSEBEA - 20

(C) Vertical Load - S/W of conductor, G.W. Insulator S/W of Tower on span 60% of wt. span. Safety requirement : (A) Transverse Load (i) W.L. - Nil (ii) Due to mechanical tension at 32o, Nil wind for line deviation. (B) Longitudinal Load :For Suspension TowerFor sub-conductor & G.?W. as 10,000 N & 5000 N respectively For Tension Tower2 x T (T-50% of tension at 32o Nill Wind) Under stringing 1.5 x T (T-50% of tension at 32o Nil Wind)Stringing completed (C) Vertical Loads (S/W conductor, G.W., insulator, and S/W of Tower body) x 2 S/W - self weight. For Anticascading check (A) Transverse Load - At no wind condition (B) Longitudinal Load - At 32 deg, Nil wind tension, Zero degree line deviation. (C) Vertical Load - Sum of wt. at conductor / G.W. as per wt span of intact conductor / G.W., wt of insulator string and accessories.
(N.C.)
(B.W.C)
WBSEBEA - 21
D.E. (N.C.)
EFFECT OF WIND
Basic wind speed VbReference wind speed VR VR = Vb/Ko, Ko = Factor to convert 3 sec. peak gust into averaging period of 10 min - 1.375 Designed wind = Vd = VR x K1 x K2 speed
K 1 Risk coeff K 2 Teerain Roughness coeff.
Designed wind = Pressure Pd = 0.6 Vd2 On Tower body Fwt = Pd x Cdt X Ae x GT
Pd Ac = GT =
Design wind pressure in N/m2 Cdt = Drag coeff Net suface area Gust response factor, related to ground roughness & ht above ground level.
Wind on conductor & G.w. Fwc = Pd x Cdc x L x d x Gc Pd = design wind pressure, Cde - drag coeff - for conductor - 1 for GW 1./2
L = wind Spain in meter d = diameter of cable in meter Gc = yest response fatter
Wind load on Insulator st.. Fri - Cd x Pd x Ai x Gi Edi = drag coeff taken as 1.2
Pd = design wind pressure Gi = Gust response factor
Di = 50% of profelted area of insulator
WBSEBEA - 22

SAG TENSION CALCULATION : Sag tension parabolic eq f2 [f- (K-E alpha t) ] = (12 delta2 E q2) / 24 f = Working tensile stress of conductor on kg/cm2 k = Computed from initial temperature and wind pressure conditions assumed. E = Final Modules of Elasticity in kg/cm2 alfa = Coef of linear expansion of conductor per dg C. t = Change of t emperature = Final - initial in deg C. 1 = Span length in meter dealt = Wt of conductor / m / Cm2 = W/A kg/m/cm2 where A = cross sectional area of conductor in cm2 q = loading factor = SQRT ((W2 + P2) / W2)) Where W = Wt at conductor in kg/m length of conductor P = Wind load in kg/m length of conductor If suffix "1" corresponds to temp. condition at Every day temperature with maximum wind "2" to everyday temperature with still wind and "3" to maximum temperature in still wind condition, the above sag - tension formula are written as follows : (a) Everyday temp. 32 deg c in still wind (assumed as starting initial condition Suffix - 1) f22 [f2-(K-E alpha t)] = (12 delta2 E q22) / 24 (1) Assume (12 delta2 E) / 24 = Z and initial temp t2 = 32 dg C t = 0, E alpha t = 0, q2 = 1 Ultimate strength of conductor f2 = ------------------------------------------------------FOS (4) x cross actional area on cm2 (A) Substiutng the above values in the equation and solving K = f2 - Z/f22 (B) Every day temperature ith full wind (suffix - 1) f 2 [f1- {k-E alfa (t1 - t2)} = Zq12 - (2) 1 Value of K computed from (a) is substituted in (2) and the cubic equation is solved for f2- the maximum tensile stress of the conductor. If T1 is the maximum tension at the Everyday temperature with full wind T1 = f1A F.O.S. = T (Ultimate Strength) / T1 FOS is equal to o r > 70% i.e. 1.454. value at k computed from (a) and q3 = 1, substitute in (3) and solved for f3 - find f3 at maximum temperature & still wind. q3 delta 12 Maximum sag = --------------- m (inclined) 8f2 A sample sag - tension chart is given in next page.
n
WBSEBEA - 23

SPAN 300.00 M. Characteristics of Wires Name ...................... NCCM NOCM Cm CM2 KG/M KG/CM2 PER DG KG KG/.M2 1.000 CONDUCTOR SR WIND No FACT 1 2 3 4 5 1.0000 0.0000 0.3600 0.0000 0.0000 WIND Press 16.000 NIL 59.760 NIL NIL Temp [DDG-C) 32.0 32.0 4.0 4.0 75.0 Sag (M) Tension (KG) 4840.3 2142.4 3328.3 2629.8 1653.6 FOS AVAL 1.886 4.260 2.742 3.471 5.519 Fos REQD 1.428 4.000 1.429 1.429 1.429 Wind Acting Perpendicular to the line Conductor Groundwire Panther ACSR 30/0.30 7/0.30 2.100 2.617 0.976 0.78700E + 06 0.17800E-04 9127. 166.00 1.000 GSW
Strands In Aluminium Strand in Steel Diameter .. Sectional Area Unit Weight Modulus of Elasticity Coffe. of Linear Exrn. Ultimate Strength Wind Pressure Details Full Wind Pressure ... Exposure Factor ..
0.945 0.546 0.428 0.19330E=07 0.11500E=04 5710. 207.00
5.125
4.175 6.640*
GW Made Parallel AP Condition 4 (Parallel Factor for GW = 0.9000) GROUND - WIRE
SR WIND No FACT 1 2 3 4 5 1.0000 0.0000 0.3600 0.0000 0.0000
WIND Pres 207.000 NIL 74.520 NIL NIL
Temp [DDG-C) 32.0 32.0 4.0 4.0 53.0
Sag (M) 2691.1 4.379 3.758* 4.874
Tension (KG) 2.122 1099.6 1733.8 1281.4 988.0
FOS AVAL 1.426 5.192 3.293 4.456 5.780
Fos REQD
4.000 1.428 1.428 1.428
NOTE : * Indicates starting condition.
WBSEBEA - 24

11.7.1 METHOD OF ERECTION : There are four main methods of erection of steel transmission towers which a re described below : (i) Build-up method or Pecemeal method. (ii) Section method. (iii) Ground assembly method. (iv) Helicopter method. 11.7.1.1. Build Up Method This method is most commonly used in this country for the erection of 6.6 kV, 132 kV, 220 kV and 400 kV transmission line towers due to the following advantages : (i) Tower materials can be supplied to site in knowcked down condition which facilitates easier and cheaper transportation. (ii) It does not require any heavy machinery such as cranes etc. (iii) Tower erection activity can be done in any kind of terrain and mostly throughout the year. (iv) Availability of workmen at cheap rates. This method consists of erecting the towers, member by member. The tower members are kept on ground serially according to erection sequence to avoid search or time loss. The erection progresses from the bottom upwards. The four main corner leg members of the first section of the tower are first erected and guued off. Sometimes more than one contiguous leg sections of each corner leg are bolted together at the ground and erected. The cross bracs of the first section which are already assembled on the ground are raised one by one as a unit and bolted to the already erected corner leg angles. First section of the lower thus built and horizontal struts (belt members) if any, are bolted in position. For assembling the second section of the tower, two gin poles are placed one each on the top of diagonally opposite corner legs. These two poles are used, for raising parts of second section. The leg members and braces of this section are then hoisted and assembled. The gin poles are then shifted to the corner leg members on the top of second section to raise the parts of third section of the lower in position for assembly. Gin poles are thus moved up as the tower grows. This process is continued till the complete tower is erected. Cross-arm members are assembled on the ground and raised up and fixed to the main body of the tower. For heavir towers, a small boom is rigged on one of the tower legs for hoisting purposes. The members / sections are hoisted either manually or by winch machines operated from the ground. For smaller base towers / vertical configuration towers one gin pole is used instead of two gin poles. In order to maintain speed and efficiency, a small assembly party goes ahead of the main erection gang and its purpose is to sort out the tower membrs, keeping the members in correct position on the ground and assembling the panels on the ground which can be erected as a complete unit. Sketches indicating different steps or erection by build up method are shown in Annexure-'L'. 11.7.1.2. SECTION METHOD : In the section method, major sections of the tower are assembled on the ground and the same are erected as units. Either a mobile crane or a gin pole is used. The gin pole used is approximately 10 m long and is held in place by means of guys by the side of the tower to be erected. The two opposite sides of the tower section of the tower are assembled on the ground. Each assembled side is then lifted clear of the ground with the gin or derrick and is lowered into position on bolts to stubs or anchor bolts. One side is h held in place with props while the other side is being erected. The two opposite sides are then laced together with cross members and diagonals; and the assembled section is lined up, made square to the line. After completing the first section, gin pole is set on the top of the first section. The gin rests on a strut of the tower immediately below the leg joint. The gin pole then has to be properly guyed into position.
WBSEBEA - 25

The first face of the second section is raised. To raise the second face of this section it is necessary to slide the foot of the gin on the strut of the opposite face of the tower. After the two opposite faces are raised, the lacing on the other two sides is bolted up. The last lift raises the top of the towers. After the tower top is placed and all side lacings have been bolted up all the guyes are thrown off except one which is used to lower the gin pole. Sometimes whole one face of the tower is assembled on the ground, hoisted and supported in position. The opposite face is similarly assembled and hoisted and then the brancing angles connecting these two faces are fitted. 11.7.1.3. GROUND ASSEMBLY METHOD This method consists of assembling the tower on ground, and erecting it as a complete unit. The complete tower is assembled in a horizontal position on even ground. The tower is assembled along the direction of the line to allow the cross arms to be fitted. One slopping ground, however, elaborate packin of the low side is essential before assembly commences. After the assembly is complete the tower is picked up from the ground with the help of a crane and carried to its location, and set on its foundation. For this method of erection, a level piece of ground close to footing is chosen from the tower assembly. This method is not useful when the towers are large and heavy and the foundations are located in arable land where building and erecting complete towers would cause damage to large areas or in hilly terrain where the assembly of complete tower on sloping ground may not be possible and it may be difficult to get crane into position to raise the complete tower. In India, this method is not generally adopted because of prohibitive cost of mobile crane, and nonavailability of good approach roads to tower locations. 11.7.1.4. HELICOPTER METHOD : In the helicopter method, the transmission tower is erected in section. For example bottom section is first lifted on to the stubs and then the upper section is lifted and bolted to the first section and the process is repeated till the complete tower is erected. Sometimes a completely assembled toer is raised with the help of helicopter. Helicopters are also used for lifting completely assembled towers with guys from the marshalling yards where these are fabricated and then transported one by one to line locations. Helicopter hovers over the line location while the tower is securely guyued. The ground crew men connect and tighten the tower guys. As soon as the guy wires are adequately tensioned the helicopter disengages and files to the marshalling yard. This method is adopted where approach is v very difficult or to speed up the construction of the transmission line. 11.7.2. TIGHTENING OF NUTS AND PUNCHING OF THREADS AND TACK WELDING OF NUTS : All nuts shall be tightened properly using correct sized spanners. Before tightening it is ensured that filter washers and plates are placed in relevant gaps between members, bolt of proper size and length are inserted and one spring washer is inserted under e each nut. In case of step bolts, spring washer shall be placed under the outer nut. The tightening shall be carried on progressively from the top downwards, care being taken that all bolts at every level are tightened simultaneously. It may be better to employ four persons, each covering one leg and the face to his right. The threads of bolts shall be projected outside the nuts by one to two threads and shall be punched at three positions on the top inner periphery of the nut and bolt to ensure that the nuts are not loosened in course of time. If during tightening a nut is found to be slipping or running over the bolt threads, the bolt together with the nut shall be changed outright. 11.7.3. PAINTING OF JOINTS : For galvanized towers is coastal or highly polluted areas, the joints shall be painted with zinc paint on all contact surfaces during the course of erection. 11.7.4. CHECKING THE VERTICALITY OF ERECTED TOWERS : The finally erected tower shall be truly vertical after erection and no straining is permitted to bring it in alignment. Tolerance limit for vertical shall be one in 360 of the tower height.
WBSEBEA - 26
CONCEPT OF TRANSMISSION TOWER FOUNDATION

Foundation of any structure plays an important role in safety and satisfactory performance of the structure as it transsmits the loads from structure to earth. Without having a sound and safe foundation, structure cannot performs the functions for which it has been designed. The foundations in various types of soils have to be designed to suit the soil conditions of particular type. In addition to foundations of normal towers, there are situations where considering techno-economical aspect for special towers required or river crossing which may be located either on the bank of the river or in the mind stream or both, pile foundation may be provided. Type of loads on foundation : The foundation of towers are normally subjected to three types of forces. These are : (a) the compression or downward thrust (b) the tension or uplift (c) the lateral forces of side thrusts in both transverse and longitudinal directions. The magnitudes or limit loads for foundations should be taken 10% higher than these for the corresponding towers. The base slab of the foundation shall be designed for additional moments developing due to eccentricity of the loads. The additional weight of concrete in the footing below ground level over the earth weight and the full weight of concrete above ground level in the footing and embeded steel part also be taken into account; adding to the downthrust. Soil parameters For designing the foundations, following parameters are required. (a) Limit bearing capacity of soil. (b) Density of soil (c) Angle of earth frustum The above values are available from soil test report. 7.4. STABILITY ANALYSIS : 7.4.1. In addition to the strength design, stability analysis of the foundation shall be done to check the possibility of failure by over turning, uprooting of stubs, sliding and tilting of foundation etc. The following primary type of noil resistance shall be assumed to act in resisting the loads imposed on the footing in earth. 7.4.2 Resistance against uplift. The uplift loads shall be assumed to be resisted by the weight of earth in an inverted frustum of a pyramid of earth whose sides make an angle equal to the angle of reporc of the earth with the vertical in average soil. The volume of earth computation shall be as per e nclosed drawing (Fig.3) The weight of concrete embdded in earth and that above the ground level shall also be considered for resisting the uplift. In case where the frustum of earth pyramid of two adjoining legs overlaps each other, the earth frustum shall be assumed truncated by a vertical plane passing through the centre line of the tower base. Over load factor (OLF) of 10% (Ten percent) shall be considered over the design load i.e. OLF=1.10 for suspension tower and 1.15 for angle ower including dead end and anchor tower. However, for special tower OLF shall be 1.20. 7.4.3. Resistance against down thrust : The following load combinations shall be resisted by the bearing strength of the soil : (1) The down thurst loads combined with a dditional weight of concrete above earth are assumed to be acting on the total area of the bottom of the footing. (2) The moment due to side thurst forces at the bottom of the footing. The structrual design of the base slab shall be developped for the above load combination. In case of toe pressure calculation due to above load combination allowable bearing pressure to be increased
WBSEBEA - 27

by 25%. 7.4.4. Resistance against side thrust : The chimner shall be designed as per limit state method for the combined action of axial forces, tension and compression and the associated maximum bending moment. In these calculations, the tensile strength of concrete shall be ignored. 7.4.5. Resistance against uprooting of stub. : OLF of 10% (Ten percent) shall be considered i.e. OLF = 1.10 for normal suspension towers and 1.15 for angle tower including Dead end / anchor tower. For special towers OLF shall be 1.20. 7.4.6. The foundation and chimney shall be checked against axial tension combined with bending also.

HU
HL
HLten HUtan
B HUtan H'Ltan
Upper Portion A1 = B2 + 4 x B HL Tan a + A (HL tanA)2 A2 = B2 + 4 x B x (HL tan a + HU tan B) + A (HL tan a + HU tan B)2 VU = HU/3 [A1 + A2 + A1 x A2] Lower Portion B2 HL + 2B HL2 tana + A / 3 HL3 - tan2
FORMULA FOR CONICAL PYRAMID FRUSTUM OF EARTH FIG.3
WBSEBEA - 28
Annexure - I
GUIDELINES FOR CLASSIFICATION OF FOUNDATIONS IN DIFFERENT SOILS

Sl. Name of soil encountered 1. 2. In good sil (silty sand mixed with clay) Where top layer of Black Cotton soil extends upto 50% of the depth with good soil there after. Where top layer of black cotton soil exceeds 50% and extends upto full depth or is followed by good soil. Where top layer is good soil upto 50% of the depth but the lower layer is a black cotton soil Where subsoil water is met at 1.5 ml or more below the ground level in good soil Good soil locations which are in surface water for long period with water penetration not exceeding 1.0 m below ground level (e.g. paddy fields). In good soil where subsoil water is encountered between 0.75m and 1.5m depth from ground level. In good soil where subsoil water is encountered within 0.75 m depth from ground level Where top l ayer of normal dry soil extends upto 85% of the d epth followed by fissured rock without presence of water. Type of foundation to be adopted Normal Dry Partial Black Cotton
3.
Black Cotton
4.
Black Cotton
5.
Wet
6.
Wet
7.
Partially submerged
8.
Fully Submerged
9.
Dry Fissured Rock
10. Where top layer is lissured rock followed by good soil/sandy soil with/without presence of water 11. Where normal soil/tissured rock extends upto 85% of the depth followed by hard rock
Special foundation
Dry fissured Rock with under cut in Fisured Rock combined with anchor bar for hard rock ddsign Submerged Fissured Rock
12. Where fissure rock os encountered with subsoil water within 0.75m or below 0.75m from G.L. (Top layer may be either a good soil or black cotton soil) 13. Where Hard Rock is cncountered at 1.5 m or less below ground level. 14. Where Hard Rock is encountered from 1.5 m to 2.5m below G.L. (Top layer being good soil)
Hard Rock
Hard Rock Foundation with chimney for Normal Soil
WBSEBEA - 29
15. Where hard rock is encountered from 1.5m to 2.5 m below G./L. (Top layer either in Black cotton) soil or fissured Rock) 16. Where fissured rock is encountered at the bottom of pit (with black cotton soil at top) 17. Where hard rock is encountered at bottom with water and black cotton soil at top and hard rock layer depth is less than 1.5 m. 18. Sandy soil with clay content not exceeding 10% 19. Sandy soil with water table in the pits
Hard Rock Foundation design with chimneys designed for wet black cotton soil. Composite Foundation
Hard Rock
Dry Sandy soil foudation Wet sandy soil design to be developed considering the depth of water. Normal dry with undercut
20. Where top layer upto 1.5 m below G.L. is normal dry soil and thereafter hard soil/murrum 21. Where bottom layer is marshy soil with top layer of good soil/fissured rock/black cotton
Soil investigation is to be carried out and special foundation design to be developed. Normal dry with undercut
22. Where the top layers are a combination of clinker mixed with firm soil, gravel and stone chips upto 60% of foundation deapth from ground level followed by hard murrum 23. Where top layers are combination of hard murrum, soft rock etc. followed by yellow/black clayee soil
Special foundation design is to be developed after carrying out soil investigation.
Any other combination of soil not covered above shall require development of special foundation design.
WBSEBEA - 30
TOWER FOUNDATION DESIGN CALCULATION

400 KV D/C Transmission line Tower type : "DB" Design loads (Limiting / Ultimate) (inclusive of overload factor 1.2) Description Down thrust uplift side thrust (T) side thrust (L) Tower Slopes : TAN 0=0.192570 True length factor - 1.036 Soil/rock data : Unit wight of dry spoil - 1440 kg/cu.m Unit weight of wef soil = 940 kg/cum Unit weight of dry fissured rock = 1700 kg/cu.m Unit w eight of wet f issured rock = 940 kg/cu.m. Unit weight of hard rock = 1440 kg/cu.m. Limit bearing capacity (dry locations) ; 27350 kg/sq.m. Limit bearing capacity (wet locations) : 13675 kg/sq.m. Limit bearing capacity (fissured rock locations) : 625000 kg/sq.m. Limit bearing capacity (hard rock lcations) : 125000 kg/sq.m. LUSTRATION NO. -1 ESIGN OF WET TYPE FOUNDATION Volume of Concrete (Cu.m.) : 5.192 x 0.050 5.192 x 0.100 0.25/3 (5.192 + 4.692 + 5.19 x 4.69) 1.742 x 0.2 0.652 x 2.625 = = = = = 1.347 2.694 6.106 0.605 1.109
3000 2400 225
Normal Condition (Reliability) (Kgs) 165598 140917 5907 825
Broken Wire Condition Security (Kgs.) 154376 130185 8283 4983
C.L G.L 650 SQ.

1500
866
30
367
1350
100 250
200
15
Lean Concrete (1
= 11.861
1740 4690 5190
50
Y X
Www
WBSEBEA - 31
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 2.0. Over Load of Concrete (kgs.) : Compression = 228 = 11295 = = 11523 3.0. Dry Soll Volume : (Cu.m.) = 2 2 A1 = 5.19 + 4 x 5.19 x 0.362 + 3.14 x 0.362 A2 = 5.192 + 4 x 5.19 x (0.866+0.362) + 3.14 x (0.866+0.362)2 V = (1.5/3) (34.857+57. 160+ (34.857 x 57.160) 4.0. Wet Soil Volume : (Cu.m) 5.192 x 1.45 5.19 x 0.362 x2 x 1.35 3.14/3 x 0.3622 x 1.35 Check for Uplift Resistance Against Uplift = 68.327 x 1440 + 44.311 x 940 + 5337 = 145380 kgs. F.O.S. (NC) = 145380 / 140917 = 1.032 > 1.0 Hence O.K. F.O.S. (BWC) = 145380 / 130185 = 1.120 > 1.0 Hence .O.K. Moment due to side Thrust at Foundation Toe Normal Condition (Transverse Side Thurst) Side thrust force = (F) = 1/2 x w x h2 x 83 x 1 + Where W = 940 kg/m3 = Angle of Earth Frustum = 150 B3 = 0.65 1+Sin1590 F = 1/2 x 940 x (h)2 x x 0.65 1Sin150 n = (F/518.8) F1 = ST = 5907 kgs h = (5907/ 518.86) = 3.374m Since h > (2.4.0.5) i.e. 1.9 m depth. Resisting and force F = 518.86 x 1.92 = 1873.09 kg Momenet due to side thrust at the base of the footing = 590 x (2.95 + 0.225) - 1873.09 x (0.55 + 1.9/3) = 16538.85 kg m WBSEBEA - 32 Sin 1-Sin Uplift 228 608 4501 5337
0.65 x 0.225 x 2400 (11.681 - 0.095) x (2400-1440) 0.652 x 1.5 x (2400-1440) (11.861 - 1.347-0.095-0.634 x (1400-940)
= 34.857 = 57.160 = 68.327
= 39.057 = 5.069 = 0.185 44.311
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Normal Conditions (Longitudinal Side Thurst) Side thurst force = (F) 1/2 x w x h x B3 x 1+Sin 1/sin W = 940 kg/m3 = Angle of Earth Frustrum = 150 B3 = 0.65 m 1+Sin1590 F = 1/2 x 940 x (h)2 x x 0.65 1Sin150 h = (518.86) F1 = Sl = 825 Kgs h = (825/518.96) = 1.261m Since h < (2.4-0.5) m therefore the soil pressure will only be mobilised in 1.261 m depth from root of the chimney. Resisting soil force F = 518.86 x 1.2612 = 825kg Moment due to side thrust at the base of the footing = 825 x (2.95 + 0.225) - 825 x (0.55 + 1.261/3) = 1818.85 kg m 6.3 Broken Wire Condition (Transverse Side Thrust) 1+Sin Side thrust force = (F) = 1/2 x w x h2 x B3 x 1-Sin Where W = 940 kg/m3 = Angle of Earth Frustrum = 150 B30 = 0.65 m 1+Sin150 F = 1/2 x 940 x (h) x x 0.65 1-Sin150
2
h = (f/518.86) F1 = ST = 8283kgs h = (8283/518.86) = 3.996m Since h > (2.4.0.5) m therefore the soil pressure will only be mobilised in (2.4-0.5) i.e., 1.9m in Resisting soil force F = 518.86 x 1.92=1873.09 kg. Moment due to side thrust at the base of the footing = 82830 (2.95 + 0.225) - 1873.09 x (0.55 + 1 .9/3) = 24082.70 kg m
WBSEBEA - 33
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 6.4 Broken Wire Condition (Longitudinal Side Thrust) 1+Sin Side thrust force= (F) = 1/2xwxh2 x B3 x 1-Sin Where W - 940 kg m3 = Angle of Earth Frustrum = 150 B3 = 0.65 m 1+Sin150 F = 1/2 x 940 x (h)2 x ox 0.65 1-Sin15 h = (F/518.86) F1 = SL = 4983Kgs h = (4983/518.86) = 3.099m Since h> (2.4-0.5) m therefore the soil pressure will only be mobilised in 1.9 m depth. Resisting soil force F=518.86 x 1.92 = 1873.09 kg Moment due to side thrust at the base of the footing = 4983 x (2.95 + 0.225) - 1873.09 x (0.55 + 1.9/3) 13605.2 kg m 7.0. Check for Bearing Capacity 165598 / 1.036 + 11523 2 x (165598/1.036) x 0.192570x0.6 NC = + 5.192 1/6 x 5.193 16538.86 1818.85 + + 1/6 x 5.193 1/6 x 5.193 = 6362 + 1585.3 + 710 + 78' = 8736 kg/m2 < 13675 kg/m2
Hence O.K.
154376 / 1.036 + 11523 2 x (154376/1.036) x 0.192570 x (0.6) BWC = + 5.192 1/6 x 5.193
24082.70 + 1/6 x 5.193
13605.2 + 1/6 x 5.193
= 9056 kg/m3 < 13675kg/m2 Hence O.Kl.
WBSEBEA - 34
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 8.0. Design of chimney A) Compression with bending Area of steel in compression ASC = 24 x /4 x (2.0)2 = 75.40 cm2 percentage of steel = p = ASC / B32 x 100 : B3 = 65 cm = 1.785 p/fck = 1.785/15 = 0.119 Normal Condition Puc = 165698 kgs = 1624516N Puc 1624516 = = 0.256 fck.bd 15x650x650 d' = 50(20/2) = 60 d = 650 therefore d'/d = 0.10 As per chart 44 of Sp. 16 For the values of Puc/fckbd Mux1/fckbd2 = 0.65 Mux1
= 0.256 & p/fck = 0.119 = 0.165 x 15 x 650 x 6502 = 679.7 x 106 N-mm = 679.7 kN-m
Also Muy 1=679.7 kN-m From the calculation shown in $6.0 Moment at the root of the chemney Mux = 5907 x (2.4+0.225) - 187309.09 x (1.9/3) = 14320.21 kgm = 140.5 kN m Muy = 825 x (2.4 + 0.225) - 1873.09 x (1.9/3) = 1818.88 kg m = 1 7.84 kN m Ref : Clause 38.6 of IS-456-1978 PUZ = 0.45 x fck x AC + 0.75 fy ASC = 0.45 x 15 x (650)2 + 0.75 x 415 x (24 x /4 x 202) = 5198650.2 N = 5198.65 kN PUC = 165598 Kgs = 1724.5 kN PUC PUZ 1624.5 = = 0.3125 5198.65 1.1875 1.1875 17.84 679.70
for PUC / PUZ = 0.3125; n = 1.1875 n n
(MUX) MUX1)
(MUY) (MUY1)
140.50 679.7
= 0.154 + 0.013 = 0.167 < 1.0 Hence O.K. WBSEBEA - 35
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. BROKEN WIRE CONDITION PUC = 154376 kgs = 1514.4 kN PUC / fckbd = 1514.4 x 1000 / 15 x 650 x 50 = 0.239 p/fck = 0.119 As per chart 44 of SP 16 MUX 1/fckbd2 = 0.167 MUX1 = 0.167 x 15 x 6502 = 687.90 x 106 N-mn = 687.90 kN-m Also MUY1 = MUX1 = 687.90 kN-m From the calculation shown in $ 6.0 Moment at the root of the chimney Mux = 8283 x (2.4+0.225) = 1873.09 x (1.9/3) = 20557.21 kg m = 201.67 kN m Muy = 4983 x (2.4 + 0.225) - 1873.09 x (1.9/3) = 11894.71 kg m = 116.69 kN m PUZ = 5198.65 kN
PUC/PUZ = 1514.4/5198.65 = 0.2913; n = 1.152. n n + 1.152 = 1.152 +
(MUX) (MUX1)
(MUY) (MUY1)
201.67 687.90
116.69 687.90
= 0.243+0.129 = 0.373 < 1.0 Hence OK Tension with Bending Normal Condition PUt = 140917 kgs = 1382396 N Put/fckbd = 1382396 / 15 x 650 x 650 = (-) 0.22 P = 1.785 p/fck = 0.119 From Chart 79 of SP 16 Mux 1 / fckbd - 0.085 Mux 1 = 350 15 kN m Muxc 1 = Muy 1 = 350.15 kN m Mux = 140.5 kN m Muy = 17.85 kN m
WBSEBEA - 36
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. As per c1.38.6 of IS : 456 : 1978 n n (MUY) + (MUY1
[ [ [
(MUX) (MUX1)
< 1.0
n = 1.0 for tension with bending (MUX) + (MUX1)
[ [
(MUY) (MUY1)
140.5 17.85 + 350.15 350.15 = 0.452 < 1.0 Hence O.K. BROKEN WIRE CONDITION Put = 130185 kgs = 1277.1 kN Put/fckbd = 1277115/15 x 650 x 650 = (-) 0.202 P-1.785 p/fck - 0.119 d/d = 0.10 From Chart 79 of S P 16 ...... Mux 1 = 370.75 kN m Mux 1 Muy 1 = 370.75 kN m Mux = 201.67 kN m Muy = 116.7 kN m As per c1.38.6 of IS-456.-1978 n
n < 1.0
[ [
(MuX) + (MUX1)
[ [
(MUY) (MUY1)
an = 1.0 for tension with bending (MuX) + (MUX1) (MUY) (MUY1)
201.67 116.70 = + 370.75 370.75 = 0.858 < 1/0 < 1.0 Hence O.K.
WBSEBEA - 37
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 9.0. Design of Base Slab Design Bearing Pressure = (P/A) + (P.ex / Z) + MAX (ST moment, SL moment) / Z = 6362 + 1585.3/2 + 710 = 7865 kg / m2 = 0.07715 N/mm2 d1 = Eff. depth at Section XX = 550-50-6-8 = 476 mm d2 = Eff. depth at Section YY = 350-50-16-8 = 276 mm Compression Reinforcement (i) Bending Moment at Section X-X Bearing Pressure = 7865 kg/m2 = 0.07715 N/mm2 MUX1 = 0.077 15 x (B-B3)2/8 x 5190 = 0.07715 x (5190-650)2 / 8 x 5190 = 1031708 030 N-mm = 1031.6 kN m MU, LIM = 0.36 Xu, max/d) (1-0.42 xu, max/d) bd2 fck As per C1.37.1 f of IS - 456 for Fe 415 grade steel Xumax/d = 0.48 Mu.LIM = 0.36 x 0.48 (1-0.42 x 0.48) x 1740 x (476)2 x 15 = 815.8 kNm < 1 031.7 kNm Mux1/bd2 = 1031.7 x 106 / (1740 x 4762) = 2618 > 2.06
a)
Hence section to be designed as doubl reinforced reinforced section. d'/d = 50+16+8) / 476 = 0.15 From table 49 of SP 16 Pt = 0.8956, Pc = 0.192 Hence Ast = (1740 x 476 x 0.8965) / 100 = 7418 mm2 Provide 37 bars of 16 mm dia. Ast provided = 7437 mm2 > 7418 mm2 Asc = (1740 x 476 x 0.192) / 100 = 1590.2 mm2 Provide 8 bars of 16 mm dia.
WBSEBEA - 38
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. This is the minimum reinforcement to be provifded at sectionX-X for uplift. Bending Moment at Section Y-Y Muy 1 = 0.07715 x (5190-1740)2 x 5190 / 8 = 595.73 kNm
Muy1/bd2 = 595.73 x 106 / (4690 x 267)2 = 1.67 < 2.06 Hence section to be designed as singly reinforced section. From table 1 of SP 16 Pt = 0.546 Hence Ast = (4690 x 276 x 0.546) / 100 = 7068 mm2 Provide 37 bars of 16 mm dia. Ast provided = 7437mm2 > 7067 mm2 Uplift Reinforcement Bearing Pressure P2 = 140917/(5.192-0.652) = 5314.9 kg/m2 = 0.052139 N/mm2
Bending Moment at Section X-X MUX2 = 0.052139 x (5190.650)2/8 x 1000 = 134333520 N mm/m
MUX2 = 0.87 x 415 x Ast x 476 (1-Ast 415/1000 x 276 x 15) Ast = 820.81 mm2 / m-width = 8.21cm2 / m-width Ast reqd 8-21 x 1.74 =14.29 cm2 Provide 8 bars of 16 mm Ast. Provided = 16.08 cm2 > 14.29 cm2 Hence depth provided at Section X-X is ok. Bending Moment at Section Y-Y = 0.052139 x (5190-1740)2 / 8 x 1000 = 77573055 N. mm/m = 0.87 x 415 x Ast. x 276 (1-Ast x 415 / 1000 x 276 x 15) = 850.9 mm2 / m-width = 8.51 cm2 / m-width Ast. reqd. 8.51 x 4.69 = 39.91 cm2 Provide 22 bars of 16 mm Ast Provided - 44.22 cm2 > 39.91 cm2 Hence depth provided at Section Y-Y is ok. MUY2 MUY2 Ast
WBSEBEA - 39
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Check For One Way Shear At S ection X-X Design bearing Pressure p-07715 N mm2 B-B2 Shear force = V1 = - dt x p 2 = 0.07715 x [(5190.650) /2-476] x 1000 = 138407 N/m width Shear Stress = 138407 / 476 x 1000 = 0.291 N/mm2 % of Steel (p) = (Ast/bd) x 100 = (74.37 x 100) / (5190 x 476) x 100 = 0.301 As per table 13 of IS:456-1978 Allowable Shear Stress = 0.3806 N/mm2 > 0.291 N/mm2 Hence O.K. At Sec Y-Y p=0.07715 N/mm2 B-B2 Shear force = V2 = - d2 x p 2 0.07715 x [(5190-1740) / 2.276] x 1000 = 111790 N/m Shear Stress = 111790 / 276 x 1000 = 0.4050 N/mm2 Ast/ bdx 100 = 74.37 x 100 / (5190 x 276) x 100 = 0.5192 Allowable Shear Stress = 0.468 N/mm2 > 0.405 N/mm2 Hence OK. d) Check for Two Way Shear At Section X-X p = 0.07715 N/ mm2 Shear force = V2 (B2-(B3+D1)2] x p = 0.07715 x [51902 - (650 + 476)2 ] = 1980304 N Shear Stress = 1980304 / 4 x 476 [650+476) = 0.924 N/mm2 Allowable Shear Stress = 0.25 x (15) = 0.968 N/mm2 > 0.024 N mm2 Hence OK.
WBSEBEA - 40
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. At Section Y-Y p = 0.07715 N/mm2 Shear force = V2 (B2-(B3+D1)2] x p = 0.07715 x [51902 - (1740 +276)2 ] = 1764563 N Shear Stress = 1764563 / 4 x 276 [1740+276) = 0.793 N mm2 Allowable Shear Stress = 0.25 x 15 = 0.968 N/mm2 > 0.793N mm2 Hence OK. e) Check Against Uprooting of Stub : Design Uplitt = 140917 Kgs. Stab section 200 x 200 x 16 Stub depth below GL = 2800 mm Ult. Load resisted by stub in slab due to Bond Us = [D x (X x 2.0 + (X-Ts) x 2.0) Npx (X+ (X-Ts)) x k] x s Where X = flange width of stub. D = Depth of slub in stub s = Ultimate permissible bond stress between stub & concrete Ts = Thickness of stub section. Np = No. of cleat pair (Pair consists of outer and inner cleats) k = Flange with of cleat section Us = (40 x (20 x 2 + (20-1.6) x 2) -3x (20+(20-1.6) x 11) x10 = 18048 x kg Ultimate permissible bearing stress in concerete = 68.84 kg/cm2 Use outer cleat = 3 nos. 110 x 110 x 8 - 400 mm long Use inner cleat = 3 nos. 110 x 110 x 8 - 250 mm long provide 4 nos. of 16 dia. bolts per cleat pair of 5.6 grade resisted by cleat in bearing Uc = bx (Lo+Li) x Np x (k-Ct) Where b/ = Ultimate Bearing pressure in concrete Lo = Length of outer cleat Li = Length of Inner cleat Ct = Thickness of cleat Section. Uc = 68.84 x (40 + 25) x 3 x (110.8) = 136923 kg (i)
WBSEBEA - 41
Ultimate shear strength of bolts Ub= Total no of bolts x 2.0 x 2.01 x 3160 (considdering M-16 bolt grade 5.6 & double shear for cleat connected in pair) = (4x3) x 2.0 x 2.01 x 3160 = 152438 KG ..... (ii)
Stimate bearing strength of blolt in stub or cleat = = = Total nos. bolts x 1.6 x (Ts or 2 x Ct) x 5200 take Ts or 2 x Ct which ever is less (4x3) x 1.6 x 1.6 x 5200 159744 kg...... (iii)
Effective strength of stub and cleat = = = Us + Least of the strength of case (i) (ii) (iii) 18048 + Least of the strength of case (i) (ii) (iii) 18048 + 136923 154971 kg which is more than Ult. Uplitt = 140917 kg (Hence safe)
f)
Check For Bond Design bearing pressure = 0.07715 N/mm2 (5190-650) Maxm. Shear force = - 476 x 5190 x 0.07715 2 = 718333N As per Appendix - E or IS, 456-1978 Xu/d = 0.87 fy Ast. / 0.36 lak bd 0.87 x 415 x 7437 = 0.36 x 15 x 5190 x 476 = 0.2013 j = 1-Xu/d x 1/3 = 10.2013/3 - 0.933 Bond Stress = 718333/0.933 x 476 x 37 x x 16 0.877 N/mm2 > 1.6 N-mm2 Hence OK.
WBSEBEA - 42
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 10.0. Check for Sliding F1 = 1/2 x 1.5 x 6480 x 0.65 F2 = 1/2 x (2395 + 3832) x 0.9 xc 0.65 F3 = (0.2/2) (3832 +4151) x 1.74 F4 = (0.25/2) (4550 + 4151) x (4.69+5.19) F5 = (0.1/2) (4550 + 4710) x 5.19
= = = = = =
3159 1821 1389 5373 2403 14145
F.O.S. in NC = 14145 / 5907 = 2.40 > 10 F.O.S. in BWC = 14145 / 8283 = 1.71 > 1.0 Hence O.K. Check for Overturning Resultant Side Thrust (i) Under NC (ii) Under BWC = = = = (59072 + 8252) 5964 kg (82832 + 49832) 9666 kg
Total overturning Moment (i) Under NC = (140917/1.036) x (5.19/2-5.19/6) + 5964 x (2.95+0.225) 5338 x (5.19/2-5 a9/6) = 245016 kg mm (ii) Under BWC = (130185 / 2.036 x (5.19/2.5 19.6) + 9666 x (2.95 + 0.225) = 5338 x (5.19/2 - 5.19/6 = 238849 kg. m Total Resisting Moment = 1/2 x (68 327 x 1440 + 44311 x 940) + (5/6 x 5.19) = 3028.43 kg m Factor of Safety Under NC = 3028.43 / 245016 = 1.236 >1.0 Under BWC = 302843 / 238849 = 1.268 > 1.0 Hence O.K. Quantities per Tower Concrete Volume Excavation Volum Reinforcement 42.06 m3 + 5.39 m3 (M15) (M10) 361.68 m3 4962 kgs
10.
WBSEBEA - 43
3.0. 13.1.
Reinforcement Detail Barbending Schedule Sketch Length (mm) 5090 Bar (mm) 16 No. of Bas 76 nit wt. Wt/Length Wt/Tower (kg/m) (kgs) kgs 1.58 611.21 2444.84
5090 1640
26090 425 100 281 100 3000 100 100 4590 5352
16
16
1.56
68.00
272.00
16
44
1.58
372.07
1488.28
3350
20
20
2.47
165.49
661.96
550 550
2307
13
0.22
6.60
26.39
Total 13.2 Reinforcdment Sketch.
4893.47 4894 kgs
225
Stub
C.L G.L 650
Bar Mkd. 'D', 4-20 bars
(Stub lv. below G.L)
3000 2800
Bar Mkd. 'E', 6 mm bars 250 c/c Bar Mkd. 'B', (8+8) bars of 16 Bar Mkd. 'C', (22+22) bars of 16 Bar Mkd. 'A', (38+38) bars of 16
2088 5628 6228 50
100 250
kg. meters to be written in pressure design
REINFORCEMENT
WBSEBEA - 44
W
WBSEBEA - 45
W W W
W W
WBSEBEA - 46
W W
WBSEBEA - 47
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. CLASSIFICATION OF SUB-STATION a) Step-up sub-station b) Primary Grid Sub-station c) Secondary Sub-station d) Distribution Sub-station. e) Bulk supply & Industrial Sub-station f) Mining sub-station g) Mobile sub-station h) Switching sub-station STANDARD BAY SPACING
System Voltage (kv) 33 66 132 220 440
Bay Spacing (m) 6.0 7.6 10.4 17.0 27.0
WBSEBEA - 48
WBSEBEA - 49
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Bus-bar Material : Strain Bus-bar 72.5 kv. 30/7/3.00 ACSR Panther 145 kv 30/7/4.27 ACSR moose 245 kv 54/7/3.53 ACSR twin 420 kv 54/7/03.53 ACSRMoose or Quad. Rigid bus-bar Voltage 33 kv 66 kv. 132 kv. 2 20 kv 400 kv Diameter of pipe IPS (iron pipe size) 1.5 inches 2.0 inches 2.5 inches 3.0 inches 4.0 inches wt/m 1.3 1.90 2.97 3.89 7.68 Current carring capacity 1160 1440 1950 2350 3950
Chemical composition Copper - 0.05 % Magnisium - 0.4-0.9% Silicon - 0.3-0.7% (of Grade 63401wp) Iron, max - 0.5% Managanese, Max - 0.03% Aluminium - Remainder Ultimate tensile strength : 20.5 kg/mm2. Typical Power Transformer ratings : 33/11 kv 5/6.3 MVA 1/1.5/3/3.15 66/11 kv 5 MVA. 66/33/kv 6.3/7.5 MVA. 132/33 kv 12.5, 20, 3 1.5, 50 MVA 132/66 kv 10, 20, 31.5 MVA. 220/132 kv 100, 150, 160 MVA. 400 / 200 kv 3x105 MVA. 3VI Fault mva = , where 106 v = Service voltage I = Fault current
Typical ratings of ABCB (Air blast .... breaker) 12kv 250 MVA 22kv 500 MVA 145kv 3500 MVA 245kv 10000 mva 420kv 35000 MVA
WBSEBEA - 50
Typical rating of SF6 breaker Rated voltage (kv) Rated Current (A) Rated s/c current (kv) Breaking Capacity (mva) 36 1250 25 (3sec) 750 72.5 1250 25 (3s) 1000 145 1600 31.5 (3s) 7900 245 1600 40(3s) 16974 420 2000 40(1s) 29098
Rated current of disconnect switch 200, 400, 630, 800, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000 Amps (IS : 1 818-1972) Rated Voltage : 3.6, 7.2, 12, 24, 36, 72.5, 123, 145, 245, 420 kv. Typical rating of disconnect switch Rated Voltage (kv) 36 72.5 145 245 420 Rated Current (A) 600/800 800 1250/1600 1600 2000 Ratedf s/c current (kA) 20 (3s) 31.5 (3s) 31.5 (3s) 40 (3s) 40 (3s)
Rated Compressed air pressure 5, 10, 15, or 20 kg/cm2
WBSEBEA - 51
F.L. CURRENT OF TRANSFORMERS IN AMPS.

3 " " " " " " " " " " " S " K.V.A. 25 50 63 75 100 150 160 200 250 300 315 500 10 15 440 V 32.80 65.61 83.06 98.11 131.22 196.82 262.43 328.04 393.66 636.08 21.789 32.60 11000 V 1.31 2.62 3.32 3.94 5.25 7.87 8.4 10.50 13.12 15.75 16.53 26.24 1.574 2.36 433 V 33.34 66.67 84.4 100.00 133.34 200.00 213.34 266.68 333.35 400.02 420.00 666.7 -
COMPARISON OF PROPERTIES OF AMORPHOUS METAL AND CRGO STEEL KVA Number of Phases No-Load Loss (Watt) Amorpheouse Core Transformer 10 15 25 63 100 3 3 3 1 10 15 25 45 60 CRGO Core Transmfermer 40' 60 100 180 260
AMORPHOUSE CORE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS Transmission and Distribution losses in India is about 21% of the generated energy. Every effort will have to be made in this context to reduce these losses so that the existing generation and Transmission and Distribution system can be used to feed more loads. The no-load loss of the Distribution Transformer is of great importance since these are present even when the transformer is under no-load conditions. The use of amorphous metal in place of CRGO steel for the transformer core reduces the no load loss (Core loss) of the transformer by approx. 75%. Thus the Amorphous core Transformers save energy and there by conserve resources.
WBSEBEA - 52

1050 Outgoing 33kv. Line 1200 1200
CABLE DUCT (900 x 900) STORE & TOOL ROOM 2400x2100
O BC O
6000
9000
BAT FAN
OLTC PANEL
33 kV
VERANDAH 2400x2000
6400
W.C 2400x1400
4500
INCOMING 33 KV LINE
1050 1200 1200 1050
7500
Inco
OUTGOING 33 KV LINE (FUTURE)
1200
R O A D
1050
Outgoing 33 kv line (Future)
1200
LAS
2100
OUTGOING 33 KV LINE
6600
P U C C A
2100
Out
1200 1050 1200
TRANSF
4300 4300 2400 3100 3700
ISOLATIN
ISOLATIN
WBSEBEA - 53
1050 Outgoing 33kv. Line
1200
1200
1050 4500 2400 3100
Fuse 6400 L.A.S. 4500 4500 2500 4500 4500 2400 3100 3700 3500 3700
3600
3100
CONTROL ROOM
7500
4600
INCOMING 33 KV LINE
1050 1200 1200 1050
2100
1200
1200
1050
7500
1050
1200
1200
2100
OUTGOING 33 KV LINE
6600
2500 4500 4500 2400 3100 3700 3500 3700
WBSEBEA - 54
11kv. FEEDER
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS L-1
6400
6400
NOTES: 1. 33 KV circuit breaker (shown dottod) is to be used only when there are two transformers each with a capacity of 5 MVA or above. 2. Conductors used for 11 KV and 33 KV jumpers and busbars should not be less than 50 sqmm. (CE) ACSR. 3. Expulsion type fuses (preferablyemploying turranol tubes) should preferably be used for proper protection of transformers. 4. The supports will not be guyed but may be suitably concreated. 5. 33 KV lighting arresters will be of station type. 6. Details of 33 KV incoming/outgoing arrengement (shown dottod) will depend upon the nature of the sub-station (terminal or
1750 3500
INCOMING 33 KV LINE
3500
11 KV FEEDERS
intermidiate etc.) & the State Electricity Board may adopt their Standard practices. 7. Circuit breakers on 11 kv side of the transformers will not be provided if the transformer capacity less than 1.6 mva each. In such cases intermediately structures with post insulators (shown dotted) may be used. 8. Cables in the switchyard may be either buried or carried in pucca trenches State Electricity Board.
850
900
900
850
FUTURE
TRANSFORMER ISOLATING SWITCH WITH ARCING HORN ISOLATING SWITCH WITHOUT ARCING HORN FUSE LIGHTING ARRESTER 33 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
850 900 900 850
ALL DIMENSION ARE IN mm
(OUTDOOR 11 KV SWITCHGEAR)
11 KV CONTROL KIOSK
Scale: 1:100
WBSEBEA - 55
BASIC TECHNOLOGY AND FUNCTIONAL DETAILS OF TRANSFORMERS AND ITS ACCESSORIES.

1 INTRODUCTION : Transformer is a static equipment being one of the major corner stones in the fabric of any electric power supply system used for transmission and distribution of electric power by stepping up or stepping down the voltage in transmission and distribution networks. It is very high value equipment and repid expansion of power system increases the population of transformer of various capacities and categories but broadly classified as power and Distribution transformers. Capital out lay behind erected transformers is anything from 8-25 percent of total assets in use in Electricity Boarda. Transformers have ordinarily an active life of 25 or 35 years according as it is a Power or Distribution transformer, though recent amendment has been made for 25 years of active life for both type of transformers. It is alarming to note that failure of transformers is as high as 10-20% even more in our country and has increasing trend year after year on National Scenarie compared to about 1-2% failure rate in advanced Countries. Failure rate of Distribution transformers is much more than power transformers. However, failure of transformers is one of the reasons behind economic set back of SEBs. If a transformer is manufactured properly tested properly commissioned properly and maintained properly with care, it is very difficult that a transformer will have its prematured death, which should be considered to be a crime. BASIC TECHNOLOGY : DESCRIPTION & CLASSIFICATION : The main functional parts of a transformer are core and windings. Cores are normally m ade of CRGO steel of M4 Grade. Another new variety of GRGO steel is Hi-B steel. The major features of this material is the lower Core loss in higher managetic fields, reducing exciting current and reduced noise due to better manetisation and managetostriction characteristics. The most recent development is Amorphous steel of Metglass in USA for distribution transformers. Although it can not be excited to a higher flux density like GRGO steel, but even with its use in low flux density, the saving in no load loss is very advantageous to the system. Windings are made of copper or Aluminium, with LV winding near to core surrounding which HV winding is arranged. The main problem of designing high voltage windings is the voltage distribution and electrical stress developed during lightning and switching surges. The radial and excial forces during unbalanced faults is also a matter to be looked into for with-standing the same. In a broader sense transformers are classified according to (a) Core arrangement (b) Winding arrangement (c) Functional duty in the field. Core Arrangement : Depending on arrangement of core materials, transformers may be core type or shall type. Winding Arrangement : Depending on number of windings, transformers may be classified as two wings (Primary/Secondary) or three windings (Primary/ Secondary/Tortiary) transformers. Again a Transformer may have a single winding, a part of which acts as Primary and the rest part as secondary, called Autotransformer. In two or three windigs transformers windings are not electrically connected but are magnetically connected by magnetic flux but in Auto-transformer both primary and secondary are electrically connected as one continuous winding per phase besides having magnetic linking. In the common part of the winding, the input and output currents are superposed. The principal application of Auto transformer is incases where separation of primary and secondary winding is not essential and the voltage ratio is not great. Such application include boosters, static balancers, various, induction-motor starters and big power transformers etc. Advantages gained is a considerable saving in conductor materials, Cores and losses.
2. A.
(a) (b)
WBSEBEA - 56
In Auto-Transformer The ratio : Conductor materials x In Normal Transformer. V2 = 1 ............................... (1) V1 Where V1 = Primary voltage, V2 = Secondary voltage. If V1 = V2, no transformer is required. For a voltage ratio of 2 : 1, approximately 50% saving in conductor materials and Over all saving may be 65-70% of that of normal transformers. So Auto transformers are not generally used where the voltage ratio exceeds 3:1, except for motor starting duty as the advantages preponderate. So in 132/33 system normal transformer will be economical but in 132 / 66KV, 220/132KV and 400/ 220KV systems auto-transformer will be economical. However, auto-transformer have the following disadvantages. (i) Due to electrical continuity between high and low voltage circuit, higher voltages may be impressed upon low voltage circuit which needs to with-stand the same. (ii) Due to direct electrical connection disturbance of one side affect seriously the other side. (iii) Leakage flux between primary and secondary being shall, impedance is low resulting heavy fault current. (iv) The connections on Primary and secondary sides have necessarily to be same i.e. either star / star or Delta / Delta which introduces problem for changing Primary and secondary phase angles. (v) Because of common neutral both the sides have to be either earthed or insulated. (vi) It is difficult to preserve the electromagnetic balance of the windings when tappings are provided as such tappings are limited to avoid larger frame size. Inspite of all such disadvantages, auto transformers are selected for saving in cost when the voltage ratio is not high. TERTIARY WINDIG : A transformer double wound or auto-wound has minimum of two voltages size one corresponding to supply side and the second corresponding to the load side. Many a time a third winding is introduced either becauses of vector grouping or because another voltage is required at the same place to supply loads viz-132/66/11KV or 220/132/33KV etc. In either case the third winding is connected in delta formation and is known as Tertiary winding. In various transformer connections there is serious problem of third harmonic components of the magnetising current. In order that the core flux wave be a sinusoidal as well as the induced voltages, the magnetising current must includes the third harmonic component or triplen harmonics. The tertiary delts provides a short circulated path for the flow of third harmonic current which are time co-phasal in all the three legs of the system, there by eliminating third or multiple of third harmonic pressures from the star connected primary and secondary windings. The neutral points of such windings are, therefore, stable and can be earthed without any ill effects to the transformer on the system. In addition territory winding helps :To reduce unbalancing in primary phases due to unbalanced loads in secondary phases.' To supply an auxiliary load in addition to main load. The short time thermal rating should be limited to 1/3rd that of the main windings. Limitation of fault current depending on impedances between tertiary and main windings. In star/star transformers to allow sufficient earth fault current to flow for the operation of CBS. As a voltage cell in a testing transformers. To interconnect three supply systems operating at different voltages. However, tertiary winding shall be used to supply local loads only, length of readers shall be limited to 5 KM as far as practicable cable.
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi)
WBSEBEA - 57

(c) Functional Duty : Transformers for urban and rural supply usually termed as Distribution Transformer should be worked with lower flux density (1.55 Tesla or less) on account of keeping minimum core loss and magnetising KVA as these transformers are in contineuous operation on small loads. Performance of these transformers should be judged by "All Day Efficiency" i.e. ratio of out-put in KWH to input in KWH for 24 hours. On the other hand Power Transformers may be cut out of Circuit at times of light loads, whereas a Distribution Transformer is continuously energised. So power transformers can be operated at high flux density (1.7 to 1.8 Tesla) and their performance can be judged by "Commercial Efficiency" i.e. ratio of output in watts to the input in watts. (B) CHOICE BETWEEN THREE PHASE UNIT VS BANK OF SINGLE PHASE UNIT : Failure of power transformers puts a difficult situation of Power interruption which is a time taking process for replacement of such a costly equipment. More over, even if a spare transformer is available, transportation, erection, commissioning testing etc. are all time taking process. Since the transformer is the most expensive single item and improved technique of manufacture and reliable testing, it is now considered a dependable equipment, as such keeping spare transformers to meet up such odd events is not at all economically viable. Now, suppose a total power P is to be transmitted from a Grid Sub-Station. What will be the choice of transformer(s) to be installed in the Sub-Station, so that there will be minimum interruption of Power in case of failure of transformer. The choice may be in the following three ways. (i) I F C1 = Cost of a single three phase unit of three phase capacity - P. (ii) C2 = Cost of two transformers each having capacity P2 running in parallel. (iii) C3 = Cost of 4 single phase units of each capacity P/3 having one spare unit. Then, C : C2 : C3 : 0.7 : 1 : 1.2 -= 7 10 : 12. It is evident that a single phase unit of capacity P will be less costly. Due to additional Civil work, assessors like OLTC, Bushings etc. Cost will gradually increase for two units and four units. The best choice will be two units of capacity P/2 running in parallel because of the fact that failure of one unit will maintain atleast 50% Power supply and by over loading 60-70% Power can be maintained for a short time, though more costly than a single three phase unit when entire Power supply will be interrupted. In case of 4 Single phase units of each capacity P/3, advantages gained is that entire power system can be restored quickly by replacement of spare unit, but is much more costly, at the same time spare unit will be idle inventory and the accumulated cost of entire country will be a huge financial burden. However, single phase units have field application where transportation is a problem because of weight and dimensions etc. 3. LOSSES IN A TRANSFORMER : (a Core and copper losses : In an ideal transformer, Power fed to the primary circuit is equal to the Power received from the secondary circuit. But hardly can we meet this requirement. A considerable amount of Power fed to the Primary circuit is lost as (i) Core loss to maintain the magnetic circuit (ii) Copper less in the form of heat. So the Power received from the Secondary circuit is always less less than that fed to the Primary circuit. The core or iron loss of a transformer is more or less fixed but the cu-loss of a transformer is variable with the load as such sometimes called as load loss. The cost of a transformer can be adjusted appreciably with the ratio of iron and cu-losses, by choice of core materials, percentage reactance or core section and section of copper conductor. Moreover allocation of losses will decide the over load capacity of a transformer within specified temperature limit. So amplication of losses in a transformer is very important towards economic functioning as well as survival. (b) Loss Capitalisation : No load loss and load loss in Distribution Transformer upto 100KVA rating in 11KV System, has been fixed in I.S. at 75oC. So these transformers are to be manufactured keeping the losses within the limits as furnished in Table - 1.
WBSEBEA - 58

TABLE - 1 KVA Rating of No load loss Load loss 11/0.415 KV 3-ph (Watts) with (watts) at Transformer GRGO steel core 75oC 25 63 100 110 200 290 720 1300 1850
Remarks These losses are maximum allowable with no positive tolerance. No. weightage in price for offering lower losses.
In case of Power Transformer, the losses are not fixed by the purchaser unless, of course, the new transformer is to run in parallel with the existing ones. In order to select technically best suited and economically lowest transformer the unique method of "Loss Capitalisation" for evaluation of losses are employed in tender evaluation. In power transformer there are three losses viz (i) Iron (Core) loss, (ii) Load (Copper) loss (iii) Auxiliary losses. The auxiliary losses are the power losses of auxiliary equipment like cooling plants etc. and are considered to be a part of load loss. For the purpose of Comparison capitalised value of iron loss and load loss shall be mentioned in the specification of the purchaser. The tender shall state and guarantee the losses but shall not specify any tolerance limit for the same. Tolerance limit for no load loss is plus 10% of the guaranteed loss and that for load loss is also plus 10% of the guaranteed loss as per I.S.S. The main idea behind loss Capitalisation is that Capitalised value of the losses with I.S. tolerances shall be added with exworks price of the transformer for comparison and selecting lowest bidder and same shall be verified through testing before accepting the same. 4. PERCENTAGE IMPEDANCE : The resistance of a transformer being bery small is unimportant as such discussion will be limited to percentage reactance only. For a given ratio and voltage the size and weight of a transformer is a function of its percentage reactance. The weight is a minimum for a particular reactance called "Economical Percentage Reactance". In the case of a 220KV transformer the cost decreases slightly when the percentage reactance is increased from 10% to 16% . This is because a small percentage reactance means a large main flux requiring large cross-section of the core. As reactance is increased the core section decrease and so the overall size. The iron loss is decreased but the copper loss is increased. The ratio of copper to iron loss is appreciably increased and the total loss is slightly increased. But when the reactance is still more increased the same argument does not hold, the cost increases becauses of high leakage flux. For every voltage there would be a normal range of percentage reactance within which the cost may not very appreciably. The ranger of values in Table-2 corresponds to usual practice. TABLE - 2 Type of Transformer Range (i) Distribution (ii) Industrial S/S (iii) Large unit type ONAN/ONAF/OFAF (iv) Large unit type ONAN/ONAF/ODAF MVA voltage (KV) Upto -1 6 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 300 Height System Range 36 to 100 123 to 170 245 to 4 20 % Impedance
4 to 5 6 to 10 10 to 14 12 to 16
WBSEBEA - 59

While fixing percentage impedance of a transformer before procurement two points shall be kept in mind : (a) If the newly procured transformer is not intended to run in parallel with any existing transformer the percentage impedance of the transformer shall be decided within the ranges shown in the Table-2, but matching with the system network impedance to which the said transformer is going to be connected.' (b) In case the newly procured transformer is required to run in parallel with any existing transformer then the percentage impedance of the transformer to be procured shall be matched with the existing transformer. From the above it is found that percentage impedance of a transformer is very important item for economical design of a transformer. So in the tender specification the value of percentage impedance shall be properly selected and clearly mentioned. Any abnormal value will make the transformer design un-economical and unnecessary cost thereby. Considering all the facts percentage impedance of Power transformers in WBSEB system have been fixed in the range 10-12%. 5. TEMPERATURE STIPULATION : Transformers are installed outdoor without any protection against sun and rains. The maximum temperature of the Hot-spot shall be limited to 105oC with class-A insulation. Each transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its normal rating without exceeding the specified temperature rise limits as per I.S.S. The maximum temperature of top layer of the oil inside a transformer should not exceed 60oC above ambient temperature. The life of transformer oil is halved if its temperature is 10oC above normal. If average ambient temperature is 35oC, top oil temperature should not exceed (35+60+10)oC or 85oC for Power transformers. For Distribution transformers it is (85-10oC = 75oC. 6. COOLING : The rating or power delivery capacity of a transformer can be increased by providing proper cooling arrangements, otherwise temperature limit will reach and or excessive temperature rise will damage the transformer as a hole. Natural cooling and forced cooling are employed stage by stage. (a) Natural cooling, Radiators : (i) Radiators : Transformers are generally filled with detachable radiators consisting of a series of separate circular or elliptical tubes welded at their top and bottom into header to be connected to the main tank by means of bolted, oil tight flanged joints. There are valves one at the top header, and other at the bottom one for circulation of all. The main purpose of radiators is to provide increased cooling surface for circulating oil by increasing the total tank area without increasing appreciably the oil containing capacity. Moreover, thickness of the radiators is less than that of main tank, thus saving of iron materials, reduced weight for transportation, hence reducing the cost of transformers, and decreasing foundation cost etc. So main tank is subjected to vacuum Testing but the radiators to Pressure Testing only. (b) Forced Cooling : The natural cooling is not sufficient as MVA rating of the transformers and loading increases. So different types of forced cooling arrangement have to be employed. In WBSEB specification we are employing ONAN/ONAF/ODAF type of cooling upto 160 MVA transformers. ONAN rating shall be about 50% and ONAF is about 75% and ODAF is about 100% of the rated capacity without exceeding the temperature limits (ONAN-oil Natural & Air Natural, ONAF-Oil Natural & Air Forced; ODAF-Oil Directed & Air Forced). The temperature setting of the cooler control contacts shall be generally as under : Cooling Equipotent Fans (For forced air) Pumps (For directed oil) ON 85oCV 90oC OFF 60oC 65oC
WBSEBEA - 60

6A. OVERLOAD CAPACITY OF TRANSFORMERS : The cost of transformer as well as its performance and efficiency greatly depends upon to total quantum of loss of energy in the process of transformation. The ratio of full load copper loss to core loss is called 'loss ratio' which determine the over load capacity of a transformer. Greater the loss ratio less capable is the transformer of sustaining over loads. Over loading of oil immersed transformer is guided by BS-170/1936, BS code of practice CP1010/1959 and I.S. 6600/- 1972 for ON and ONAF Colling, represented below :Permissible Load (%) 125 150 175 200 300 Duration (Minutes) 125 45 15 10 1 However, normal transformer are, so designed that they can withstand 110% over loading for a considerable period without exceeding the temperature limits under emergency circumstances, depending on load factor. Loading cycle for traction transformer is quite different from that of normal, Power transformer due to nature of load variation in the traction system which is furnished below : (a) 50% over load for 15 minutes - during 3 hours (b) 100% over load for 5 minutes - during 3 hours (c) 50% over load for 15 minutes & 100% over load for 5 minutes - during 3 hours. The capacity of a traction transformer to withstand over load cycle pattern mentioned above is called " Non-cumulative over Load capacity" after the transformer has reached steady temperature on continues operation at full load. From detailed calculation it is found that Traction transformers has to face 165% average over loading for a period of 20 minutes and 200% over loading for a period of 5 minutes after every 3 hours and according are designed to withstand such over load. 7. MOMENTARY LOAD LIMITATIONS OF POWER TRANSFORMERS : Power Transformers in service must be capable of short circuit at normal line voltage without injury. The duration imposed as per B.S.171/1956, is 2 seconds for a transformer with 4% impedance, 3 seconds for 5% impedance, 4 seconds for 6% impedance, and 5 seconds for 7% impedance and above. Transformers with an impedance of less than 4% are called upon to withstand the affects of twenty-five times full load current for 2 seconds without injury. 8. OVER FLEXING IN TRANSFORMERS : (a) Causes of over flexing : As per present day transformer design practice, the peak rated value of the flux density is kept about 1.7 to 1.8 Tesla, while the saturation flux density of CRGD steel sheet of transformer core is of the order of 1.9 to 2 Tesla which corresponds to about 1.1 times the rated value. If during operation, a transformer is subjected to carry rather swallow more than above mentioned flux density as per its design limitations, the transformer is said to have faced over fluxing problem and consequent bad effects towards its operation and life. Depending upon the design and saturation flux densities and the thermal time constants of the heated component parts, a transformer has some over excitation capacity. I.S. specification for Power transformers does not stipulate the short time permissible over excitation, though in a round about way it does indicate that the maximum overfluxing in the transformer shall not exceed 110%. The flux density in a transformer can be expressed by B = C V/f, where, C=A constant, V=Induced voltage, f=Frequency. The magnetic fluxdensity is, therefore, proportional to the quotient of voltage and frequency (V/f). Overfluxing can, therefore, occur either due to increase in voltage or decrease in-frequency of both. The probability of over fluxing is relatively high in stop-up transformers in Power stations compared to step -down transformers in Sub-Stations, where voltage and frequency usually remain constant. However, under very abnormal system condition, over-fluxing trouble can arise in step-down Sub-
WBSEBEA - 61

Station transformers as well. We faced such a situation at Hizli and Egra 132/33KV Sub-Stations on 28th June, 1900 at about 3-30 P.M. during World Cup Football Tournament. Transformers of Hizli Sub-Station tripped through Differential Relay followed by Buchholz Alarm, those of Egra SubStation through differential Relay only, due to high voltage exceeding 150 KV. (b) Effect of Over Fluxing in Transformers : (i) The flux in a transformer, under normal conditions is confined to the core because of its high permeability compared to the surrounding volume. When the flux density in the increases beyond saturation point, a substantial amount of flux is diverted to steel structural parts and into the air. At saturation flux density the core steel will over heat. Structural steel parts which are unlaminated and are not designed to carry magnetic flux will heat rapidly. Flux flowing in unplanned air paths may link conducing loops in the windings, loads, tank base at the bottom of the core and structural parts and the resulting circulating currents in these loops can cause dangerous temperature increase. Under conditions of excessive overfluxing the heating of the inner portion of the windings may be sufficiently extreme as the exciting current is rich in harmonies. It is obvious that the levels of loss which occur in the winding at high excitation cannot be tolerated for long if the damage is to be a voided. Physical evidences of damage due to overfluxing will very with the degree of over excitation, the time applied and the particular design of transformer. The Table-3 given below summaryses such physical damage and probable consequences. TABLE - 3 Component involved i) Metallic support structure for core and coils . ii) Windings iii) Lead conductors. Physical evidences Discolouration or metallic parts and adjacent insulation. Possible carbonized material in oil. Evolution of combustible gas. Discoloration winding insulation evolution of gas. Discoloration of conductor insulation or support, evolution of gas. Discolouration of insulating material in contact with core. Discoloration and carbonization of organic/lamination insulation Evaluation of gas. Blistering of paints Consequences Contamination of a oil and surfaces of insulation. Mechanical weakening of insulation Loosing of structure. Mechanical structure Electrical and mechanical weaking of winding insulation Electrical and mechanical weakening of insulation, Mechanical Weakening of support. Electrical weakening of major insulation (winding to core) increased interlaminar eddy loss.
iv) Core laminations.
v) Tank
Contamination of oil if paint inside tank is blistered.
(ii) It may be seen that metallic support structures for core and coil, windings, lead conductors, core laminations, tank etc. may attain sufficient temperature with the evolution of combustible gas in each case due to overfluxing of transformer and the same gas may be collected in Buchholz Relay with consequent Alarm/Trip depending upon the quantity of gas collected which again depends upon the duration of time the transformer is subjected to overfluxing. This was the reason why Buchholz Alarm came in case of 31.5 MVA transformer at Hizli 132 KV Sub-Station on 28th June, 1990.
WBSEBEA - 62

(iii) Due to overfluxing of transformer its core becomes saturated as such induced voltage in the primary circuit becomes more or less constant. If the supply voltage to the primary is increased to abnormal high value, there must be high magnetising current in the primary circuit. Under such magnetic state of condition of transformer core linear relations between primary and secondary quantities (viz. for voltage and currents) are lost. So there may not be sufficient and appropriate reflection of this high primary magnetising current to secondary circuit as such mismatching of primary currents and secondary currents is likely to occur, causing differential relay to operate as we do not have overfluxing protection for sub-Stn. transformers. That is why the power transformers of both Hizli and Egra 132 KV Sub-Station tripped on 28th June, 1990 through differential relay though there was no internal fault. Stipulated Withstand-Duration of Overfluxing for Power Transformers : Overfluxing of transformer has sufficient harmful effect towards its life which has been explained. As overflusing protection is not generally provided in step-down transformers of Sub-Station, there must be a stipulated time which can be allowed matching with the transformer design to withstand such overfluxing without causing appreciable damage to the transformer and other protections shall be sensitive enough to trip the transformer well within such stipulated time, if cause of overfluxing is not removed by this time. It is already mentioned that the flux density 'B' in transformer core is proportional to v/f ratio. Power transformers are designed to withstand (Vn/fn x 1.1) continuously, where Vn is the normal highest r.m.s. voltage and fn is the standard frequency. Core design is such that higher v/f causes higher core loss and core heating. The capability of a transformer to withstand higher v/f values i.e. overfluxing effect, is limited to a few minutes as furnished below in Table-4. TABLE - 4 v/f F= vn/fn Duration of with stand limit (minutes) 1.1 continuous 1.2 2 1.25 1 1.3 0.5 1.4 0
(c)
From the table-4 it may be seen that when overfluxing due to system hazards reaches such that the factor F attains a values 1.4, the transformer shall be tripped out of service instantaneously otherwise there may be a permanent damage.' (d) Protection Against Overfluxing (v/f - Protection) : (i) The condition arising out of overfluxing does not call for high speed tripping. Instantaneous operation is undesirable as this would cause tripping on momentary system disturbances which can be borne safely but the normal condition must be restored or the transformer must be isolated within one or two minutes at the most. (ii) Flux density is proportional to V/f and it is necessary to detect a ratio of V/f exceeding unity, V and f being expressed in per unit value of rated quantities. In a tyhpical scheme designed for over fluxing protection, the system voltage as measured by the voltages transformer is applied to a resistance to product a proportionate current; this current on being passed through a capacitor, produces a voltage drop which is proportional to the functioning in question i.e. V/f and hence to flux in the power transformer. This is accompanied with a fixed reference D.C. voltage obtained across a Zener diode. When the peak A.C. signal exceeds the D.C. reference it triggers a transistor circuit which operates two electromechanical auxiliary elements. One is initiated after a fixed time delay, the other after an additional time delay which is adjustable. The overfluxing protection operates when the ratio of the terminal voltage to frequency exceeds a predetermined setting and resets when the ratio falls below 95 to 98% of the operating ratio. By adjustment of a potentiometer, the setting is calibrated from 1 to 1.25 times the ratio of rated volts to rated frequency.
WBSEBEA - 63

The output from the first auxiliary element, which operates after fixed time delay available between 20 to 120 secs. second output relay operates and performs the tripping function. (b) It is already pointed out that high V/f occur in Generator Transformers and Unit-Auxiliary Transformers if full exaltation is applied to generator before full synchronous speed is reached. V/f relay is provided in the automatic voltage regulator of generator. This relay blocks and prevents increasing excitation current before full frequency is reached. (c) When applying V/f relay to step down transformer it is preferable to connect it to the secondary (L.V. saide of the transformer so that change in tap position on the H.V. is automatically taken care of Further the relay should initiate an Alarm and the corrective operation be done / got done by the operator. On extreme eventuality the transformer controlling breaker may be allowed to. trip. 9. Effect of vector Grouping : (a) Vector Grouping : depending on phase difference of primary and secondary voltages, transformers are grouped as follows : (i) Group-1, Zero phase displacement - Yyo, Ddo (ii) Group-2, 180o phase displacement - Yy6, Dd6 (iii) Group-3, lag phase displacement - Dy1, Yd1 (iv) Group-4, 30o lead phase displacement - D11, Yd11 Vector Group in W.B.s.E.B. system : Previously in W.B.S.E.B. system we used transformers of Yyo vector group. But gradually since 1984 Yyo group is being replaced by Yd1 group with the help of 100 KVA, 33/0 415 KVA, ZnY Earthing cum Station Service Transformers for earthing the delta secondary system as well as for station service. The question arises why this system was adopted inspite of use of empty earthing cum station service transformers. The reasons are as follows :_ (a) Yyo connection is most economical for small high voltage transformers because the number of turns per phase and the amount of insulation is minimum as phase voltage is only of the line voltage. This connection works satisfactory only if the load is balanced. In unbalanced loads, the neutral points shift, thereby making the line to neutral voltages (phase voltages) unequal. With the complicated loading pattern in W.B.S.E.B. system as well as need for increase of transformer capacity Yyo Group Required replaced. (b) In Yd1 system, no. difficulty is experienced from unbalanced loading as in case of Yy system. Voltage wave shape is not distorted due to the flow of third harmonic current in d delta winding. (c) Yyo transformer, if one of the line jumpering is burnt cut but not touching the tower, current in one phase will be zero. It sudh as case voltage in primary and secondary sides will be balanced but currents will be highly unbalanced and there will be quick high temperature rise in transformer which will damage the same. We faced such situation at Egra and Chandrakona Road 132 KV sub-Station and introduced special protection arrangements with 3 PTS connected in Open-deltato sense one voltage sensitive relay to trip the transformer. But Y d transformer will not have such adverse eiffer. (d) Yd1 tranformer is used alongwith an Earthing Transformer. The earthing tranformer has a very low impedance during its normal operation but offers a very high impedance during falt to act as a current limitor. It is found that fault current limiter. It is found that fault current in Yd. Transformer can be reduced to approximately 1/10th of Yy transformer with both the neutrals earthed,. (e) In Grid Sub-Stations burning / melting of clamps, connectors, jumpers in a chronic problem. though we are using connector of phosphoer bronze, with the increase of faulti level, connectors of phospher bronze are also found to be not suitable. With the change over to Yd transformer alongwith earthing cum station service transformer, fault current is very much reduced. So we can use clamp and connectors of E.C. grade hard drawn extruded Almunium, which are less costly than phosper bronze and a considerable cost can be saved as well as frequent power interruptions due to replacement of clamps and connectors can be stopped. The cost of E.C. grade extruded
WBSEBEA - 64

aluminium is nearly50% that of phospher broze. In W.B.S. E.B. system auto transformers or Yy Vector Group is in operation for voltage ratio 132/66/11 KV and 220/132/33V. In such cases Yy group has been chosen in order to avail of the economical advantage of auto-transformers discussed earlier. 10. Bushings : (i) Bushings are provided with the transformer for entry of high voltage and exit of low voltage terminals and vice-versa. Bushings are very delicate part of a transformer and as such should be specified, procured, handled and maintained with care. Frequent bursting of bushing occurs in transformers due to various reasons. (ii) At present, we are using bushings of 66 KV and above which are of oil filled condenser type hermatically sealed and 33 KV bushings are of porcelain oil filled type and 11 KV bushing are porcelain plain shed type. In general active part of the condenser bushing consists of a central metallic condoctor tube enclosed by wound bakalite paper or oil impregnated paper body or synthetic resin bond payer with aluminium foils in between the layers for field control. The innermost aluminium layer is connected to the conducting tube and the outermost to the fixing flange. A porcelain jacket is provided on the condenser bushing. The space between the paper body and the porcelain jacket is filled with highly viscuss oil with an air space below the protective hood of the bushing which is sufficient for expansion of oil. The entire space is hermatically sealed against the atmosphere. A slight glass is provided to indicate the top oil level. One red ball will be visible through the slight glass. After delivery of the bushings, it should be checked whether the red ball is at the centre or not when the bushing is vertically placed. If the red ball is displayed from the centre, the bushing is defective and the same shall be reported to the supplier or manufacturer immediately. (iii) Bushing for 132 KV and above are equipped with a measuring tap at the bottom portion. It is used or checking the capacitance and power factor with the flange grounded. It can be used in conjunction with a special plug for measuring the voltage or for control purpose during operation. (iv) The bushings are suitable for vertical or inclined installations : Vm 73 KV : 600 to vertical plane. Vm 100 KV : 30o to vertical plane. When Vm is the highest system voltage. Bushings are fitted in inclined position in order to maintain phase to phase clearance required for the voltage system without increasing appreciably the tank size. (v) All bushings shall be provided with suitable shoulderless terminals of approved type and size and shall be suitable for bimetallic connection for terminal connectors. (vi) The insulation class of the bushings shall be according to voltage classes for which they are used. The insulation class of the high voltage neutral bushing shall be properly co-ordinated with the insulation class of the neutral of high voltage winding. Each bushing shall be so co-ordinated with transformer insulation that all flash overs will occur outside the tank. This is because of the fact that a damaged bushing can be easily replaced by a spare one but flashover inside tank will involve the risk of fire in the oil and entire transformer may be burnt into ashes. (vii) Special adjustable arching horns may also be provided for the bushings as per IS-371/1966, I.E.C. Publication No. 71A. This is very simple to look at, so it is generally neglected by site-Engineers. But arcing horns has tremendous importance and practical utility for the safety of the bushing as well as to reduce the length of the bushing. Without arcing horns, the length of the bushing would have been very high in order to provide sufficient creapage distance against any unanticipated high surge to bear with. The purchaser should ask the supplier to provide the guaranted withstand voltage for the arching horns and also furnish a calibration curve with different settings of the coordination gap to the purchaser to decide the actual gap setting or as recommended by the manufacturer or supplier.
WBSEBEA - 65

The bushing shall be suitable for normally polluted and heavily polluted atmosphere as well as under different weather conditions. In this respect both total and protected creapage distances are very important. To avoid failure by tracking following minimum creapage distances are specified. Indoor insulators : 16 to 18 mm/KV Outdoor moderately polluted : 18 to 22 mm/KV Outdoor hea vily polluted : 25 to 30 mm/KV However, for normally polluted atmosphere minimum total creapage distance OK in mm can be found out from the equation approximately as 23 Lk = Vm mm. 1.5 Protected creapage distance at an angle of : 45o = 61% 900 = 43% For heavily polluted atmosphere the minimum creepage distance Lks in me can be found out as Lks = 23 x Vm mm Protected creepage distance at an angle of : 45o = 74% 90o = 55% So as a thumb rule, total creepage distance shall not be less than 23 mm/KV for heavily polluted atmosphere. 11. Insulation Resistance Value (I.R.Value) : If an insulation is placed between two conductors and D.C. voltage (Vide) is applied and a current Idc flows, then insulation resistance is the ratio of Vdc/Idc. It is measured in Meg. Ohm by Megger. As per I.A. 1886/1961, I.R. value of a transformer can be estimated by the following formula :I.R. Value in Meg. Ohm = 30 x KV / (XVA/f) = 7 Where f is the power frequently. This formula is now superseded as it gives low values on higher voltage ratings. C.B.I.P. has specified following. I.R. values at 20oC. for different voltage clauses. L-L voltage in KV Min. IR values in Meg. Ohm at 20oC (Tr. winding to ground) Below 6.6KV upto 400 V Above 6.6 KV upto 11KV 25 KV 33 KV 138 KV 230 KV
400
600
670
890
3920
6200
At high temperature I.R. values will be reduced. The correction factors at different temperature have also been specified by C.B.I.P. For every 10oC. temperature fise, the correction factor may be taken as 2 as very rough general rule. As for example, C.F. at 30oC. is 1.8. So 11 KV winding at 30oC should have a minimum I.R. value of 600/1.8 - 333 Meg. Ohms. Lighting Arrestor is the lowest insulated equipment and transformer is the next higher insulated equipment in any power system, Cost of transformer increases with its insulation level. Depending on technique of surge divertors, insulation level. Depending on technique of surge divertors, insulation level of a t ra transformer can be reduced with consequent reduction in overall cost which can further be reduced with grading of insulation at the neutral end of the transformers aided by suitable protection arrangement depending on system earthing condition. Extent of reduction in insulation level vis-a-vis cost reduction depends on various factors like voltage stress in the windings, axial and radial strength of meg. field etc. However, insulation level of high voltage power transformers shall be verified through impulse testing and chopped wave testing, but distribution transformers shall be verified by double voltage double frequency tests during purchase. So it is very important to use matching L.A.S. with transformers during its operation and maintenance.
WBSEBEA - 66

12. Absorption Factor OR Polarisation Index Value (P.I. Value) : The healthy condition of a transformer can only be ascertained by detailed testing of its oil qualities vis-a-vis measurement of I.R. values at site. As the number of transformers are increasing day by day it is troublesome, and time taking process to test the oil of all the transformers before taking decision for reconditioning and / or replacement of entire oil which is not only costly but also execution of reconditioning / replacement of entire oil within limited time of 2/3 months in a year due to opportunity of availing shut down, becomes practically impossible and impractical. So many transformers are getting burnt with the consequence of heavy financial burden to S.E.B.s. for replacement, besides, revenue loss due to power interruption and public dis-satisfaction. In order to cut short the process and to take quick decision for reconditioning and / or replacement of oil for those transformers only which are in deteriorated condition, we have recently purchased Motorised Megger costing about 1-5 lakhs, for measurement of Absorption Factor or Polarisation Index Value (PI value) to ascertain the degree to which moisture has been absorbed by the insulation of winding of the transformers i.e. how much humid the insulation of the transformer is. The P.I. value can be defined as follows :The ratio of value of insulation resistance as read from Megger scale at 60 seconds and 15 seconds after the test D.C. voltage has been applied to the windings of the transformers i.e. (I.R. value) 60/(Ir-value) 15 is called the Absorption Factor or Polarisation Index value (PI-value) of the insulation of the transformer for that winding. The P.I. value of dry insulation may be high as 1.5 to 2 and upwards, while damp insulation will have a P.I. value close to 1. So from the measurement of PI value Site-Engineers can take decision whether detailed oil testing will be required and / or whether the transformer will be allowed to remain in se service or shall be withdrawn immediately for improvement of its condition to avoid pre-matured death. 13. Tap Changer : There are three types of tap changer which are used in transformers depending on their service viz. (a) Off Circuit Tap Changer, (b) Of-load Tap changer, (c) On-load Tap Changer (OLTC). In Off-circuit tap changer transformer is disconnected from the circuit from both the sides during process of tap changing of-load tap changer transformer may remain energised on no-load and tap changing is done on secondary side making the load off. In OLTC tap changing operation is carried out when the transformer is delivering the load. Medium voltage classes distribution transformers and Traction transformers use either off-circuit or Off-load tap changer depending on circumstances. Below 132 KV system, tap changes are used in low voltage side but in 132 KV and above Tap changer are used in high voltage side considering economy. OLTC is of two types viz. Reactance Type (C.T.R) and Resistance Ttype (Bidirectional) explained later. In C.T.R. type power flow is limited to 70% in reverse direction but in later 100% power flow can be maintained in both direction. 14. Preservation of Oil inside Transformers : (i) Significance of I.R. Values : Quality deterioration of oil inside a transformer in service is due to high temperature, oxidation with air and having high effinity of the oil to absorb moisture during the process of breathing with the consequent effect of poor I.R. values leading to failure of transformers. Maintaining required I.R. values of transformers is similar to maintain percentage of Blood sugar (80% to 120%) in human body to avoid possibility of prematured normal death. A man without having required percentage of blood sugar will not die but will function lime a normal health but lot of medicine will be required for his recovery from any complicated diseases and / or ultimate death. So also a transformer having poor I.R. values, will supply power as usual but having the risk of getting burnt during a sudden shock due to abnormal faults which is quite unpredictable and unforeseen. The financial constraints and earliest opportunity of availing shut down etc. compel us to take the risk of keeping the transformer in service and ultimately allow it to burn. (ii) Conservators : In earlier stages when oil of 'Paraffinic base' was used the problem of oil contamination and quick reduction of I.R. value was not so acute and use of conservator having
WBSEBEA - 67

volume nearly 1/13 of the main tank oil volume was sufficient to restrict the contamination of hot oil with surrounding in the process of breathing and was more or less sufficient and satisfactory, besides accommodation of expanded oil due to heat. Due to use of 'Asphaltic' oil, it was felt necessary to retard the quick deterioration of oil by avoiding direct contact of atmospheric air with the oil. To improve the performance Nitrogen sealing system of conservators have been developed when an inert atmosphere of Nitrogen is created over the oil inside conservators. Moisture is also excluded because of avoidance of beating directly from atmosphere. The Nitrogen gas supplied from a cylinder is slowly consumed when the temperature excursion is too wide. But under normal variation of oil temperature excursion is too wide. But under normal variation of oil temperature there will be no consumption of Nitrogen gas but during life period of 25 years leaking of gas can not be avoided and creates a problem for replacement or refilling of Nitrogen gas at site. In further development of Diaphragm type conservators, a rubber diaphragm is employed to create a partition between oil and outside air. (iii) Thermo Syphon System : In thermo syphon system, a part of oil is circulated through an adorbent sieve of Alumina or specially made Silicagel (In Russian Transformers) for automatic reconditioning of oil. The oil circulation is achieved by means of Themo Syphon Action. (iv) Use of Bidirectional OLTC : During tap changing operation, a part of the winding between two successive tapes is short circuited and the short circuit current is limited to safe value by a centre tapped reactor in a C.T.R. type OLTC housed in the main tank earlier. The current maxima lags behind the voltage maxima by a quarter of a cycle causing high possibility of arching between fixed and moving contacts specially during transition period. Due to such heavy arcing, the life of contacts become limited, oil is deteriorated / contaminated quickly leading to failure of OLTC or transformer as a whole. So CTR type OLTC has been replaced by Bidirectional OLTC developed by Dr. Jansen in West Germany where short circuit current is limited by constantly rated resistors for all temperature and current ranges. Current maxima and voltage maxima accruing at the same instant reduces the arcing possibility to a great extent and oil deterioration becomes retarded, Moreover OLTC and its Diverter switch is hour houred below the tank and the oil of this tank is kept entirely separated from that of the main tank thus main tank oil is preserved from contamination / deterioration by the arcing action of OLTC. The conservator is divided into two compartments, bigger one is connected with the main tank through pipe, Buchholtz Relay and Breather and smaller one is connected with OLTC tank by oil Surge Relay and a separate Breather. Replacement of only OLTC tank oil becomes less costly and easier and time savings. (v) Atmoseal System : The most recent development for preservation of oil inside a transformer without atmospheric contact at all is the 'Atmoseal System' where an air bag made of hot oil resistant Nitrile rubber called 'Pronal Air Bag' is mounted inside the conservator with its opening connected to dehydrating Breather through pipe. The bag inflates or defaults as the oil in the conservator expands or contracts due to temperature variation to and from the main tank thus prevents any atmospheric contamination maxing with the oil at all. The system requires little maintenance and the oil is preserved to its original standards or a long time because of no direct contact with air. Preservation of oil outside Transformer : If the oil received in drums is not likely to be used immediately the drums should be stored in a covered space where temperature variation is minimum, If it is necessary to store the drums outside, adequate protection must be provided. Drums should not be stored standing on end but to be stored horizontally with bung at 45o downwards. 15. Bucholtz Relay : It is a gas actuated Relay and is connected in the oil pipe work between transformer tank and conservator. The shut of valve is connected between the conservator and the Buchholtz Relay. The relay is mounted in the pipe work with arow on the housing of the Relay pointing towards the conservator at an angle of 3o to 7o or 10o to the horizontal plane. Any gas formed in the main tank oil will tilt the float to cloase the Alarm Circuit first and then Trip circuit
WBSEBEA - 68

to trip the transformer. This is a slow acting relay having minimum operating time of 0.1 second and average time of 0.2 second. Such a slow acting relay is unsatisfactory no doubt but is excellent to bring the notice of incipient or internal fault of transformer. Once there is operation of the relay. the accumulated gas shall be collected at the stop-lock and shall be analysed to diagnose the fault. From the rate of increase of gas an estimate can be made of the severity and continuance of the fault. First it shall be tested whether the gas is inflammable or not. (a) If so, a definite diagnosis can be made from the colour of the gas as follows : Colour Cause White Destroyed paper Yellow Damaged wood Black or Gray Dissociated oil
(b) Oil Surge Relay : In bidirectional OLTC, Tap changer and its diverter tank is housed in a separate chamber completely separated from main tank oil. though immersed in the main tank. Conservator is divided into two parts. Bigger part is connected with main tank and Bucoholtz Relay with a Breather and the smaller part is connected with oil surge relay and a breather. Any fault is the tap changer and formation of gas, oil will be forced to enter the relay to operate. (c) Magnetic Oil Gauge (M.O.C.) : This is a dial reading gauge mounted directly on the conservator to give continuous oil level indication. It is normally mounted on the conservator end-cover (detachable) at the inclination 15o to the vertical so that it will be readable from ground. This is supplied with low oil level alarm contacts. This oil gauge is electrically connected to the terminal box and then to Marshalling Box. The dial of the indicator is calibrated to give level of the oil as a function of the conservator capacity. A mercury which is provided so that when oil level falls below a specific level an alarm is sounded. The instrument is a float type and the movement of the float is transmitted to the pointer by means of a magnet hence the name M.O.G. (d) Temperature Indicators : Oil temperature and winding temperature indicators (O.T.I. & W.T.I.) provide local indication of top oil and winding hot spot temperature respectively, are fitted in the junction box or Marshalling box. The thermo meter bulb is connected by capillary tubing to the local indicator. The bulbs are enclosed in oil filled pockets which are either welded or screwed on the transformer cover in the hottest oil region. In O.T.I., the expansion of liquid in the bulb is transmitted through capillary tube to indicating instrument for indication of top oil temperature. W.T.I. may be either with built in heating elements or with separate heater bulb. In case of former the pocket or the bellow has a heating coil around it which is fed by a C.T. (secondary) provided on one of the transformer line terminals of H.V., L.V., T.V. windings, so that any change in the load is reflected in the heating of the pocket / below of W.T.I. The C.T. secondary leads are connected to the instruments in terminal / marshalling box. In case of later a separate pocket is provided on transformer cover for housing the heater bulb (with capillary) and two terminal W.T.I., C.t. secondary leads are connected to the terminal inside the tank and connections from pocket terminals to heater bulb are made internally in the pocket. This pocket is air filled. Instruments in both the cases are housed in terminal / marshalling box. It is to be ensured that the transformer oil is filled in the various thermo-meter pockets on cover before commissioning of transformer. The dial type thermometer is also provided with mercury switches for an Alarm and Trip circuit operation in the event of executive temperature raise and W.T.I. also controls operation of cooling fans, oil pump motors at certain present temperatures. A potentio meter device or a digital method is also provided for remote temperature indication. The signalling contacts of O.T.I. are generally set to operate at the following temperatures or at a slightly lower values depending on condition of the transformer.
WBSEBEA - 69
Protection System Alarm On O.T.I. W.T.I. 85oC 100oC Trip Off 95oC 100oC On 85oC
Cooling System Fan Off 60oC Pump On Off 90oC 65oC
(e) Fault Current : Fault current at different system voltages are furnished below :Line to line Nominal system voltage in KV Steady state Fault Current KA (R.M.S.)
11
33
132
220
400
13.1
25
30
40
50/60
18.
19.
(i) (a)
So Transformers should be protected against such shock and should be tripped by the circuit Breakers within 3 cycles or now a days 2-21/2 cycles. Oil Testing : In power Transformers decision for reconditing has to be taken if the I.R. value is poor, IP-valve is not satisfactory as well as rigorous oil testing results are not also satisfactory. But in large number off 11/.415 KV transformers all such testing will not be practicable, economical, and a continuous time taking process. So the following simple test may be conducted to ascertain the healthy condition of the transformer besides IR value measurement. Crackle Test for 11/0.415 KV transformer : In 11/0/415 KV distribution transformers all such detailed processes may not be economic. So a simple test called "Crackle Test" may be done as a quality checking of transformer oil vis-a-vis insulation resistance. Oil sample from the transformer may be collected in a pot. A metal rod 1/2" (12.7mm) dia heated to a dull redness is dipped into the sample of oil and when stirring, there will be no crackle sound. One end of piece of a stool tube of about 1.2" dia shall be closed and closed and is heated at dull redness. The heated and of the tube shall all be plunged into the oil sample taken in a container with the ear closed to the open of the tube. If a sharp crackle sound is heared, it indicates moisture in the oil. Above tests are very simple to carry out and if presence of moisture is indicated in the test, oil of the transformer shall be replaced, otherwise the same will be burnt. Distribution Wing should follow this test to reduce the failure of such transformers which is alarming in numbers. Causes of failure of transformers : Prematured death of transformer within its life period of 25 years shall be considered as a crime to the society. The reasons of failure of transformers may be due to (i) Internal Factors (ii) External Factors, which are discussed below in short :Internal Factors : High Temperature : Internal factors responsible for the failure of transformers are due to bad and improper design. Con siderable amount of power fed to the primary circuit of a transformer is lost as core loss or iron loss and cu-loss or load loss, the former maintains the magnetic circuit and this latter is converted into thermal power or heat and needs to be effectively dessipated otherwise there will be high temperature rise and should be limited within 75 to 80oC. The losses are undesirable no doubt but unavoidable, as such shall be dealt properly for economic and effective design of transformers, In the design and operation of a transformer, two losses are considered separately but they should be considered jointly in respect of thermal power generated hence rise of temperature. So many transformers are failing due to high temperature.
WBSEBEA - 70

(b) Design for over Load capacity : Cost of trans fomor can be adjusted appreciably with that allocation of two losses viz. Core and Cu-losses and ratio of Cu-loss to Core loss, by choice of core material, percentage reartance, Core section and section of copper conductors. moreover, loss ratio influences the over load capacity of a-transformer. It is very important design parameter specially for distribution transformer where over loading is practically unavoidable. power transformer shall be designed as per specified over load schedule but distribution transformer shall be designed to withstand 110% continuous loading with better core materials having better energy saving potential. (c) Dry Transformers and Amorphous Metal Core Transformers : Dry Transformers : In order to avoid oil hazards and routine monitoring of large number of distribution transformers installed over wide ranges of remote places dry type distribution transformer have been developed but the design is still in its limitior within medium voltage class of 11KV and having limited output rating of 1000KVA or slightly more. As the rating of transformer increases with the increase of voltage classes, problem of heat dissipation has yet to be solved in this design. Moreover, minor repairing is not possible at site. Amorphos Metal Core Transformer : Amorphos Metal Core transformer for distribution purpose is increasing at rapid rate in USA due to excellent energy saving potential. Core loss is about 30-50% that of best C.R.G.O. core and cu-loss is also reduced, hence temperature rise is very much reduced. But manufacturing cost is 25-30% that of best C.R.G.O. core and cu-loss is also reduced, hence temperature rise is very much reduced. But manufacturing cost is 25-30% higher than C.R.G.O. steel core transformer. (ii) External Factors : External factors responsible for the failure of transformers include (a) Over Loading (b) Inadequate protection (c) Improper maintenance (d) Social problems. (a) Over Loading : While giving a new connection, it is essential that the loads of existing consumers on the transformer and the diversity factor are taken into consideration. The power tariff for Tube-wells is generally based on a flat rate per H.P. of motor capacity. Many a time, the actual motor capacity is higher then the name plate affixed to the motor. In transformers supplying mixed loads such as lightning loads all the 3-phase are to be balanced. In addition, the problem of illegal use of electrically by 'Hooking' is now a social problem. (b) Inadequate protection : This is probably the single largest reason responsible for failure of transformers. In actual practice the protection devices provided are either inadequate or totally absent. Generally fuses are used in H.T. and L.T. side of the transformer instead of circuit-breakers. Moreover, the fuses are seldom or proper rating, thus providing no current protection to the transformers. Similarly impulse voltage protection by installation of L.As. in the system is not adequate. The introduction of static devices and more recently micro processor have made the protection system more full proof. (c) Improper Maintenance : It is commonly accepted that once the distribution transformer has been installed no maintenance is downs. The loccasion of the transformer is remote area further adds to the problem. Due to this oil quality determinators regularly. The oxidation and consequent sludge for oil affect the life of the transformer as proper care is hardly taken. (d) Social Problems : Besides, there are other social problems which result in failure of transformers, such as theft of transformer oil and metal parts, short circuit of overhead L. T. distribution networks that aggravate during rain and storm.
WBSEBEA - 71

20. Minimising Failure Rate : The new technology introduced so far have their respective limiteions, so with our available processors we must develop, mens how to improve the conventional design so that failure rate of distribution transformers can be minimised. Some SEBs have adopted one technique with success of reducing the failure rate from 10% to 2% which is explained below in nut shell. Distribution transformers purchased from different manufacturers shall be demarcated separately by different colour codes. Failure are of each manufacturer during a definite period of time (say last 4 years) shall be determined. Unit resultant cost of failure and repair shall be added directly to purchase cost while evaluating the tender bids which will reward the most reliable suppliers and give initiative form improvement. In general, it may be said that use of better CRGO steel as core materials, lower temperature rise of top oil over ambient, over fluxing upto 12.5% flux density in the range of 1.55 Wb/m2 suitable increasing the no. of steps of core with increase of KVA rating, properly specified HV/LV winding materials can improve the design of such transformers and minimise the failure rate to a great extent. In case of Power Transformer, manufacturing shall be strictly as per specification with proper importance to Loss-Capitalisation and testing before accepting the transformer. Regarding maintenance, "Yellow Card" prescribed by W.B.S.E.B. shall be maintained where history of the transformer shall recorded and Site Engineer should carefully note the gradual change of different characteristics of the transformer and should take corrective measures as quickly as possible. Increasing tendency of T emperature rise shall be considered as warning towards danger. 21. Insulation Level : (i) The dielectric strength of winding insulation and that of the bushing shall conform to the value given in IS-2026/1962 (as amended upto date) or IEC-Publication for rated system voltage 11, 33, 25, 132, 220, 400KV, the respective winding of the transformer shall have following insulation levels on the basis of 1.2/50 cicrosecond impulse voltage test.
System voltage (KV) 11 33 25 132 220 400
Impulse Test Voltage (KV Peak) 75 170 250 550/650 950/1050 1300/1425
High voltage winding of the transformer shall have graded insulation. The insulation class of the neutral and of the H.V.Winding shall be graded to short time power frequency withstand voltage of 38 KV (r.m.s.) The L.V. neutrals shall be graded as per voltage class of the neutral but not less than respective line voltages in case of 11 KV or lower voltages. (ii) The cost of a transformer increases with the insulation level. Other things being equal, substantial decrease in the cost of transformers can be brought about by reducing the insulation level permitted by the progress with technique of surge divertors, Depending on the system earthing conditions i.e. for solidly earthed system, cost can be reduced (more for higher voltages) by grading of insulation at the neutral end.
WBSEBEA - 72

22. Power Frequency withstand Voltage : (i) Power frequency withstand voltage in K.V. (r.m.s.) for different system voltages may be specified as follows : System Voltage (KV) 220 132 66 33 11 Power frequency withstand voltage (K.V. R].M.S.) 395 230 140 70 28
(ii) The necessity and importance of fixing impulse level and power frequency withstand voltage for different voltage classes of transformer windings is very important for the reasons that over voltages encountered in electrical networks may be divided according to their origin, into two main classes : (a) External over voltage due to lighting and associated phenomenon. (b) Internal over voltages, due to sudden alteration in the internal circuits of the network itself. (iii) (a) in order to withstand external over voltage of high frequencies, the transformer windings shall be manufactured as per specified insulation levels and to be ascertained through testing. As higher insulation levels higher costs, minimum safe insulation levels are to be determined from system studies and to be specified in the specification to comply with. (b) Internal over voltage may be divided into two principal classes viz (1) Dynamic over voltages at system frequency due to unsymetrical faults, sudden loss of loads of turboalternator or a transformer connected to the end of a transmission line etc. (2) Transient over voltages at medium frequency due to rupturing of capacitive currents by restoring circuit breakers, or due to dead earthing of one of two phases. The transients of these nature may be 1.1 to 3.5 times the normal system voltages and usual range may be taken approximately as 1.7 to 2.2 In order to withstand such over voltages of power frequency and medium frequency transformer windings shall conform to the power frequency withstand voltages specified above different voltage classes and to be verified through testing. 23. Short Circuit Level : (i) Short Circuit level of different system voltages shall be as follows :
400 KV 220 KV 132 KV 33 MV 25 KV (Single Phase) 11 KV
25,000 MVA or 20,000 MVA 15,000 MVA or 10,000 MVA 10,000 MVA or 5,000 MVA 1,000 MVA or 750 MVA 750 MVA 250 MVA.
WBSEBEA - 73

(ii) Dont's 1. Do Not energise without through investigation of the transformer, whenever any Alarm or Protection is operated. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Do not re-energise the transformer unless Buchhloz's gas is analysed. Do not re-energise the transformer without conducting all pre-commission checks. The results must be comparable with results at works. Do not handle the off circuit tap switch, when the transformer is energised. Do not energise the transformer unless the off-circuit tap switch is in locked position. Do not leave off - circuit tap switch handle unlocked. Do not over load the transformer other than specified limits as per ISS - 6600. Do not leave the tertiary terminals unprotected out side the tank, connect them to tertiary lightening arrestors protection scheme, when connected to load. Do not allow WTI/OTI temperature to exceed 75oC during dry out of transformer and filter machine temperature beyond 80oC. As we are now using Aspheltic or Naptha Base Oil, it is better to maintain transformer oil temperature at 60oC and filter machine temperature at 70oC to avoid burning of oil. Do not parallel the transformer which do not fulfil the condition for paralleling.' Do not use low capacity lifting jack on transformer for jacking. Do not move the transformer with bushings mounted. Do not change the settings of WTI and OTI alarms and trip frequently. The settings should be done as per site conditions. Do not leave red pointer behind the black pointer in WTI and OTI. Do not meddle with the protection circuits. Do not leave any connection loose. Do not allow conservator oil level to fall below 1/4 level. Do not allow the level to fall in the bushings. It must immediately be topped up. Do not leave the marshalling box door open, they must be locked. Do not switch off heater in the marshalling box except in summer. Do not allow dirt and deposits on the bushings. They should be periodically cleaned. Do not allow un-authorised entry near the transformer. Do not leave leader un-locked when the transformer is 'ON', in service, in case it is provided. Do not change the sequence of valve opening for taking stand-by pump and motor into circuit. Do not switch on water pump unless the oil pump is switched on. Do not allow water pressure more than the oil pressure in differential pressure gauge. Do not mix the oil unless conforms fully to ISS-335. Do not allow inferior oil to continue in transformer. The oil should be immediately processed and to be used only when it conforms to ISS-355. Do not continue with pink silicajel, it should immediately be changed or regenerated. Do not leave secondary terminals open of an un-loaded C.T. Do not commission the transformer in case iI.R. values are not satisfactory. Do not continue to run the transformer with relief vent diaphragm broken or crack. Do not store transformer for long after reaching site. It must be created and commission at the earliest. Do not keep the transformer gas filled at site for long period.
10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.
WBSEBEA - 74
TRANSFORMER TESTING
While discussing test on tranformer it is needless to say these tests are normaly done for the power transformer. As the distribution transformers are manufactured in a lot and very low in costs in comparison to the power transformer all these tests are normally not performed on distribution transformer. Detail transformer tests are done mainly at factory and at site during its first installation and commissioning. (i) Factory Tests : (A) Routine tests (a) Winding resistance (b) Vector group analysis (c) Open circuit / No load current and loss (d) Load current and loss (e) Insulation resistance between HV-E, LV-E & HV-LV (f) Dielactric tests of insulation, bushings etc (g) Tests of protecting equipments (h) Tap changer (i) Test of cooling circuit. (B) Tyre tests (a) Temperature rise test (b) Lighting impulse test (c) Switching Impulse test (d) Partial discharge test. (C) Special test (a) Zero sequence impedence test (b) Short circuit test (c) Measurement of hermonic of no load current (d) Measurement of noise. (e) Cooling power loss test (f) Main tank vaccum test (g) Oil leakage test. At site before testing of the transformer and its commissioning following things are checked. (i) Oil level in bushing, main conservation tank and diverter tank. (ii)Condition of explosion vent, silicagel breather (iii)Neutral and body earthling of the transformer.(iv) Leakage of oil from any part of the transformer (v)Operation of tap changer (vi) Trapped air release (viii) Setting of relays (viii) Matching of vector group (ix) Visual Test. Test performed at site : (i) Polarity test (ii) Ratio test (iii) Winding resistance and various tap position. (iv) Vector group analysis. (v) Insulation resistance. (vi)Tests of oil (vii)Tests of protective equipments like bucholz, PRD, OSR, winding and oil tamp indicator. (viii)Auto, manual and remote, local operation of tap changer and cooling arrangement (ix)Tests of relays and protechtion scheme (x) Tests of indication of annunciation scheme. One format of testing report which is normally used at WBSEB is enclosed. Technical & proceedural details of same important transformer testing are detailed below.
TABLE - II
Neutralisation Value, mg KOH/g Total sludge, % by weight Reclaimed Recleimed oil with reclaimed Reclaimed oil with oil 0.5% DBPC Oil 3.3% DBPC 0.20 0.225 0.24 0.28 0.30 0.33 0.36 0.39 0.42 0.45 0.48 0.035 0.04 0.045 0.050 0.070 0.090 0.11 0.33 0.39 0.41 0.45 0.04 0.06 0.07 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.18 0.22 0.26 0.29 0.32 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.015 0.012 0.013 0.15 0.16
Hours of ageing 100 164 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
WBSEBEA - 75

(1) Measurement of Polarity, Ratio and Vactor group. Ratio test is conducted to ensure correctness of turns ratio between different wining on each tapping. Tolerance allowed for ratio is + 0.5% of the declared ratio or + 10% of the percentage impedance voltage whichever is smaller. This is done by Transformer Thrns Ratio Meter (TTR). Basic principle of working of a TTR meter is to compare the voltage obtained in the secondary of a transformer under test to that of a standard transformer whose ratio is known the fig. in Annex-III shows the basic connection. The primaries of the transformer under test and the standard transformer are energised from a low voltage source. The secondaries are connected in opposition and a null detector is inserted in between the secondaries. When the ratio of the two transformers are identical no curent flows through the null detector. The ratio of the standard transformer is recoreded as the ratio of the transfomer under test. This is of course an elementary circuit, in the actual meters the comparison is done in the different manner which varies with manufacturer of bridge. For a three phase transformer it is usual to carry out a vector relationship test in which one of the high voltage and low voltage line terminals are joined together for start-star and star-delta transformers and three phase 400 V supply is connected across high voltage line terminals. Voltage between terminals IUI, IVI, IWT & 3UI, 3VI, 3WI like IUI-3VI, IVI-3VI, IVI-3WI, IWI3WI, IWI-3VI) II-3VI. Vector relationship for any other group and be checked in a similar manner. Though the ratio and vector group tests have been carried out at factory and obtained at site, the test is still done as a confirmatery test. This also indicates whether tap switches are properly connected and no damage has been done during transportation. This also help to build up a data with a particular bridge (measuring instrument) so that the result can be compared in future by taking reading by the same brodge. 2. Measurement of winding resistance : The reading of C.C. winding resistance at all taps of each winding is taken with help of either a wheastone bridge or by Kelvin's double bridge. While taking measurement care is taken that inductive effect of winding is eleminated. As resistances value is dependent on temperature, it is imperative that temperature of winding must be stable during measurement and the temperature must also be recorded. When wheatstone bridge is employed the lead resistance is measured and subtracted to compute the winding resistance. When the winding resistance is low it is better to use kelvin's double bridge as these are more accurate. After measuring the winding resistance the values obtained are compared with those obtained during factory test. The comformity of result prove proper connection of tap switch, bushing terminals etc. This also provide a buse data for future reference. Normally at the manufacturer's work resistance, values for a tapped winding are measured only in three tap but at site it is measured at all taps to check connection of tapping. It would be better if a clause is incorporated in P.O. so that resistance at all taps is also measured to get our idea during site testing. 3. Low Voltage Magnetising curent measurement : This low voltage test is conducted by supplying 3 phase 400 volt supply across each winding (primary, secondary, tertiary where (applicable) and keeping other windings open circuited. It is important that the earth connection to neutral is removed during measurement otherwise misguiding results would be obtained. Reading on meter low range (normal few milliamps). Act. ampere is taken and receorded along with supply voltage. Normall one reading on principal tap is taken for a tapped winding transformer. Identical results of factory and site confirm intactness of core & winding after transportation. This test also supplies valueable base data, which is required if a transformer goes defective, for comparison. Faults involving turns of winding can easily be mentioned with the help of the simple test. Also it has been observed that at the time of testing a transformer during abnormality, the current measured in each phase of winding by applying single phase low voltage give much more unbalanced currents in defective phase than the simultenous measurement of current by applying 3 phase voltages. The comparison of data in healthy condition and faulty condition help in locating and
WBSEBEA - 76

pinpointing the trouble spts. As such this measurement is taken then carrying out core balance (or magnetic balance) test which is described below. Sometime the factory test result indicate measurement) only. It is preferred that magnetising current at low voltage is also measured during factory test so that comparison of data after measurement at site is possible. 4. MAGNETIC BALANCE TEST : This test is not covered in I.S. but it gives valuable information regarding healthyness of core and winding of a transformer. It is done by applying single phase voltage between phase and nutral of a start connected winding and measuring voltages induced in other two phases of some winding. This single phase current drawn by the winding also recorded asmentioned earlier. The following points may be noted : (i) Transformer nutral should be disconnected from ground. (ii) No winding terminal should be grounded otherwise results would be erratic. (iii) Zero voltage or very negligible voltage induced in any of the other two phases should be investgiated. (iv) The test is conducted on principal tap. (v) When the transformer core is a five limbed one, sometime the results are confusing as the single phase flux finds another path through the auxiliary limb. The results are recorded in tabular form shown below : Tap Voltage Recorded r-y y-b b-r pos R-N Y-N B-N or r-n y-n b-n ...............( )............................................................................................................................ ...................................................( ) ........................................................................................... ......................................................................( ) ...................................................................... The dashed figure shows the winding to which voltage is applied. The single phase current is recorded inside the bracket. It may pointed out that at the time of recording the current, voltmeter should not be left connected to any winding at the current draw of the voltmeter will affect the single phase magnetising current. Normally this test is not done at work as it is not mentioned in the I.S. and also we were not doing it (it is not mentioned in test report format). But it has been observed that in base datasnaps in defecting troubles in winding and core, if a transformer be defective. It is also preferred that while placing order this test clause is included in the purchase order so that the test is conducted at factory also. There is still some controversy regarding the result and aim of this test. It has been seen that with mitred core, the result in often affected by temperature, as the joints expands or contracts the flux linkage pattern changes. Still then wide variation of inducced voltage indicated by magnetic balance test on a defective transformer clearly shows trouble spots in conjunction with other test result. As such this test hasnow been included as a routing for site testing. 5. MEASUREMENT OF I.R. VALUES. The I.S. specification says insulation of resistance of each winding, in turn, to all other windings, core and frame or tank connected together and to earth shall be measured and recorded. The oil/air temperature shall be measured and recorded immediately prior to the test. It is also castomary to take reading of each winding to earth (with other floating) and between windings. In with a 1000 V/ 2500V/5000V megger and the result is compared with those obtained during factory test. The following points should be noted : (i) The transformer tank must be connected to earth. (ii) The lead wire of the megger should run independly and should not touch any other object. The lead should have no joints. (iii) The readings of infinity should be checked with lead connected and rotating the hndle of the instruments.
WBSEBEA - 77

(iv) It is better to take the reading after 1 min. and hence motor driven megger is preferable. (v) The external surface of the bushings should be cleaned with cotton cloth prior to taking reading. There is no limit prescribed in I.S. in regard to insulation resistance and the value obtained during factory test is the guiding factor. The reading obtained for transformer vary with size and voltage and with temperature and humidity. Insulation resistance when correlated with temperature and referred back to previous test. Large or progressive vairation of insulation resistance from initial value indicate detoriation of the insulation and presence of moisture either in the winding insulation or the oil or both. It should be noted, however, that insulation resistance test is not of itself a guarantee against possible failure in service and knowledge of the conditions and history of transformer are necessary before placing reliance on any given single set of readings. Still this test is of prime importance for building base data as noted earlier and variation from earlier record require investigation and corrective action. 6. Testing of transformer oil : Transformer oil testing is gaining importance day by day as experience has indicated with oil being a vital insulating medium, its condition need to be valuated in strict manner. Previously we used to measure the BDV value (Dielectric strangth) of oil only. Though BDV is the basic parameter and indicate presence of contaminating agents like moisture, fibrous materials etc. Other properties like resistivity, dielectric dissipation factor (Tan delta). Master containter facial tension must be measured prior to commissioning of a transformer. In fact water content of the oil should be measured periodically during drying out of the transformer at site by filtration of oil and the process of filtration should be stopped only when the water content value is within the limit prescribed in IS 1866. This specification has included one list recently which is applicable for transformer before its energisation at site (Annex-V). The BDV of oil should be tested at site itself and the test facility for specific resistance, Tan Delta, acidity, interfacial tension are available at CTL. The instrumen of measuring water content is being procured by CTI and till the facility is available, should be done with help of outside agencies. Monitoring the condition of oil is gaining much importance due to the fact that paraffinic base insulating oil available indegently shown a faster rate of deteroration of electrical properties than of naphthenic base oils which were available for our use till early 70's. It is noticed that due to poor condition of oil, I.R. values of transformer goes down and may affect the life of the transformer leading to its failure. Compliance if test result to I.S. 1866 prior to charging and subsequency test result of the sample taken from the same transformer indicate necessity of taking correctiveness of that one should take in regard to this vital insulating medium. 7. SHORT CIRCUIT AND CHECKING STABILITY OF DIFFERENTIAL PRELOCATION. This test is conducted at site by applying three phase 400V supply to LV side before LV CTS' and short circuiting the H.V. phases after H.V. CT's. This is in effect creating a condition of through fault for a differential protection. Current in each phases flowing through the primary washing of the transformer and also the secondary currents in all circuits including the spill current through operation coil of differential relay are measured. The spill current through the operating oil should be negligible compared to current flowing through the bias coils of the differential relay. This proves that connection of C.T. circuits are healthy and as per standard. This test is normally done at principal tap. Differential protection of a transformer compares the current flowing in the primary and secondary windings of the transformer. In application of differential protection the following points need careful consideration :(a) Magnitude of currents : The currents on the two sides of a transformer differ in megnitude - they are in inverse ratio to the voltages on two sides, C.T's are scle 'c' so that the currents match in the secondaries to the extent possible and I.C.T's are employee to handle the mismatch still left
WBSEBEA - 78

as well as to pass rated current (IA/3A) through bias winding of the relay when the transformer is on 100% load. (b) Phase : In polyphase transormers the transformer winding connection results in a phase difference if currents in primary and secondary windings viz. for a star / delta transformer there will be either + 30o phase difference between primary and secondary current depending on the vactor group of the transformer. This is taken care of by connection of the C.T. secondaries and / or the I.C.T's (When employed) so that relay does not operate for load flow/external fault. (c) Transformer neutral connection : The CT secondary or / and ICT secondary connections are also influenced by Power Transformer Neutral connection to ground. As it means that a path is established for zero sequence current to flow in primary in case of an external fault (with no corresponding current outside the transformer secondary which may be delta connected), the zero so that differential relay does not operate for an external fault. This is done by connecting the secondary of the C T/. I.C.T. in de for star connected primary winding. A typical connection diagram for star / delta transformer is shown Annex - VI. As the scheme is quite eleborate and so many connections are involved in a particular fashion, the total scheme is checked during the stability checking of differential relay at site. 8. CHECKING OF STABILITY OF RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT RELAY. Restricted earth fault relay on start eonnected winding is checked by injecting 1 phase voltage to the neutral C.T. with three phase of H.V. winding shorted together and earthed after H.V. CT as shown below.
Of course in the above arrangement, the current driven through the transformer is not much but still a clear picture so as to correctness of connection of secondaries of the relay is obtained. For testing with higher values of current the transformer winding is by phase by a temporary jumper parnal a current injection set employed as shown below.
For a healthy connection the spill current through RF relay should be negligible compared to main or secondary currents. If restricted earth f ault is applied for winding connected in delta the stability of the relay is
WBSEBEA - 79

checked during short circuit test. 9. Checking of operation of circuit breaker (with isolator open) When all testing as well as miscalleneous checking have been completed tripping of circuit breaker is checked for operation of each protection. 10. COMMISSIONING : After completion of all aforsaid testing and checking, the transformer is energised at no load from H.V. also and kept energise for a period of 24-43 hrs. Temperature of oil and winding are monitored hourly so see the rise under no load condition. The humming of the transformer is noted for any abnormality. If no abnormality is observed transformer is sh ut down to cleck whether any gas has accumulated in the chamber of the Buchhelas' relay. Some trapped air may come out due to vibration and accumulate in the relay. After release of air, the transformer is reenergised and loaded gradually. (A) Other related testing on transformer oil Beside the regular tests of transformer oil i.e. (i) BDV test (ii) Resistivity test (iii) Acidity (iv) Moisture content (PPM) and (v) ( ) test some tests are done in a regular basis for condition monitoring of high voltage and cost power transformers. (i) DGA - Disolve gas Analysis (2) Furan Anglysis These tests are performed on the transfer oil but not to determine the quality of the DGA is a power fool tool to detect incipient fault in transformer & reactors. Furan analysis is done to assertain the condition of insulation and its nature degradation if any. DGA (A) Gasses found dissolved in transformer oil. (a) H2, CA4, C2H6 , C2H4 C2H2, CO2, CO, O2, N2 (B) Gasses are generated due to following reasons. (i) Arcing in oil - Huge amount of H2 & C2H2 (ii) Overheating of oil - CH4, C2H6 , C2H4 are formed in increasing order of sensitivity. C2H2 is favoured in very temperature. (iii) Partial discharge in oil - Iarge amount H2 and CH4 (iv) Cellulose overhealing - large quantities of CO & CO2. (C) Following are temps of the gas generation (i) CH4 > 120oC (ii) C2H6 > 120oC (iii) C2H4 > 150oC (iv) C2H2 > 700oC There are several methods of gas extraction & several methods for its analysis. Mainly an oil sample is first collected in sealed container and by heating and pumping different gas all the gasses are separated by single cycle, multicycle, head space or stripping procedure. The equipment for collecting and seperation of gas is mainly used is famally known as gas-cromatograph (GC). Methods of analysis are key gas, Ratio method and Trend analysis. Rate of rise & Acceptable lebel of dissolved gasses as per TEC 60699 Gas Hydrogen CH4 C2H6 C2H4 C2H6 CO CO2 Level 60-150 40-110 50-90 60-280 3-50 540-900 5100-13000 Rate of rise (ml/day) <5 <2 <2 <2 <0.1 <50 <200
Furn Analysis _ Insultating materials normally consists of (i) Cellulose (89%) linear polymer of a kind of sugar molecule (D-anhydro-gluco-pyranose) (ii) Pentosanes (7-8%) called also hemicellaloses
WBSEBEA - 80

(iii) Lignin (3-4%) complex anromatic polymer. Compunds of interest in furan analysis (1) 2-Furfural (2) 5-Hydroxymettyle 2 furfural (3) 2-Furfural alcholol (4) 2-Acetyl furan (5) 5-methy 1 2 furfural. Insulation paper degration Symptom - Degradation of electrical prop. Result - Scission - breakin gof cellulare claims Main cause - Chemical attack due to thermal stress, oxigent and ingress of moisture. Power grid recommends detail tests of transformer oil including DGA & Furun Analysis (1) Just before changing (2) Just after charging (3) 24 hrs after changing (4) After subsequent 72 hrs. (5) After subsequent 1 weeks (6) After subsequent 2 weeks (7) After sbusequent 3 month (8) After subsequent 6 month (9) Before expiry of warranty.
WBSEBEA - 81
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION
1. INTRODUCTION Power Transformers are one of the most important links inaa power transmission and distribution system. It also possess a wide range of characteristics and certain special features which make complete protection difficult. These conditions must be reviewed before the detailed application of protection is considered. The chocie of suitable protection is also governed by economic considerations. Wide range of transformer ratings are used in transmission and distribution system which vary from a few KVA upto several hundred MVA. Protection with fuse can be justified for transformers of lower ratings, whereas those of the highest ratings should have the best protection that can be designed. In our system transformer ratings upto 3 MVA are generally protected only by fuse. Fuses are overcurrent devices and must have ratings well above the maximum transformer load current in order to carry, without /'blowing', the short duration overal oads that may occur because of such as motor starting, also the fuses must withstand the magnetising inrush current drawn when power transformers are energised. Protective relaying minimises : (a) Cost of - repair of damage. (b) Possibility of spreading and involving other equipments. (c) Time the equipment is out of service (d) Loss in revenue. Protection provided must : (a) Discriminate between faulty and healthy equipment. (b) Must be sensitive i.e. operate under minimum generating condition. (c) Operate with correct speed i.e. fast clearance of fault to minimise damage and increase power system stability. (d) Stabilized under external fault condition and should not result in undesired tripping when there is no fault in the equipment protected. In order to apply the principles of protection to any e quipment the nature and characterisics of the equipment should be elearly understood and an assessment made of the requirements to be taken care of. Thus for a transformer as it is virtually an impedance connected to the system the megnitude of fault current will vary according to the position of fault in the windings. Consideration has to be made whether the transformer neutral is solidly earthed or impedance earthed. So also the operating duty of the transformer as in the case of a traction power supply where frequent short time overloads are quite expected. With all these requirements in view, modern high capacity transformers should be provided with a list selective relaying scheme as primary protection and also to achieve high degree of reliability and safeguard against failure of the protective elements themselves provision of stand by arrangement know as Back up protection should be included in the complete protection scheme. We will now discuss the necessity and application of protection to transformers with emphasis on the requirements for Three Phase Power Transformers which have wide application in the Power Supply System. 2. TYPES OF FAULTS AND EFFECTS : To design a potective scheme it is necessary to have an intimate knowledge of the faults that have to be detected. With regard to transformers the types of fault that can be experienced are :' (a) Earth fault on H.V. external connections. (b) Phase to phase fault on H.V. external connections. (c) Internat earth fault on H.V. winding.
WBSEBEA - 82

(d) Internal Phase to Phase fault on H.V. inding. (e) Short cireuit between H.V. windings. (f) Earth fault on L.V. external connections. (g) Phase to phase fault on L.V. external connections. (h) Internal earth fault on L.V. windings. (i) Internal Phase to Phase fault on L.V. windings. (j) Short circuit between turns of L.V. windings. (k) Sustained system earth fault. (l) Sustained system Phase to Phase fault. Where tertiary winding is provided its cases shall have to be included. EARTH FAULTS The following conditions must exist for earth fault current to flow :A path exists for current to flow into and out of the winding i.e. Zero sequence path. The ampere turn balance is maintained between the windings. The magnitude of earth fault current is dependent on the method of earthing, i.e. solid, resistance or transformer, and transformer connection i.e. star or delta. Star Connection - Solid Earthing : The fault current in this case is controlled mainly by the leakage reactance of the winding, which varies in a compelx manner with the position of the fault. In a solidly grounded neutral star winding fault near the neutral end may result in more severe current than a fault near the phase and because the reactance of the winding drastically reduces (L Turns2) than the voltage (L Turns). Star Connection - Resistance Earthing The fault current in this case is primarily determined by the earthing - resistance. The value of earth fault current is directly proportional to the position of fault in the winding. Delta connection - Earthing Transormer Fault current in this case is determined by the impedance of the earthing transformer winding. High earth fault currents in the case of solid earthing, flow through the transformer coils causing them to try to assume a circular shape and thus produce very high mechanical stresses which are proportional to the square of the current. Phase Faults : Phase faults have a similar effect to that of an earth fault on a solidly earthed transformer si nce current is only limited by transformer winding impedance. Such fault within a transformer however is extremely rare. Interturn Faults : In low voltage transformers interturn insulation breakdown is unlikely to occur unless the mechanical forces of the winding due to external short circuits has caused chafing or cracking of the insulation or moisture has been admitted in the oil. A high voltage transformer connected to an overhead transmission sysem is very likely to be subjected to s teep fronted impulse voltages A lightning stroke or switching surge is a steep fr onted wave of high frequency which is very much attenuated by the ground capacitance Cg (which are large compared to the interturn capacitance Ce) of the first or turns near the line-end. The magnitude of the surge voltage may be several times the normal service voltage. By suitbly grading of insultation providing shilds the distribution may be made more uniform. Also by suitable inter leaved turns of the disg coils voltage between adjacent turns is increased which in turn raises the Ct in comparison to Cg and more uniform distributions is achieved. A short circuit of a few turns of the winding will give rise a heavy fault current in the short circuited loop, but the terminal current will be very small, because of the high ratio of transformeration between the whole winding and the short circuited turns.
WBSEBEA - 83

Inter Winding Fault : This type of fault is very rare at the normal power frequency voltage levels but the opver voltage surges leads to failure of insulation. Core Fault : A conducting bridge across the laminated structure of the .. permit sufficient eddy-current flow to cause serious over heating boths which clamp the cores together are always insulated to avoid trouble. If any portion of the core insulation becomes defective the resultant heating may reach a magnitude sufficient to damage that winding. In oil immersed transformers when such heating is sufficient to cause breakdown of the oil with an aceompaning evolution of gas the same is used to operate a mechanical relay. Tank Fault : Less of oil through tank leaks will ultimately produce a dangerous condition, either due to a reduction in winding insulaton or because of overtheating on load due to the loss of effective cooling. Oil sludge can block cooling ducts and - pipes leading to everheating on load. Such effect is produced by the failure of forced cooling system of large transformers. Faults in transformer their cause, effect and occurance tabulate below : Sl. Fault 1. Phase fault (Phase to Phase) Ground fault Causes Mostly ground faults in 2 Phases, Flashevers Insulation failures Insulation failure grounded neutral Insulation failure Effect High current, Mechnaical stress. High current in operation Short circuit current is high but line terminal current is low. Over voltage leading to developing Eddy current heating increases, increase of noise. Abnormal heating, winding demage, oil break down and gas formation. Occurance Rare
2.
Commn
3.
Interturn fault
Common
4.
Inter Wining Fault
5.
Core fault
6.
Radiator fault/ cooling duct fault
Insulation failure between windigs primary to secondary ground fault. Laminations getting bridged, core bolt insulation failure. Choking of pipes by sluge in oil, cooling ducts also maybe affected.
Rare
Common
common
3. Abnormal operating condition : Abnormal operating condition of transformer which may ultimately to winding damage may be summarised as (a) Operation on short circuit : External short circuits overheat the winding with more than rated current. Particularly in distribution system there is a t endency of repeated application of short cicuit due to feeder faults in order to segregate or isolate any faulty sectien. Such operation, in addition to overheating also imposes evere
WBSEBEA - 84

mechanicl sress due to mutual repulsion between primary and secondary winding - the outer coils tending to bulge out and inner coils experience force of compression. In addition due to even slight dissymetry of the coils - which may be due to tappings and a portion of the winding not utilised - these resuslts force due to current flow which tends to increase the axial displacement. (b) Overload : Due to operation beyond rated capacity of the transformer the increased current result in increased I2r loss which can not be effectively dissipated by the colling arrangement and temperature start increasing. If allowed to persist it will result in damage or burn out. Moreover short time overloads are tolerated by most transformers - which of course depends on the previous loading condition. The best guide to operate a transfomer thus becomes the temperature rise. I.S. Specification - 2026 Temp. Rise Winding Temp. (Res. Method) 55oC Top oil T emp. 45oC / 50oC From code of practice IS-6600) for loading transformer we find the thermal loading limit of transformers are determined by hot spot winding temperature due to powr losses in the transformer. The hotispot temperature should not increase beyond 140..... According to IS 6600 - 1 972 for normal cyclic duty the current does not exceed 1.5 times the rated value and in no case the hot-spot temperature in the winding should not exeed 140c Short time overloads which clear itself e.g. external short circuits, starting of electric motors, starting of-electric locos etc. which are not so dangerous, should not unnecessarily cause a trip out of the transformer. On the other hand protection or failure of the operators to take corrective action in time. (c) Overvoltage : Overvolgages of transient nature are mostly of atmospheric oxigin i.e. lightning disturbances or may be due to sitching in or out of the transformer on to a live line. Switching in While switching in the highest pressure raise is produced by the phenomenon of advancing switch spark connection. In case of a 3 phase transformer as the switch contacts approach each other the pressure of one phase reaches its maximum at-such an instant that a spark over takes place. This causes the whole of the transformer winding to acquire the peak voltage above earth. A little latter the other phass make contact and there is a sudden transition from maximum peak pressure above earth to a pressure below earth which maybe negative peak. During this transition period high pressure, high frequency waves are present in the transformer winding till final metallic are made in all the phases. These pressure rises produce excessive strain on the insulation. Switching Out : Particularly whdn unloaded transformers are switched it, do soon as the switch breaks contact, the magnotising current and their fore the magnetic flux tends to collapse instantaneously and the rate of change of flux being high the induced pressure rises and may be very servere and puts strain on the insulation. The protection necessary for these over voltages are re-intorcing of end turn insulation, magnetic shielding, providing lightning arrestors, co-ordinating gaps n(arching horns) for limiting or attnuating the voltage. (d) Over voltage / Under Frequency : Power frequency over voltage causes an increase in flux, increase in the iron loss and a disproportionately great increase in magnetising current with added heating. When power frequency goes down magnetising current drawal of power transformer also increases. For economic reasons as the transformers are designed to be operated at near about the knee of B-H curve, a slight increase in
WBSEBEA - 85

magnetising current (Say about 10-15%) brings saturation of the core. Also the flux may be diverted from the core laminations to other steel parts as tank walls, bolts etc. which will rapidly heat up, The office is carried over to insulation failure of the coils, laminations and the bolts. Hence in modern large poer transforme the ratio of operting voltage to operating frequency is not allowed to be more than 1.1 times the ratio of rated voltage by rated frequency. Over voltage at power frequency and rated voltage under low frequency condition produce the same result. Over voltage at Power Frequency may result in F.H.V. systems during off peak hours but during that time the system frequency is high. It may also result when one end of a long transmission line trips. 4. Transformer Protection : For all the likely faults in a transformer and also as a measure of continued abnormal operating condition protective scheme should be designed with the well known concept of back up feature. The prime protections for a transformer against fault in winding would have to be (i) Very fast (ii) Selective (iii) Sensitive and (iv) Stable under external fault condition. While it is desirable to minimse (i) Cost of repair of damage. (ii) Possibility of spreading & involving other equipment, (iii) Time the equipment is out of service, (iv) Loss in revenue and of course the strained public relations. While the equipment is out of service, careful consideration is necessary that the transformer is not taken out of-circuit unnecessarily causing interruption of supply with the effect of loss in production for faults which are outside the protected zone of loss in production for faults which are outside the protected Zone of the transformer. This means that stability of protection under through fault condition is often more important point than sensitivity of protection. The proteciton which are normally provided for large capacity transformers are described hereunder. (A) Temperature Relay : It has been indicated earlier that overheating of transformer which is harmful to windings and core are caused by (i) Interturn fault (ii) Repeated externat short circuit feeding (iii) Continued over load (iv) Failure of oil coolers (v) Core fault Detection of over heating is normally done by (a) Top oil temperature measurement (b) Winding temperature measurement Both the meters are supplied by the meanufacturer of the transformer along with the transformer. The winding temperature or the hot spot temperature indication is indirectly obtained by measuring the top oil temperature by a Bourdon liquid expansion indicator mounted in a pocket which also contains a - h eater element energised from a phase CT. The thermomete thus measures top oil temperature plus an increment proportional to load current. The temperature indicators are fitted with mercury switches fixed on the pointer so th at on temperature rise the switch tilts and makes contact through mercury between two electrodes which are connected to electrical circuit to initiate alarm or tripping of the circuit breakers controlling the
WBSEBEA - 86

transformer. The mercury switches may be set to give alarm say at 80oC and trip the transformer at about o 90 C to have a safe margin over the t emperature withstand capability of the t ransformer winding's insulation. The thermometers are generally designed with a thermal time constant similar to that of the winding. In addition to operation supervision these dial type thermometers fitted with mercury switches function as a protective relay. The same temperature relays are also used with different settings, for automating starting or stopping of cooling system like fans, oil pumps of the transformer. Further as the life of insulation goes down with incease in temperature of operation a further refinement in supervision of the transormer is obtained by integrating the period during which the transformer has been overheated to a given degree. Modern high capacity transformers have embeded sensors at selected places to detect hot spot temperature from these sensors with the help of optical fibers. (B) Oil and gas devices All faults below oil in a transformer results in localized heating and breakdown of oil. Some-degree of arcing will always take place in a winding fault and the resulting decompesition of oil will release gases such as hydrogen, carbon menoxide and light hydrocarbons. Transformers oil flash point is generally a round 140oC and a hot spot condition also may r esult in dissociation of oil. When a transformer is fitted with conservator the gas flows towards the conservator where atmospheric pressure exists. Buchholz relay is mounted in the-pipe which has a slope between main tank and conservator. If the fault is of very minor nature such as hot joints gases are liberated slowly and stream of gas bubbles flow towards the conservator. Violent evolution of gas gives sudden surge of oil flow towards the conservator followed by the coseous products. Buehholz relay has two floats with mercury switches attached. The upper float moves down when gas slowly accumulates on the upper part of the chamber. A surge of oil however deflects the lower float and closes mercury switch for tripping of transformer circuit breakers. For a loss of oil condition also both the floats make contracts of the corresponding mercury switch. Buchholz relay, therefore detects (i) Slow gassing - which may be the result of incipient fault, failure of lamination insulation, failure of core belt insulation, failure of core belt insulation, interturn fault. (ii) Oil surge - indicating heavy fault, short circuits, arcing which ereat es pressure rise. (iii) Low oil level - due to leakage of oil or shrinkage of oil at low temperature. As transformer oil is used both as a coolant and as an insulant the oil level must not be allowed to go down below a dangerous level. I.S. specification 3637-1966 sets down the following figures relating to a buchholz relay. Nominal pipe Gas volume for alarm Steady oil flow for trip at Ber at 5 pipe angle. 1"-9' pipe angle 25mm 90-165 cc 70-130 cm/sec 50mm 175-225 cc 75-140 cm/sec 80mm 200-300 cc 90-160 cm/sec The gas collected in a buchholz relay chamber can be analysed and a fair indication of the type of fault obtained. One simple method of analysing the gas is to pass the gas collected through a test tube containing Silver Nitrate Solution 5%. White precipitate indicate dissociation of oil. After this the gas is made to pass through a test tube containing Pall adeous Chloride 1 gm in 1000 cc of water. If black precipitate is obtained it indicates carbon and insulation burning.
WBSEBEA - 87

Often it is found in practice that particularly after initial energisation of transformer the trapped air in pockets and crevices inside transformer get released by vibration and warming up of the cit and it goes inside the Buchhelz Relay chamber operating the relay. The air ingress into the tank may also be while topping up oil in the tank of through leakage in oil pump. To prevent such happenings bleeding of air from bushing turrets, radiators and tank tops are resorted to. Oil surges also occur when the transformer feeds external short circuits and there is dynamic stress in the windings. Thus if Buchholz Relay is made very sensitive there is chance of operation for fault cutside the transformer. In a ddition to Buchholz Relays pressure release devices with micro switch are-placed on the tank cover of the transformer which operates when pressur e inside tank increase and trips the circuit breakers after its actuation. (c) Over current protection : For protection of transformer against external short circuits and also as a back up of other fast type of unit protection simple over current relays with I.D.M.T. characteristics or with fixed time for coordination with feeder protection relays may be applied. But for fault inside the transformer these relays are rather slow and would not be reliable for main protection of transformers of higher capacities. Instantaneous type of over - current relay with high setting is sometimes provide d with I.D.M.T. relay but these have to be adjusted against transient high current fed into the transformer. If the settings of instantenecus O/C relays are reduced the chances of malfunctioning under inrush condition or asymetric external fault condition increases. The back up protection of a transformer is one of the protections which protect the transformer from being damaged due to abnormalities imposed by the grid upon the transformers. The number of faults in our grid are much higher than the fault in the protected zone of transformer through its unit protectien like differential relay. Hence the duty of these over current relays on one hand i s to allow the transformer to operate under system fault condition and not to issue tripping impulse unless called for and definitely save the t ransformer before it is damaged. The back up relay does the life saving duty to the transformer. They should therefore be applied with higher degree of r espect than merely as a back up relay. (D) Differential Protection Short circuits in the transformer windings and terminals are most satisfactorily protected by circulating current differential protection scheme. The principle of operation of differential protection depends basically on a comparison of the currents on two sides of the installation to be protected. The protected zone is between the locations of H.V. and L.V. side C.Ts whose secondaries are properly connected so that normally the current circulates between the C.Ts are no current flows through the relay. So care has to be taken in connection of the C.Ts so that the relay do not operate for road or external fault but will satisfactorily operate for internal fault. Unbalance Currents When the transformer is healthy the C.Ts on the primary and secondary sides of the transformer (the ratio of C.Ts chosen according to the ratio of transformation) will result in negligible difference current flowing through the relay. But due to inherent C.T. errer there will always be some small unbalance current flowing through the relay. While considering the unbalance the vector position of the currents in the primary and secondary are to be considered as apart from magnitude difference there may also be a difference due to phase displacement between primary and secondary currents. Tapped Windings : The normal unblance ..... in the differential protection is further influenced by the tappings provided in the transformer. Tap changing arangements provided in a transformer must be accounted for in selecting the differential protection sensitivity as only at one particular tap position the C.T. ratio may be chosen for a perfect balance but at other tap positions the unbalance current will increase. This
WBSEBEA - 88

unbalance is further agg ravated when through fault fed through the transformer. The undesired operation through differential relay due to through fault must be prevented i.e. the relay has to be stablized under through fault condition. Operation of tap changing equipment effectively alters the turns ratio compensating this effect by varying the tappings on differential protection C.Ts. is impractical. The causes of unbalances in the circulating current differential protection may be summarised as (i) Tap changing arrangement in the Transformer (ii) Inaccuracies in the C.Ts. selected for proper balance. (iii) Increased C.T. errors on high external short circuits. (iv) Different burdens being imposed on the primary and secondary side C.Ts.. Also in practice the C.Ts. are connected in series by pilot wires which offer impedanes to the current flow. As the relay is connected across these pilot wires the connection points must be at equipotential for minimum current flow through the relay. The mid points 1 & 2 are at equipotential so also 1'-2'.
Q 1' 1
PILOT
CT
RELAY PILOT
CT
2'
Q v 1 P R
S 2'
Unbalance Voltage
3 P
P.Q. is voltage of CT-A, RS is the voltage of C.T.-B, QR is the voltage drop across pilot, so also SP. The leeatiens of the CTs, A and B may be such that the distance from the relay location may be unequal. Thus there will be unequal burden imposed on the two CTs, thereby when external short circuits are being fed the CTs will unequially saturate and develop different voltages both the magnitide and phase. This may lead to undesired operation of differential relay. (Voltage Balance Scheme : When the distance between the CTs is largeas in case of feeder transformers the lead burdens - become excessive and voltage balance scheme at Translay Scheme would become a better preposition). Stability We have new noticed that the increase in current due to external short circuit leads to increase in the unblance current in the circuitating current differential protection. The protection designer must take action so that the relay stablises and does not operate under this condition. There are various ways of stablishing the relay against through fault.
WBSEBEA - 89

(i) From the vector relations of the current on the two sides of the protected element it is clear that for all external fault. i1 + i2 > i1 - i2 and for internal fault i1 - i2 > i2 + i2 where i2 & i2 are the C.T. secondary current vectors fed to the differential relay.
- i2
i1 - i 2 i2 i1 + i 2 i2
i2
i1 + i 2 i2 i1 - i 2
-i 2
External Through Fault
Internal Through Fault
This relation can be utilised to design a comparator which compares the differences of current against the sum of currents. In the rectifier bridge comparator the differential current after rectification floows through relay in one direction tending to operate the relay and the through current after rectification flow through the relay in res training direction.
Tranf.
CT
CT
DIFF CT
THRU CT
Relay R
More difference cu rrent is-required if through fault current is more for operation of the relay. This system has the disadvantage of more differential current required at low level of fault current i.e the relay has less sensitivity. The practical requirement would be more stablisheation a ......... on low levels of through fault current i.e. increased sensitiviity for small fault current.
WBSEBEA - 90

For increasing the sensitivity the resistance R is sometimes made non linear so that at higher through current more voltage developed across through C.T. secondary drives more restraint current through the relay and for low through current more operating current flow through the relay. (ii) The sensitivity along with stabilisation is increased by using Biased Differential Relay.
Bias or Rest Coil
i1 - i 2
OP. Coil
Bias or Rest Coil
i1
i1
Diff. Current
i1 + i 2
e on gZ in rat pe O
Non-Operating Zone
Rest Current
i1 + i 2
Current through Bias Windings or restraint coils prevent relay operation. This gives a sloped operating characteristics to the relay. The current through the restraint coils or the restraint amp. turns is controlled to give a setting range of 15-40% slope. Practically it means that when the normal pick up current of the operating coil of the relay is say 1.5A, for - a through current flow of 20A through the restraint coils when the slope setting is 25% the pick up increases to 5A. The % sloaping characteristics is chosen on the basis of (a) Tap changing % variation (b) Mismatch between C.T. current and relay tap (c) Difference of errors between C.Ts. on the two sides. Making the pick up settings unduly sensitive increases the chances of false operation as such the transformer differential protection for one end feed is given generally a pick up value of 20-30% of rated current i.e. for a 5A relay it is 1-1.5A. Under one end feed condition the current in the operating coil is equal to the current in the restraint coil. Hence there is every chance of operation of the differential relay under inrush condition which is practically a one and feed condition. Thus a bias relay will not satisfctorily stablished against inrush. (iii) The stablishation may also be effected by use of magnetic biasing where a 3-limb core type auxiliary transformer is made to saturate by the flow of the through current so th at differential current requirement is more to induce sufficient emf in the 3rd winding which is connected to the differential operating relay.
WBSEBEA - 91

CORE
OPR Coil
Diff. Current Through Current
This has the added advantage of stablishing against inrush. Magnetishing current of transformers : Some basic concepts of transformer magnetising currents are discussed hereunder. Magnetising current contains harmonics of odd order (3,5,7,9) ... etc) Amplitude of harmonics increases as maximum flux density is raised. Sinusoidal flux wave is required by sinusoidal applied voltage. Since flux demand magnetising current with harmonic content, magnetising current is supplied the flux will be flat topped and emf induced by it will be peaky i.e. will contain odd harmonics.
Flux Density SINE FLUX MAS CURRENT
MAG CURRENT
For single phase transformer the 3rd harmonic voltage generated circulate a current through the supply source and the transformer winding depending on the impedances to 3rd harmonic current. Thus there is a reduction of 3rd harmonic cmf as flat top wave is made more sinusoidal by 3rd harmonic current the flux due to which become additive to the fundamental.For 3 phase transformers of the shall type or single phase units where the phases are magnetically sepearatre such core must itself produce therequiredflux. Dd connection :Provide path for 3rd harmonic currents which are cophasal or with zero phase sequence. The supply of course providing only fundamental sinusoidal magnatising current - this results in flat topped flux wave - which induced peaky emf ith 3rd harmonic component that circulates 3rd harmonic current in the closed delta. This becomes additive with supply flux and builds up the total flux required. this the primary voltage and current waves are sine waves, the flux is very nearly sine and the 3rd harmonic magnetising current is circulated in the delta.
WBSEBEA - 92

Yd and Dy Connection Without neutral earthing they behave in the same way, the delta winding providing path for 3rd harmonic. Yy Connection : Unearthed neutral cannot provide path for 3rd harmonic zero sequence current. As such the flux is flat topped and induced emf. is peaky. The 3rd harmonic voltage between the line terminals balance out because the zero sequence voltages are either all directed towards the line of towards neutral hence between the lines the 3rd harmonic voltage balance out - but the neutral point voltage oscillate and as such phase to neutral point voltage also oscillate. The 5th harmonic and 7th harmonic voltages are blanced vectors of 120 displacement and appear across the lines to cause self supression line currents. Yy with neutral connection with the supply previde path for the 3rd harmonic zero sequence current and we get stable phase to neutral voltage. Yyd Connection : Tertiary delta is provided for the path of harmonic current. For eore type transformers - where the phases are also magnotically interlinked - the 3rd harmonic current producing - flux will all be directed either up or down simultaneously in 3 limbs. The return paths of these fluxes lie outside the core through air, oil or tank walls. These paths have high - reluctance. As such sinusoidal flux is tended to the retained and these induce only sinuseidal emf. The 3rd harmonic fluxes however induce currents is core bolts and tank walts and cause losses. If the core is censtructed with 5 limbs the end limbs provide path for 3rd harmonic flux verified mathematically for a 3 phase system. In the analysis VR VY VB are the phase voltages, suffix 3, 5, 7 etc. stand for 3rd, 5th 7th harmonics, RYB is the phase sequence such that VY lags VR by-120o and VB lags VR 240o 3, 5 etc. are - r espectively phase displacements of the harmonic components, conveniently lagging anble has been taken as negative. For the 3rd Harmonic Let VR VY = V3 Sin (3wt + 3) = V3 Sin {(3 (wt-120) + 3} = V2 Sin (3wt + 3 - 2 ) = V3 [Sin (3wt + 3) Cos-2 - Cos (3wt + 3) Sin 2 ] = V3 Sin (3wt + 3) And VB = V3 Sin {3 (wt-240) + 3) = V2 Sin (3wt + 3 - 4 ) = V3 [Sin ( 3wt + 3) Cos 4 - Cos (3wt + 3) Sin 4 ] = V3 Sin (3wt + 3) Hence 3rd harmonic is of zero sequence or the phase vectors are cophesal, as there is no displacement between the respective R1 Y and B phase voltages. For the 5th Harmonic Let VR = V5 Sin (5wt + 5) = V5 Sin (5wt + 5- 600) = V5 Sin (5wt + 5 + 120 - 720) = V5 [Sin (5wt + 5 + 120) Cos 720 - Cos (5wt + 3+120) Sin 720] = V5 Sin (5wt + 5 + 120) And VB = V5 Sin {5 (wt-240) + 5} = V5 Sin (5wt-1200 + 5) = V5 Sin (5wt + 5 + 240 - 1440) Then VY = V5 Sin {5 (wt - 120) + 5}
WBSEBEA - 93

V5 [Sin (5wt + 5 + 240) Cos (4 x 360) - Cos (5wt - 5 + 240) x Sin 4 x 260] = V5 Sin (5wt - 3 + 240) Hence 5th harmonic has ve sequence as the VL is seen to lead VR by 120o and VB is seen to lead VR by 240o Similarly 7th harmonic will be seen to be of +ve sequence and 9th harmonic is of Zero sequence. Magnetising Inrush The magnatising current flowing into a transformer is not balanced by an equivalent cutflowing current from the secondary. Therefore it appears as an internal fault to the differential protection. Even though normal magnetising current of a large transformer is hardly 2% of full load current the switching in current rise in transformers - may even be several times full load current and this current appears as difference current in the circulating current differential scheme. However this phenomenon is a transient one and decays gradually to normal magnetising current. Due to saturation of iron circuit the magnetising current is very large at high flux density. The transformer magnatising current is highly inductive. The flux due to the magnetising current induces emf. which balance the applied voltage at every instant. Now if the instant of application of voltage is the zero point of voltage wave with v rising +ve and in case no residual flux is there, the flux has to start from zero but the induced emf. always lagging there, the flux has to start from zero but the induced emf. always lagging the flux by 90o demands that the flux be at its maximum at negative peak. At the end of the half cycle of emf. wave at zero erossing the flux-demanded is maximum at positive peak. The change of flux is from -ve peak to +ve paek i.e. the flux has - to increase in the +ve direction to maintain the induced emf. The rate of change has to increase and at the end of the first half wave rechaes 2. Thus for inducing the same emf. the flux has doubled as it has to start from zero. Any residual flux remaining in the core obviously influences the flux level reduced and depending on the polarity of the residual flux the level may be more or less than 2. The theoritical maximum level is for the most unfavourable condition when switching occurs at zero point of voltage wave and residual magnetism is of opposite polarity when the level may reach 3 times normal there were no resistance and losses this abnormal condition would continue indefinitely. But because of loses the flux wave gradually reduces to normal level disposed symetrically about time axis. One peculiarity of the magnetising inrush wave is that it is highly asymmetrical. As has been explained the double flux-wave comes to z ero and again rises to double value (if losses are neglected). This gives the pecularity that the magnetising current wave do not have -ve excursions. Analysis of this wave gives us decaying peaks with respect to time and contains large harmonic components. Harmonic analysis of a typical transformer magnetising inrush wave gives. Ratio of Amplitude of harmonic component of amplitude of fundamental component. Fundamental 100% Direct current 57.7% 2nd Harmonic 63% 3rd Harmonic 26.8% 4th Harmonic 5.1% 5th Harmonic 4.1% 6th Harmonic 3.7% 7th Harmonic 2.4% The inrush wave is thus seen to have high percentage of second harmonic which is utilised to restrin relay operation and provide stability of differential relay against magnetising inrush.
WBSEBEA - 94

Normal fault currents however has very little 2nd harmonic content as mostly short eireuit currents contain edd number of harmonics and a relatively large 3rd harmonic content. It may be worthwhile to mention that the inrush phenomenon is experienced both while the transformer is switched on-and also when the system voltage recovers after clearing an external fault. Also the transformer operation under saturated condition or overfluxed condition due to voltage rise or frequency fall of the system will increase the manetising current and increase the odd harmonics but the relative proportion of higher order harmonis increases i.e. the 5th will ovrtake the 3rd and at still higher density 7th will overtake the 5th. As such in some forms of differential protection relay utilising 2nd harmonic restraint, a 5th harmonic bypass feature is provided to safeguard against under stabilisation. The time the inrush condition persists depend on the time constant of the system and the transformer and may be about 2-3 seconds - higher capacity transformer having higher order decay time. Stability of Differential relay Against Inrush : The possible ways to avoid operation of differential relays on inrush transients are : (i) To increase the differential relay operating time by giving a time delay by -allowing the decaying inrush to come down which is slow. A practical time delay of the order of 0.2 seconds may be necessary. This unduly increases the risk and quantum of damage under actual internal fault condition. However by suitably selecting the pick up level-and time delay with pessibly two-levels of operation one high set element with small time delay and a low set element with a little bit of more time delay the method is applied to not so large capacity transformers. It is practically-observed that in about 40 to 50 ms the peak of the inrush current wave decay sufficiently so that the pick up setting of the differential relay could be reduced to about 2-3 times the rated current. (ii) To provide restraint proportional to harmonic content of the current - as hs been explained utilising 2nd harmonic content of inrush wave - the differential protection can be made very fast, sensitive and selective. the time of operation is made within 40 ms with satisfactorily stability against magnetising inrush. This minimises damage to the important transformers as the pick up level of the relay may be reduced to about 20-30% of rated current. Differential Protection Circuits : In the application of differential protection based on circulation current principles to transformer protection the following points need dcareful consideration. (i) Magnitude : The currents on the two sides of a transformer differ in magnitude they are in the inverse ratio to the voltages on the two sides. C.T. Ratios should be properly selected so that the currents match in the circulating arm of the differential protection. (ii) Phase : In single phase transformers the phase difference between the primary and secondary current may be either zero or 180 degrees. The C.T. secondaries in the circulating current scheme need be properly connected in proper polarities to establish the circulating current under normal condition of load flow or external fault feed. In polyphase transformers where the transformer winding connections result in a phase difference the same has to be corrected in the secondary connections. For 3 phase transformers the windings are either in star or in delta connection and there may be +30 or -30 degree phase difference between the primary and secondary current depending on the vector group in hich catagory the transformer falls. Care thus has to be exercised to connect C.Ts in the primary and secondary sides properly so that the relay will not oprate for load flow or external fault feed but will satisfactorily operate for internal faults.
IR IR B
ir
i r-b
30
30
i b-y iy ib
IB
IY I Y-R
STAR SIDE
DELTA SIDE
WBSEBEA - 95
i y-r

a1
IR
i r-b ir
a2
b1
IY
i y-r iy
b2
c1
IB I B-Y
i b-y ib
c2
IY R I R-B
To Relay Terminal
To Relay Start Point
i b-y
i y-r i r-b
To Relay (iii) Transformer Neutral Connection : The type of C.T. secondary connections necessary are also influenced by the Power Transformer Neutral connection to ground or source neutral. It means that if there is a parth for zero sequence current to flow in the primary, for effective stabilsation against external fault the zero sequence current is to be eliminated from the differential relay circuit. For the normal star-Delta transformers if the star point is solidly or resistance earthed there is path for earth fault current to flow through the star windings and will appear in the primary in the star side - but delta side no earth fault current can flow in the lines. Thus the zero sequence curent would appear in the secondary circuit as differential current. If the differential C.T. secondary on the star
IO
IO
iO
IO
IO
iO
IO
IO 3 IO
iO
3IO
side is connected in delta then the zero sequence current which are co-phasal would eirculate within the delta and would be absent in the differential C.T. secondary connection to the relay and would thus be kept out of the differential relay.
WBSEBEA - 96
With insulated neutral star connected trans former operation however the above problem is not experienced and the differential C.T. secondary may be connected either is star or in delta. As a ganeral rule it maybe said that the C.T. secondary connections on the star side of the transformer be in delta and on the delta side of the transformer it should be in star. Delta connected C.T. secondary eliminates zero sequence current from relay. The positive and The negetive sequence currents due to the external fault circulate within the differential C.T. secondaries on the primary and secondary circuits and are out of the differential relay operating coil. For the in zone E/F the differential relay gets the positive and negative sequence currents as operating quantity. Stability on Extn. E/F on Delta Side If the earthing transformer on the Delta Side is outsides the Zone of protection the E/F in the delta system outside C.T. locations would produce current distributions as shown which circulate within the differential C.T. secondaries and is kept out of operating coils.
IO
IO IO IO IO 3IO
IO IO IO
3IO IO IO IO
Stability on external earth fault

WBSEBEA - 97

Zig-Zag or inter connected star grounding transformer has normal magnetising impedance of high value but for E/F, currents flow in windings of the same - core in such a manner that the ampere turn cancel and hence offer lower impodance. GROUNDING TRANSFORMER ON DELTA SIDE INSIDE ZONE OF DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION When the grounding transformer is within the Zone of protection on external E/F. in the delta system might produce differential operating current for the relay. This is taken care of by providing a shunt path for the zero sequence current through auxiliary C.Ts connected as shown of ratio 3/1A. With this arrangement even though the star connected differential C.T. on the delta side carry 3 units of current the pilot wires of the differential relay scheme is made to carry 2 units of current in the faulted phase but provide balancing circulating current.
IO
IO 3IO
IO
IO
3IO
Rest Relay S/F 1 1 3 3
WBSEBEA - 98

(E) Restricted E/F protection :ESTRICTED E/F PROTECTIONESTRICTED E/F PROTECTION :This type of protection is based on the differential protection principle and has a restricted zone of operation. This is particularly applied to star connected windings where the neutral is impedance grounded i.e. fault current magnitude is greatly reduced. The phase side C.Ts and the neutral C.T. are connected according to polarity in the circulating
High High Impedence Relay Relay
current principle for external E/F current. The relay used may be of high impedance variety for stabilising action but can be made very sensitive and instantaneous in operation to sense the fault current in the transformer winding only. The scheme is also applied in solidly earthed neutral transformer and almost fault coverage of the winding is obtained as the fault current is completely s ensed and there is increased sensitivity. It also serve as a fst back up to the normal differential protection provided for all the windings of the transformer which would also satisfactorily sense E/F in the star connected winding. (F) Back up protection : External short circuit fault back up is provided by inverse time O/C relay on the source side and these also work as back up to the main differential protection
O/C Prot
Doff Prot
WBSEBEA - 99
B/U cero seq. prot
Relay to Trip After A Time Delay

In star side a fault remainign hanging for a long time might damage the transformer. As such external E/F is sensed by the neutral C.T. of the star winding hich is made to operate a simple induction type relay to t rip after a time delay. Tripping Schemes As transformers are often used to connect two or three different sources of generation tripping of one circuit breaker only does not serve the purpose of fault isolation. Some s ort of intertripping arrngement is essential whereby all the possible feed paths to the transformer are interrupted for complete isolation of the transformer. For any internal fault in the transformer all the circuit -breakers connected to must trip out and the transformer should be locked out of circuits. This lock out feature generally means that in case of internal fault in a transformer it should not be reenergised unless a thorough investigation is made and the fault removed. Thus auxiliary relays are provided with normally classed contacts to break the closing circuit path of the circuit breakers. These auxiliary tripping relays should preferably be of hand reset type so that once operated the transformer is not reenergised unless the relay is rest manually after investigating the fault. As it is intended to provide very fst primary protection for the transformers these lock out relays must be fast - within 1 cycle of operation time and should satisfctorily make contact without bounce. While desingning the tripping scheme care should be taken not to unnecessarily lock out the transformer on operation of back up non directional O/C relay on one of the sides as in case of a 3 winding transformer supply to or interconnection of two sources could be maintained inspite of operation of one circuit beaker. The back up protection time delay should be enough for other system relays to operate. In case of generator transformer unit a choce may be open to trip out the H.V. unit C.B. only for system fault and maintain the generator floating with all its auxiliary loads for quick resynchronisation.
WBSEBEA - 100
(A)
Recommended Maintenance Schedule for Transformers of Capacities Less Than 1000 KVA (i.e. 630 KVA) Inspection frequency (2) Hourly " Daily Items to be inspected (3) Load (amperes) Voltage Dehydrating breather Inspection notes (4) Check against rated figures " Check that air-passages are clear. Check colour of active agent Check transformer oil level Examines for creack and dirt deposits Check for dielectric strength and water content. Check for acidity and sludge Overall inspection in cluding lifting of core and coils Action required if inspection shows unsatisfactory condition. (5) If silicagel is pink, change by spare charge, The old charge may be reactivated for use again. If low, top up with dry oil Examine transformer for leaks Clean or replace. Take suitable action to restore quality of oil.
Sl. No. (1) (i) (ii) (iii)
(iv)
Monthly
Oil level in transformer Bushings Oil in transformer
(v) (vi)
Quarterly Yarly
(vii)
5 yearly
Wash by hosing down with clean dry oil
(B) (i) (ii) (iii)
Recommended Maintenance Schedule for Transrormers of Capacities of 1000 KVA and Above (1600 KVA, 3150 KVA & 5000 KA) Hourly " " Ambient temperature Winding temperature Oil temperature
Check that temperature rise is reasonable
(iv) (v) (vi)
" " Daily
Load (amperes) check agaisnt rated Voltage figures Oil level in transformer Check agaisnt transformer oil level Oil level in bushing Relief diaphragm Dehydrating breather Check that air possages are free. Check colour of active agent.
Shut down the transformer and investigate it either is persistently higher than normal. If low, top up with dry oil, examine transformer for leaks. Replace if cracked or broken. If silicagel is pink change by spare charge. The old charge may be reactivated for use again.
(vii) " (viii) " (ix) "
WBSEBEA - 101
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. (x) Quarterly Bushing Oil in transformer Examine for cracks and dirt deposits Check for dielectric strength and water content Check for ac idity and sludge Clean or replace Take suitable action to restore quality of oil. Filter or replace
(xi) Quaterly
(xii) Yearly (or Oil in transformer earlier if, the trasnfroemr can conveniently be taken out for checking) (Ref IS : 1886-1967) (xiii) Yearly (or earlier Oil filled bushings if, the transformer can conven iently be taken out for checking) (xiv) " Gasket joints
Test Oil
Filter or replace
(xv)
"
Cable boxes
(xvi) (xvii) "
"
Surge diverter and gaps Relays, alarms, their circuits, etc.
(xviii)
"
Earth resistance
Check for sealing arrangements for filling holes. Examine compounds for cracks Examine for cracks and dirt depsits. Examine relay and alarm contacts, their operation, fuses, etc. Check relay accuracy etc.
Tighten the bolts even ly to avoid uneven pressure. Replace gaskets, if leaking.
Clean or replace. Clean the component and replace contacts and fuses if necessary. Change the settings, if necessary. Take suitable action, if earth resistance is high. Wash by hosing down with clean dry oil. "
(xix) (a) 5 yearly
(b) 7-10 yearly Notes :
1000 to 3000 KVA Overall inspection in cluding lifting of core and coils Above 3000 KVA "
1. With respect to on-load tap changers, the manufacturer's recommendation should be followed. 2. The silicagel may be reactivated by heating it to 150o to 200oC 3. Every time the drying medium is changed, oil seal should also be changed. 4. No work should be done on any transformer unless it is disconnected from all external circuits and the tank and all windings have been solidly earthed. 5. In case of anything abnormal occuring during service, make's advice should be obtained, giving him complete particulars as to the nature and extent of occuraence, together with the name plate particulars in order to assist indentification.
WBSEBEA - 102
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. ANNEXURE-VII
RECOMMENDED SCHEDULE FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF OIL CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. SCHEDULE FOR INSPECTION Frequency of Inspection 1 Daily Equipments / Items to be inspected 2 (a) General Cleanliness Points to be checked / noted 3 Examine the switchgear premises, the doors & OCB, etc. for general cleanliness. Check for oil leaks Examine for the following : Signs of local heating Any unusual smell/noise Check that auxiliary fuses are intact. (i) Test the alarm circuit for continuity (ii) Check lighting circuit and earthing system " " (f) Safety aids (g) Indicating and measuring instruments Check safety aids for proper operation/condition (i) Check indicating instruments for correct readings and being in proper working order. (ii) Check meters for missing seals & rotation of dises. " (h) Battery (i) Check for rated voltage (ii) Check specific gravity of electrolyte. Check for load condition on 3 -phase, adjust relay settings. If necessary. Recondition or replace as necessary. Remarks 4
"
(b) Oil (c) OCB tank (i) (ii)
" "
(d) Auxiliary fuses (e) Alarm & lighting circuit etc.
"
(i) Load
WBSEBEA - 103
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. B. SCHEDULES FOR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Note : The steps recommended below are to be carried out in addition to the steps already pointed out in respect of various items under inspection programme. Frequency of maintenance 1 After 30 Nos. of trippings (kee record of trippings) or earlier, if necessary Equipments / items Details of the maintenance to be maintained work to be done 2 (a) Cleaning (b) Oil 3 Remove all loose external dirt with clean and dry cloth (i) Test for dielectric strength moisture and acidity, if necessary. (ii) Change or filter the oil as necessary and fill up to t he level. (iii) Check allso if the oil has become thick or carbonised. (iv) Keep record of oil test results. (c) Contacts (i) Check for correct alignment of contacts and proper contact pressure. (i) The contacts under short circuit conditions should be examined at the earliest. (ii) Use only somoth files/fine and paper for In case of heavy short circuit, the oil should be examined immediately. Remarks 4
"
(d) Auxiliary contacts
(e) Insulators
(ii) Also check if three contacts close a simultaneously for removing the carbon deposits and burns, etc. without disturbing the profile of contacts) (iii) Examine by burning and other damages of contacts such as burns and pittings, Recondition or replace, where necessary. (iv) Lubricate the contacts with petroleum jelly (i) Inspect for any deterioration. (ii) Check for proper contact and apply a thin film of vaseline (i) Clean and examine for signs of damage (ii) Check insulation resistance Replace & renew where necessary (iii) Keep continuous record of insulation tests WBSEBEA - 104
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Frequency of maintenance 1 Quarterly Equipments / items to be maintained 2 (f) Mechanism Details of the maintenance work to be done 3 (i) Check for tightness of all bolts, nuts & screws. (ii) Check trip plunger and reset corectly (iii) Check and lubricate racking mechanism, truck wheels, racking interlock and all other moving parts (iv) Check operation of tank lowering device & lubricate, as necessary (v) Examine tank linings for any deterioration due to absorption of moisture, etc. and replace, if necessary Examine, clean and adjust, as necessary Check and renew where necessary Inspect and tighten (i) Examine auxiliary wiring and other connections for being intact. (ii) Megger test the control wiring, closing and tripping coils, etc. Recondition or replace, as necessary Check for satisfactory operation Adjust, where necessary Check leads and tighten connections (i) Examine and clean the bushings (ii) Check oil for correct level & proper dielectric strength (iii) Megger test CTs & PTs, recondition or replace, as necessary These should be got tested from the M & T department as pr their standard practice Remarks 4
(g) Auxiliary Switches (b) Auxiliary fuses (i) Main connections (j) Small wiring & other connections
(k) Indicators & Measuring Instruments. (l) Earthing (m) CTs & PTs
(n) Relays & other associated equipments.
Notes : (i) (ii)
Before returning the OCB to service, close and check for correct operation. Periodical measurement of insulation resistance of the complete breaker in closed position, but disconnected on the incoming and outgoing sides, should also be done.
WBSEBEA - 105
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. C. SCHEDULE OF OVERHAULS Note : The points already described under inspection & maintenance schedules should be taken into consideration in addition to the points given belowFreq. of overhands 1 Fiver-yearly (The period can be changed depending up-on the load cycle of the equipment and manufacturer's recommndation) Equipment / items to be over hauled 2 Defails of the work to be done 3 Clean, lubricate and examine the operation of internal mechanism Check the operation of trip circuit. Also clean the tank and CTs chambers, remove the old tank lining and gaskets, replace the oil, if necessary also change compound in the CT chamber and paint the body of OCB. All auxiliary switches, wirings, fuses and other asociated equipments should be cleaned and thoroughly checked. Per form all standard tests such as contact resistance measurement tank and bushing insulation test, CT and control wiring insulation test etc. remarks 4
OCB
'
(Ref. Maintenance Schedule for Distribution System' issued by CBIP - Technical Report 2 July 1974).
WBSEBEA - 106
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Schedule of Inspection & Maintenance of switch yard and other sub-station equipments No. & Name of apparatus 1 1. Yard, bus-bars, supports, insulators, air break switches fuses, contacts, etc. Details 2 Examine post & switch insulators, (insulators) Bus bar, expansion joints, etc. etc. cleaning contacts, and lubricting bearing swival pins of AB switches. Period between Inspection 3 Half yearly during pre-arranged shut downs.
Note : Check if all parts are mechanically tight on all switches and adjustment stops should be checked since they are intended to absorb the shock of operations. If the stops are not adjusted properly, the AB switch post type unit may fail. All AB switches should be oiled and kept in condition. Interlocks should be checked priodically. 2. Lightining arrester (a) Cleaning, examining for cracks or damaged glass and meggering (b) Check gap settings (c) Oxide film arresters charging 3. Batteries (a) Checking specific gravity and voltage of each cell (i) Station Batteries Half yearly or whenever prearranged shut downs for other orks are arranged. - do Yearly, preferably before the lightning season
(ii) Nife cells (b) Cleaning of terminals applying vaseline & top ping up with distilled water. (c) Overhaul of Nife 11/2 years or recommended Batteries by manufacturers. (d) Leakage test by lamps or voltmeter method 4. Station earths including transformers and lightning arresters (a) Combined earth resistence Each shift
Before & after charge & weekly when trickled charges exist. Monthly Weekly for lead storage batteries
(b) Checking the earth connnections at joints etc. (c) Watering of sub-station earths (d) Watering of distribution transformer station earths. Conducting megger tests for transformers, PTs, CTs
Monthly at all stations by Operation and Maintenance Staff & half yearly by MRT staff on their test visits Monthly at all stations. Daily Thrice a week Monthly or when shut downs are arranged for other works. In recording the reading, it should
5. Insulation Resistance
WBSEBEA - 107
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. No. & Name of apparatus 1 Details 2 Period between Inspection 3 be noted whether the apparatus is hot or cold, the temperature being given wherever possible. At 60oC IR value should be 2 megohms / KV At lower temperature the IR value should be corecpondingly more. The insulation resistance of Power Transformers should be taken with a 1000 volts megger immediately after the transformer is switched off after a load run and the temperature at which these insulation resistance are meggered should also be noted. Yearly
6. Control switches 7. (a) Cable boxes (b) O.C.?b. control cables
Cleaning and lubricating contact
(i) Examination and topping up Six months after first servicing (ii) Meggering Quarterly Meggering Quarterly as and when O.C.B. is taken up for maintenance. Cleaning, checking up all bolts and nuts, vermin proofing arrangement, checking of all portion inside and out side of kiosks against cracks or damage. Greasing of links and contacts. Relay Testing (a) Checking liquid level (b) Testing and refilling (c) Testing containers for pressure.
8. Kiosks
- d0 -
9. Relay 10. Fire Extinguishers
Should be tested by the M.R.T. once a year Monthly Yearly Once in 3 years.
Oil test result Breakdown Voltage Kv (diebddic strength) Specific resistance at 27oC ohm-cm Water content Diebctric dissipation factor (Tan delta at 90oC) New tralisation value mg of KOH / gm of oil Inter f acial tension N/M at 27oC Flash point Sludge
As per I.S.S. (for New Oil) 50 KV (RMs) 500 x 1012 500 ppm 0.005 0.03 0.04 140oC 0.1 percent by wt.
WBSEBEA - 108
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Trouble Shooting Non working of bell Work attended a. Loose Connections b. Disturbing of bell adjustment. c. Burning of bel coil d. Alarm D.C. Fusa blown. a. Fusing of bulb. b. Loose connections c. Resistance found open circuited d. Alignment of aux. contacts C.B. getting disturbed. a. Failure of A.C. b. Failure of A ux. Transformer 220/110V c. Putting Remote / Local switch on Local Non operation from remote. d. Contact problem in Lower/raise button. e. Tripping of miniature ckt. breaker of A.C. motor a. Pressure switch faulty b. Loose connection a. Loose connection b. Open circuit of trip coil c. Mechanical trouble d. Allgnment of A ux. contacts of C.B. Getting disturbed. a. Open circuit of secondary C.T. Circult b. Loose connection in C.T. secondary ckt. a. Failure of A./C. Supply b. Failure of limit switch/ C.B. Aux. switch defective motor. a. Loose connection b. Open circuit in closing coil c. Mechanical trouble. d. Alignment of Aux. contacts C.B. getting disturbed. e. Spring was not charged. f. Non resetting of trip/master relay. g. Non closing from remote and if local / remote switch on. a. Failure of insulation b. Short circuit due to lizard/rats etc. a. Failure of L.A. b. Loose connections. c. Providing improper cord\e C.Ts d. Failure of L.V. cable box. e. Failure of C.T. f. Failure of insulators within differential zone g. Magnetising in-rush current in case of DDT type relay.
1.
2.
Failure of trip healthy indication
3.
Non-working of O.L.T.C. Control
4. 5.
Non auto start of compressors Non tripping of feeder breaker
6. 7.
Noise in C.T. Spring charging motor does not start
8.
Non closing of breaker
9.
Flash overs and damage to the riting
10. Tripping of transformer on differential
WBSEBEA - 109
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Trouble Shooting 11. "Flashor on " without fault 12. Tripping of transformer on buchalz Work attended a. D.C. Leakage a. Due to oil surge. b. due to moisture / water inside the connection box. c. Improper operation of bucholz relay. d. Shorting of terminal due to failure of backalite plate. e. Low oil level. a. D.C. leakage b. Sticking of low oil level pointer. c. Rain water inside the connection box. a. Mechanied defect. a. D.C. leakage b. Accept switch faulty c. Aux relay faulty a. D.C. leakage b. Push buttom faulty a. The oral / remote switch on local possition b. Loose connection c. Trip / close switch faulty a. The local / remote switch on local possition b. Loose connection c. Trip/close switch faulty
13. Low oil level indication on panel was appearing continiously 14. Flag not resetting 15. Non-resetting of bell
16. Non-resetting of indication 17. Non-tripping of O.C.B. from remote end. 18. Capacitor bank tripping
19. Tripping of breaker without indication a. Due to shorting of DC (+) ve b. Leakage of D.C. 20. Continious riging of bell a. D.C. leakage b. Adjustment of Aux Relay contact is disturbed. 21. Abnormal noise in C.T. 22. Mal operation of relay 23. Bttery charger not working a. Winding is open a. Defects in relay a. Failure of transformer b. Failure of diode c. Failure of A.C. supply switch faulty. a. Defect in temp indicator b. Defect in contactor c. Loose connection a. Fusing of Lamp b. Defect in Aux switch c. Loose connection. a. Defect in Aux switch b. Loose wire c. Semaphor coil burnt d. Non-availability of Aux contractor for isolater.
24. Transformer cooling fans auto start, not working 25. Indication Lamp not indicating
26. Semaphor not working
WBSEBEA - 110
TEST REPORT OF TRANSFORMER

A. Place of installation : B. Particulars : (a) New / Old / Repaired / (b) Commissioned / to be commissioned : (c) Step up Step down : (d) Outdoor Bushing / Cable entry : (e) Independent / parallel with (i) Make (ii) Maker's No. (iii) KVA Rating (iv) % Imp. (b) Voltage Taps.
Date of Test :
(f) Name Plate details : Make : KVA Maker's No. No. Load Voltage Type Imp. % Vector Group Current Connection Diagram No. Phase
HT LT LT LT
HT Type of ceiling LT Vol. of oil Frequency Wt. of core & Hdg. Tem risc Wt. of oil Year of Manufacture Total Wt. (g) Connection Diagram (h) Tapping, switch connection No. of taps : % variation of voltage. Insulation Resistance of Windings : by 5000V / 2500V / 2000V Meggar Windings : H.V. - Earth : L..V. - Earth : H.V. - L.V. : Tertiary Earth H .V.- Tertiary L.V.-Tertiary
Megolms Mogohms Hegehms Megohms Megohms.
Oil temp. OC Megohms
WBSEBEA - 111

2. No. - Load test (Magnetising current) : By applying 400V, 3 Phase suppply supply voltage : H.V. L.V. Phase Current Phase Current A a B b C c 3. Voltage Ratio Test : Applying 400V, 3 phase supply on H.V. side and measuring corresponding voltage on L.V. side. H.V. LV an bn cn ab bc ca AH : V Tops BN : V CN : V AB : V DC : V CA : V 4. Vector Group Test : By injecting 400V, 3 Phase supply on H.V.side A and a are shorted. Supply voltage : Volts 3 Phase DY11 Yd11 Between Between Terminals Volts Terminals Volts Aa An AB AB BC BC CA CA Ab AN Ac BN Bo CN Bc bN Bn cN b Bb Cc Bc Cn Cc bc Cc bn ab ab ca bc ca ca ca 5. Truns Ratio : by T. T. (Hand / Power) Normal tap No. Tap Vectorq IIV/LV Turns Ratio Calculating Position Group Value DY11AB/bnBC/bn CA/CN Yd11 AM/ac BN/ba CN/cb Yyo An/an DC/nc CA/na DY1 AB/nb BN/bc CN/ca Yd1 AB/nb
WBSEBEA - 112

6. D.C. Resistance of windings : Particulars of Rest Bridge : Lead Resistance : Temp. on W.T. indicator : a) L.V. : Values in Ohms Winding terminals With load rest ab/an : bc/bn : ca/cn : (b) H.V. (with tap.) Tapposition
Ohms OoC With load rest
AB/AN With without lead lead rest rest
BC/BN with without lead lead rest rest
CA/CN with without lead lead rest rest
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 7. Dielectric strength ofl. : (a) Top sample : (b) Bottom sample : (c) Tap changer tank : (d) Diverter Tank : 8. Arching Horn Gap. : HV side : LV side : 9. Heat - Run Results : (a) Filtration : Hot/Cold/Hort circult (b) Duration : Hours (c) Temp. rise : (d) Insultation Resistance : (i) Initial : M. ohms at
WBSEBEA - 113

0 (ii) Final : M.Ohms at C (iii) Minimum figures during heat run : M. Ohms (d) Diclectric strength of oil as per BS : 10. Buchholz Relay : (a) Partriculars : Make : Type / Model : Sl. No. (b) Supply voltage, Protection scheme ; (c) Alarm Contact : Contact closes at C.C.of air Contact opens at C.C. of air (d) Trip Contact : Contact caloses at C.C.of air Contact opens at C.C.of air 11. Thermometer : (a) Oil temperature Indication (i) Particulars : Make : Type / Model : Sl.No. : (ii) Setting ; Celler starts : Oc Colour stop : OC Alarm : OC Trip.
at
(b) (i)
Winding Temperatures Indicator : Particulars : Make : Type / Model : Sl. No. (ii) C.T. Perticulars : (iii) Setting :' Cooler Starts : OC Coolar steps Alarm : OC Trip : OC 12. Miscellatious chedking : (a) Condition of explosion rent (Diaphgram ): (b) Oil level in the conservator tank in coordination with temperature. (c) Breather : (i) Condition of silica gel : (ii) Oil level in the post : (iii) Air tight fitting of pipe :
WBSEBEA - 114

(d) Valves in colling tubes and conservator : to be opened : (e) Clearance of Transformer bushing from ground : (f) Release of trapped air : (i) Opening of air vent at the top of bushings : (ii) Opening of release cecks on transformer cover plate and radiator : (iii) Opening of gas cook of Buchholz Relay : (g) Arrangement of neutral and body earthing and size of conductors : (h) Leakage of oil from any part of Transformer : (i) Arrangement of ligh tning arresteers and its I.R. values : (j) Earth resistance : (k) Verification of phases with the other transformer for parallel operation. 13. Protection : OCB / Fuse (a) H.V. side Details : OCB / Fuse (b) L.V. side : OCB/Fuse details : Relays / Fuse Geuge (c) Differential Relay : 14. Remarks : STANDARD PATINGS (IS : 3637-1966) Nominal Pipe Bore mm 25 50 80 Gas volume for alarm at 05 pitch angle cm3 90 to 165 175 to 225 200 to 300 QUANTITY Steady oil flow for trip at 10 to 90 pipe angle Cm/Sec. 70 to 130 75 to 1 40 90 to 160
WBSEBEA - 115
PRE COMMISSIONING REPORT OF CIRCUIT BREAKER.

(a) Nomenclature - i.e. the equipment / feeder to control (b) Voltage (c) Make (d) Type (e) Current rating (f) Breaking capacity (g) Making capacity (h) Serial No. (i) D.C. Auxiliary Voltage (j) A.C. Auxiliary Voltage (k) Has the operation / Alignment been checked by local operation(l) Has it been filled with oil upto the desired level / compresser system working satisfactorily (m) B.D.V. of oil after filling (n) I.R. values of the phases in closed condition of the C.B. by 2000V megger(o) Date of test 1. C. T. for each individual C.T. : (a) Voltage (b) Type (c) Make (d) Sl. No. (e) Ratio (f) No. of Secondary Core (g) V. A. capacity. (h) Class accuracy (i) Saturation factor (k) (i) I.R. of primary side by 2000 / 1000 V mgger(ii) I.R. of secondary by 500 V megger(iii) I.R. between primary & secondary / secondaries by 2000V / 1000 megger 2. Date of test 3. Control Panel (a) Relay Instruments, Meters etc. (d) Details of Control Circuit Wiring : (i) C. T. circuit size (ii) P. T. circuit size (iii) D. C. Auxiliary circuit size (iv) A.C. Auxiliary circuit (v) Insulation resistance of all the Control Circuit Wiring checked -
WBSEBEA - 116

4. P. T. Type Make Sl. No. No. of secondary winding V. A. capacity of each Class of accuracy, each secondary I.R. of primary (where it can be measured ) by 2000V / 1000 megger I.R. of secondary by 500V megger Date of Test 5. D. C. Auxiliary Power :(a) Battery : (i) Type (ii) Capacity of the battery (Amp. Hr.) (iii) Make (iv) Condition (b) Charger : (i) Type (ii) Capacity (iii) Make (c) Control & distribution arrangement : 6. A.C. Auxiliary Power : (i) Source (ii) Duplicate / Single (iii) Voltage (iv) Phase (v) Control & distribution arrangement 7. Lightning Arrestor : (i) Voltage Class (ii) Make (iii) Serial No.(iv) I.R. value between line terminal & Earth terminal 8. Earth Resistance at : (i) Neutral Connection to earth(ii) Lightning Arrestor connection(iii) Sub-station Grid for structure and other points 9. Has the permission of Electrical Inspector obtained ?
WBSEBEA - 117
TRANSFORMER OIL - SIGNIFICANCE AND IMPORTANCE OF TESTS

1. Introduction : 1.1. Insulating oils used as dielectric and coolant media in transformers and switchears, are today the most important of the petroleum speciality oils being produced in the country. This is also not because of the quality consumed or required, but because o the stringent specifications of the finished products and careful quality control associated with their production. The development of indigenous insulating oils is of fairly recent origin. Till the beginning of 1969, the total annual requirements of the country (approximately 25 million litres) were being met through import from U.K., U.S.A. and several East European countries. 1.2. The indigenous production of insulating oils started in the year 1969. The basic raw material for the production of insulating oils is a low viscosity tube basestock which is normally obtained by fractional distillation and subsequent treatment of crude petroleum. In India, two refineries namely, Madras Refineries Ltd., Madras, and Lube India Ltd., (Now Hindustan Petroleum Corporation), Bombay, produce the transformer oil feed stocks (TOFS). These refineries distil the crudes from Iran (Darius) and Middle East (Light Arabian) respectively. Important characteristics of the transformer oil base-stock are sulphur content, aniline point, pour point, viscosity and arom atic content which must be kept within permissible limits in order to produce good insulating oils. The TOFS is transported to the insulating oil refineries by means of pipeline (depending on the distance) or by suitable tankers where it is further refined to yield good quality insulating oils. Although several processes for this refining have been developed in India, all the refineries still follow the conventional acid treatment process. 2. Tests on Insulating oils : 2.1. Tests for insulating oil lay down the minimum standards to which a sample must conform before it is selected for service. Although the operating conditions in transformers and switch gears are quite different from each other, it is observed in practice, that the oil which gives satisfactory performance in transformers is suitable for switchgear also. Many countries have formulated their own test procedure generally in line with IEC 296 and laid down certain minimum properties which a new oil must possess. These are published in the form of National Standard Specifications and some of the well-know ones are listed in Table 1. Table - I Hational Specification for Insulating Oils in Transformers & Switchgears Country Specification Number U.S.A. ASTM France N.F. Cir. C.1.03. Germany VDE-0370 India IS : 335 Sweden SEN - 1 4 Italy A.E. 1.7 Switzerland S.E.V. 124 U.K. B.S. : 148 U.S.S.R. GOST-981 2.2. A survey of the various national specifications reveals that their basic requirements are common, the difference being only in the test procedure or the relative importance of a particular test. The tests laid down by these standards fall into three categories, namely physical, chemical and electrical tests, as etailed in Table II.
WBSEBEA - 118

TABLE - II Categories of Tests for Transformer Oil Physical Tests 1. Specific 2. Viscosity 3. Flash & Fire Point 4. Pour Point 5. Colour 6. Interfacial Tension Chemical Tests 1. Neutralisation Number 2. Saponification value 3. Copper strip corrosion 4. Oxidation stability 5. Inorganic chlorides and sulphates 6. Steam emulsion number Electrical Tests 1. Electric Strength 2. Power Factor 3. Resistivity
2.3. The recent Indian Standard Specification on new insulating oils for Transformers and Switchgears incorporates the above properties for acceptance purposes as detailed in Table III.
Sl. No. 1. 2. 3.
Characteristics
Table - III Schedule of Characteristics as per IS : 335-1992 Requirement The oil shall be clear & transpare 0.89 g/cm3 27 cst Under consideration 0.04 N/m Min 140oC -6oC 0.03 mg KOH/g Nil Non corrosive
4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
Appearance Density at 29.5oC, Max Kinematic Viscosity, Max (a) at 27oC (b) at 40oC Interfacial tension at 27oC, Min Flash point, pensky martin (Closed), Pour point, Max Neutralisation value (i) Total acidity, Max (ii) Inorganic acidity/alkalinity Corresive Sulphur Electric Strength (Breakdown voltage), Min. (a) New untreate doil
(b) After treatment 10. Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan Delta) (at 90oC, Max 11. Specific Resistance (Resistivity)
30 kv (rms) if the above value is not attained the oil shall be treated. 60 kv (rms) 0.002
WBSEBEA - 119

(a) at 90oC, Min 35 x 1012 ohm-cm (b)( at 27oC, Min 1500 x 1012 ohm-cm 12. Oridation Stability (a) Neutralisation value after oxidation, Max. (b) Total sludge after oxidation, Max 13. Presence of oxidation inhibitor 14. Water content, Max 15. Ageing characteristics (a) Specific Resistance (1) at 27oC, Min (2) at 90oC, Min (b) Dielectric dissipation factor at 90oC, Max. (c) Total acidity, Max (d) Total sludge, Max 16. S. K. value 2.4. for the 3. 3.1
0.40 mg KOH/g 0.10% by weight The oil shall not contain antioxidant additives. 50 ppm
2.5 x 1012 ohm-cm 0.2 x 1012 ohm - cm 0.20 0.05 mg KOH/g 0.05 % by weight under consideration
The significance of these tests are not well-known and an attmpe in brief to bring out these benefit of users of the oil has been made in this paper. Significance of Tests Physical Tests : (a) Density : The density of an oil is defined as the ratio of the weight of a given volume of the oil to the weight of the same volume of water. The test can be conducted either by using a hydrometer or a density bottle if greater accuracy is desired. The specific gravity is used extensively to facilitate volume to weight conversions, especially while conducting oxidation stability, neutralisation number tests etc. The transformer heat co-efficient is determined by the physical properties of the coolant, density, specific heat. thermal conductivity and viscosity in addition to other variable factors. The density of transformer oil usually varies within a fairly narrow range, of 0.85 to 0.89. Higher density of oil results in higher viscosity which in turn affects the heat dissipation characteristics of the oil. Further, the prescribed value of the density (0.85-0.89) also facilitates easy separation into distinct layers of free oil and oil with dissolved moisture. (b) Viscosity : The viscosity of an oil is a measure of its resistance to continuous flow without the effect of external forces. It is expressed as the kinematic viscosity (unit being a stoke). Viscosity is measured by determining the time required for a fixed volume of liquid to flow through a long capillary tube, e.g., Ostwald U-type Viscometer. The oil must be mobile as heat transformer in transformers occurs mainly by convection currents. A low viscosity is therefore, advantageous. The oil viscosity may have marked effect on the dielectric losses generated under A.C. voltages at the higher frequencies. It is important that at low temperatures the viscosity of transformer oil be as low as possible. In other words, the curve characterizing the temperature dependence of oil viscosity should be as fault as possible. Otherwise, with a high viscosity in the cooled transformer, the removal of heat from its windings will be difficult in the initial period after energizing, leading to over eating. An increase in the viscosity of oil in transformer tap exchanger and oil circuit breakers impedes the movement of the moing pars of the apparatus and thus impairs normal operation.
WBSEBEA - 120

In view of this, the British standard has prescribed viscosity - temperature characteristics for the oils used for transformers and switchgear characteristics for the oils used for transformers and switchgear. The Indian Standard IS : 335 (1973) prescribes the viscosity value only at ambient (the value at 40 degree is under consideration). It is, therefore, considered necessary that incorporation of temperature characteristics in line with British Standard should be explored for indigenous insulating oils also. (c) Pour Point : The pour point may be defined as the lowest temperature at which the oil will just flow under the prescribed conditions of the test. This is determined with the aid of a cloud and pour point apparatusk in which a fixed volume of oil is chilled without disturbance by means of a freezing mixture (solid CO2+Acetone mixture is usually employed). The pour point of an oil is an important characteristics especially when the equipment is exposed to weather. If the oil becomes viscous or solidifies, it may hinder the formation of convection currents and thus proper cooling of the apparatus may not occur. A pour point which is below the low temperature that may normally occur, is specified. (d) Flash Point : The flash point of an oil is the minimum temperature to which an oil must be heated so that it gives enough vapour which can form a flammable mixture with the air under the prescribed conditions of the test. This is determined by employing a Pensky Martens closed cup type apparatus. A minimum value of flash point is specified in order to prevent the risk of a fire that might result by accidental ignition. Normally a flash point of 140oC is the minimum specified for good oils. (e) Interfacial Tension : The inter facial tension between the oil and water is a measure of the molecular attractive force between their unlike molecules at the interface. It is expressed in dynes / cm. The interfacial tension is determined by means of suitable tensiometers (Torsion balance), in which the force required to lift a planar ring of platinum from the oiil/water interface into the oil is measured. The value varies with temperature and ageing of interface, and therefore, the prescribed test conditions should be strictly adhered to. A minimum value of 40 dynes / cm for new oils is specified in Indian and Foreign Standards. This ensures freedom from all types of dissolved impurities. The basic significance of the interfacial tension value for electrical insulating oils lies in the fact that it provides a sensitive means for detection of polar contaminants in the oil including those deterioration products acquired in service as a result of oxidation. It is widely accepted that the drop in the interfacial tension value which accompanies oil oxidation can be used as a gauge of oil quality in commercial use. Mention is also made that interfacial tension values are established by the operators of oil filled transformers, below which the oil is considered unsatisfactory for continued commercial use because of contaminant formation of oil sludge and other degrading products in service as a result of oxidaiton. The studies at the Central Poer Research Institute have also established that interfacial tension tests can be used as a guide to the quality of insulating oils in our equipment. 3.2. Chemical Tests : (a) Neutralisation Number : Neutraliation number or the acid content of insulating oil is defined as the number of miligram of potassium hydroxide required to neutralise completely the acids present in one gram of the oil. The presence of acids in the oil is detrimental for besides corroding the various parts of the equipment, viz, transformers it also lowers dielectric strength of the oil and often polymerise to form insoluble sludge which can clog the cooling system. Two types of acids are present in the oil, viz., Inorganic and organic. The inorganic acidity has to be nil in new insulating oils since mineral acids are highly corrosive. The organic acidity in an oil is due to the organic acid constituents of crude petroleum from which the oil is derived. The maximum permissible limit for this acidity for new insulating oil is 0.03 mg KOH/ g. Neutralisation number is sum of the organic and inorganic acids in the oil.
WBSEBEA - 121

The maximum permissible limit of 0.03 mg KOH/g for new oils is prescribed only to ensure that it is not detrimental for safe use in transformers in which oil comes in contact with many parts of the transformer. However, in service the oil deteriorates due to oxidation resuslting in the formation of acids and sludges and the acidity of the oil goes up. The acidity of oil has to be constantly monitored for the safety of the transformers and oil when it attains a maximum acidity value of 0.5 mg KOH/ g should not be used in transformers. CPRI has developed a quick test with which the acidity limits can be constantly monitored and precautionary measures taken. This has been discussed in detail in para four of this paper. (b) Copper strip corrosion test : Crude petroleum usually contains sulphur compounds, most of which are removed during the refining process. This test is carried out to detect any traces of free or combined sulphur that may be present in an oil. A clean polished strip of pure copper metal of the specified dimensions is heated in a fixed quantity of the oil at a fixed temperature for the specified period of time. A black, brown or grey tarnish indicates the presence of corrosive sulphur. The presence of sulphur promotes oxidation and also corrodes the copper and silver metal points of the equipment (Transformer).' (c) Oxidation stability test : The oxidation stability test is perhaps the most important test an oil must pass before it is accepted for service. This test submits the oil sample to accelerated oxidation i n a relatively short time than it is likely to encounter in service. The aim is to assess the behavious of the oil during its long service from the results of the severe laboratory oxidation. The accelerated conditions in different standards are generally brought out by : (i) increase in temperature to the order of 100oC-170oC (ii) inclusion of metals or soluble catalysts (iii) bubbling of air or oxygen in the oil during oxidation. The oxidation stability test as laid down by Indian Standard consists in ageing 25g of the oil at 100oC for 164 hours during which oxygen at the rate of one litre per hour is bubbled into the oil. A copper wire of specified dimensions, after being cleaned and rolled into a cylindrical shape, is placed in the oil to act as a catalyst. The oxidation is carried out in a test tube. After oxidation, the aged oil is diluted to four times its volume with normal heptane and the amount of sludge and acids formed are determined by chemical analysis. The maximum limits fixed for new oils are acidity 0.4 mg KOH/gm and sludge 0.1 percent by weight. Formation of deterioration products above this level has been correlated by experience to a faster rate of deterioration in service. (d) Moisture content : Water will dissolve in insulating oil and its presence contribute a hazard not only to the dielectric performance of the oil itself but also to insulations that are immersed in the oil. Normally in new oils the tendency to form an emulsion with water is small and the problem is not considered of major importance. However, as the acidity of the oil increases during use because of oxidation or contamination, the tendency to form a water emulsion (ability to dissolve moisture) as the result of temperature cycling of agitation, increases. The water in insulating oils can be determined by Karl Fischer method. This method is based essentially upon reduction of iodine by sulphur dioxide in the presence of water. This reaction becomes quantitative only when pyridine and methyl alcohol are present to react with the sulphur trioxide. (e) Presence of oxidation inhibitor : The test is most important to check whether the insulating oils, presumed uninhibited, do not contain auti-oxidation additives. Further this test would also confirm the presence and nature of the anti-oxidant additives in inhibited oils (presence of amine or phenolic type). The Indian Standard IS : 335 (1993, is applicable to only uninhibited oils, and therefore oils conforming to the specification should not be accepted if the oil contains any amine or phenolic type of inhibitor. 3.3. Electrical Tests : (a) Dielectric Strength : Defined as the measure of the stress in kilo volts required to breakdown the oil across a specified gap under certain conditions. For determining this a 90 KV transformer and a test cell are used.
WBSEBEA - 122

The electric strength terst serves to indicate the presence of moisture, dirt and other foreign / conducting particles in the oil. The specified electric strength of an oil must always be Maintained during its service , if it has to perform the main functions satisfactory i.e. , insulate the live parts within the equipment. standards.New oils should have minimum dielectric breakdown stress of 30 KV for 2.5 mm gap according to Indian This test was considered to be and is still the most important test being carried out by the operation and maintenance staff to check the quality of oil. This practice is . not a healthy one as other important electrical characteristics like power factor and Resistivity have come into vogue which throws more light on the quality characteristics of the oil. Further, the oil is in contact with many insulating materials inside the transformer and hence electrical tests like resistivity, power factor are now con consider to be important to check the quality of oil for efficient running of the systems. There are instances wherein the oil though has Requisite dielectric strength, has not been found suitable for use in transformers. (b) Resistivity: The measurement of the resistivity of insulating oils is a sensitive test for the detection of conducting impurities on mineral insulating oils. It is especially valuable in that its greatest range of sensitivity is particularly applicable to the evaluation of the purity of new and unused insulating liquids. Even small traces of contaminating materials will give a marked lowering of the oil resistivity value. Using proper testing techniques and cleanliness together with suitable testing equipment, the test is reproducible within the required limits and gives a rapid means for gauging the purity of new insulating oils. To determine resistivity normally 500 v DC is applied using a test gap of 2 mm. The temperature, time of electrification are fixed and the test cell should be cleaned thoroughly before use. It is expressed in ohm-Cm. A low resistivity indicates the p presence of moisture and conductive contaminants. For new oil, Indian Standard prescribes minimum value of 1500 x 1012 and 35 x 1012 ohm-cm at 27oC and 90oC respectively. The minimum resistivity value of 1500 x 1012 ohm-cm at 27oC is prescribed for acceptance purposes in the case of new oil only to achieve the desired IR value for different category of power transformers. Thus, the new oil when filled in trasnformers comes into contact with many insulating materials particularly paper and varnish used for coil winding, etc. which would result in lowering of the IR value of the winding of the transformer. Hence, this phenomena should not be seriously viewed. However, it is considered necessary that the desired IR value as prescribed in IS : 1886 "Maintenance of Transformers" should be achieved for different rating of power transformers whenever the transformers are filled with new oil complying to the standards for efficient running of power systems. For any given oil, there is generally a relationship between dissipation factor and resistivity : if the dissipation factor increases, there is a reduction in resistivity. Useful additional information can be obtained if resistivity is carried out at ambient and at 90oC. A satisfactory result at 90oC coupled with an unsatisfactory value at the lower temperature is an indication of the presence of water or cold precipitale material, without undue chemical deterioration or general contamination. The measurement of resistivity can be carried out at site but not that of dielectric dissipation factor. Figure I illustrates quality standard to be strictly adhered to where resistivity value of a transformer oil has to be used as a criteria for the continued useability of the oil in commercial transformer in service. The resistivity value for insulating oils is affected by changes in voltage, the period of electrification and the temperature. For this reason, standardised test conditions are usually adopted for the quality evaluation of new oils and for the study of the purity of oils in practice. (c) Dielectric Dissipation Factory : The dielectric dissipation factor of an oil is the ratio of the power dissipation in the oil in watts, to the product of the effective voltage and current in volt amperes, when tested with a sinusoidal field under prescribed conditions. This is numerically e equivalent to the cosine of the phase angle or the sine of the loss angle. Dielectric dissipation factor is a numeric, or dimensionless quantity. It may be expressed in per unit
WBSEBEA - 123

or percent, as, for example 0.010 per unit or 1.0 percent. The power factor characteric of insulating oil gives the engineer a valuable tool for evaluating the dielectric degradaiton in commercial use. As such, the study of insulation power factor is of real assistance and value. Not only the test responds readily to the presence of contaminating material which might have been picked up by the insulating oil or derived from the oil, due to improper manufacture or use of the e equipment, but also indicate presence of soluble varnishes, resins and moisture. The power factor of a properly refined oil is extremely low, less than 0.002 when tested at power frequency (50 Hz) at 90oC. The test is influenced considerably by the temperature, testing voltage and frequency. Standard, specifications, therefore, define the test conditions. The Indian Standard prescribes an average stress 200 V/mm for power factor measurements at power frequency. The Standard also specifies a maximum value of 0.002 when measured at 90oC. The main effects of increased power factor are increased heating, increased corrosion, increased water solubility and emulsifying power and faster rate of oxidation. A lower value of power factor ensures freedom from moisture, polar compounds and other soluble impurities. The power factor is measured by using a Schering Bridge and suitably designed cell. To select quality oils and to maintain these oils at a suitable level of dielectric quality during commercial use, has long been an engineering problem inevitably a sociated with the use of an insulating liquid in electrical equipment. Quality control has been generally exercised by the imposition of chemical and dielectric test requirements. More recently, the use of the power factor test has been applied not only for the acceptance of good quality during the commercial use of the oil filled apparatus. As a quality control for new oils, the power factor test is applied to detect the presence of moisture and oil soluble electrolytic and polar compounds present as the result of improper refining techniques. As a control test for oils in service, the power factor value is used to protect against the accumulation of excessive oxiation products in oil soluble and to detect the presence of moisure and organic materials including resins and varnishes which may or may not have been sufficiently cured in the factory manufacture of the equipment. The application of the power factor test is also intended to detect the presence of other types of polar materials which may have been introduced in the oil due to improper manufacturing techniques or to the selection and use of structural or dielectric materials which are not completely inert when in contact with the oil. Such materials include the various waxes, bitumens and asphalt compositions, solder and brazing fluxes, core plating materials, etc. The presence of such materials is frequently not detected by the use of the usual oil testing techniques such as dielectric strength, colour and oil acidity. The application of the power factor test to transformer oil is considered an excellent protection against the acceptance of an inferior grade of new transformer oil and also for the continuance of a highly degraded oil in commercial use. 3.4. S. K. Value : In our country, all the indigenous manufacturers still adopt the conventional acid treatment process for manufacture of transformer oil from the available indigenous base stocks. The behaviour of insulating oils in the presence of concentrated sulphuric acid furnishes information on the refining degree of mineral oils, particularly insulating oils. The S. K. value is the increase in volume of concentrated sulphuric acid on adding a given test sample. VDE (German) Standard prescribes a minimum value of 4% for value for acceptance purposes. This test would certainly give insight to the extent of acid treatment for manufacture transformer oils from the base-stocks. This is particular important as the optimum dosage treatment of sulphuric acid should be given to the base-stocks for production of good quality transformer oil. 4. Reconditioning : 4.1. General Considerations - The physical means that are used for removing water and solids from oil include several types of filter, centrifuge and vacuum dehydrator.
WBSEBEA - 124

The best choice of temperature for purification depends on circumstances. If vacuum treatment is employed to remove water, it is advisable to limit the temperature to 60oC to prevent oxidation. If it is desirable to reduce precipitable sludge (or free water without vacuum treatment), cold treatment may be appropriate. 4.2. Reconditioning Process : 4.2.1. Filters - Filter devices are generally based upon the principle of forcing oil under pressure through absorbing material such as paper. Filters of this type are capable of removing contaminants in suspension, but they cannot remove them effectively when they are dissolved or in colloidal form. These devices will not remove air and in fact tend to aerate the oil. The water-removing ability of the filter is d dependent upon the dryness of the filter media. When filtering oil containing water, the filter medium rapidly comes into equilibrium with the water content of the oil. A continuous indication of the water content of the outgoing oil is very helpful to follow the efficiency of the process. 4.2.2. Centrifuges - Another means for separating contaminants in suspension is the continuous centrifuge. In general, the centrifuge can handle a much greater concentration contamination than the conventional filter but cannot remove some of the contaminants as completely as a filter. Consequently, the centrifuge can handle a much greater concentration contamination than the conventional filter but cannot remove some of the contaminants as completely as a filter. Consequently, the centrifuge is generally found in use for rough bulk cleaning where large amounts of contaminanted oil are to be handled. Frequently, the output of the centrifuge is put through a filter for the final clean up. 4.2.3. Vacuum dehydrators - The vacuum dehydrator is an efficient means of reducing the gas and water content of an insulating oil to a very low value. There are two types of vacuum dehydrator, both of them functioning at elevated temperature for a short time. In one method, the treatment is accomplished by spraying the oil into a vacuum chamber, the oil is allowed to flow over a series of baffles inside a vacuum chamber thus forming thin films. If the oil contains solid matter, it is advisable to pass it through some kind of a filter before processing under vacuum. The operational of vacuum dehydrators is continuous. In addition to removing water, vacuum dehydrators will degas the oil and remove the more volatile acids. 4.3. Application to Electrical Equipment : 4.3.1. Direct Purification - The oil is removed through a purifying plant into suitable containers and, when the electrical equipment is to be refilled, the oil is passed through the purifier again into the equipment. This method should be used for switchgears but it is suitable for smaller transformer also, provided care is taken to ensure that the core and windings are thoroughly cleaned. The oil-containing housing of the equipment should also be well cleaned, by means of oil originating from the purifier. The direct purification method requires auxiliary oil containers, and drums are sometimes use for the purpose. 4.3.2. Purification by Circulation - The oil is circulated through the purifier, being taken from the bottom of the tank of the electrical equipment and redelivered to the top. The return delivery should be made smoothly and horizontally at or near the surface level to avoid, as far as possible, mixing of cleaned oil with oil which has not yet passed through the purifier. The circulating method is particularly useful for removing suspended internal contamination in equipment, but all adhering contamination will not necessarily be removed. Experience has shown that it is generally necessary to pass the total volume of oil through the purifier not less than three times, and equipment of appropriate capacity should be chosen with this in mind. The final amount passed will depend on the degree of contamination, and the process must be continued until a sample from the bottom of the electrical equipment, after the oil has been allowed to settle for a few hours, passes the electric strength test. The circulation should preferably be performed with the electrical equipment dead, and this is essential when using a purifier which aerates the oil. In an emergency, a transformer may be left alive while circulation is proceeding provided that there is a closed system of piping so that aeration of oil
WBSEBEA - 125

is avoided, but this is not recommended on transformers for voltages above 11 KV. Aeration occurs mostly with centrifugal separators, other than those operating under vacuum, and should aeration occur, the oil should be allowed to stand for some time before the equipment is made live, according to the manufacturers recommendation. 5. Sampling Procedure : 5.1. Precautions : Every precaution shall be taken, when sampling not to contaminate or moisten the liquid dielectric. Outdoor sampling of dielectric liquids in rain, fog or high wind is only permitted if all the precautions have been taken to avoid pollution of the liquid. In this special case, the use of a cover is necessary. Condensation should be avoided by warming the sampling equipment so as to be above the ambient air temperature. Before use, the equipment should be rinsed with the liquid being sampled. During all these operations, every care should be taken to avoid contaminating the liquid dielectric. The operator shall be warned not to permit his hands to come in contact with the sample or the internal surface of flasks and of other sampling equipment. The liquid dielectric shall be protected against all kinds of light radiation during transportation and storage. On arrival at the laboratory, the sampling bottle shall not be opened immediately. It is necessary to wait till the temperature of the sample is in equilibrium with the room temperature. 5.2. Sampling from rail tankers and road tank wagons - Dielectric liquids may be sampled either through the sampling valve or by means of the thief dipper or the cream dipper. (a) Sampling through the tank outlet - By this procedure, it is possible to obtain a representative sample from the bottom of the tank. The sample should be drawn after the vehicle has been allowed to stand for at least 1 hour from the time of its arrival. Note - It is also possible, by this procedure, to obtain the equivalent of an average sample, if the sampling is done immediately after the vehicle has arrived. In this case, the sampling procedure shall be as follows : (1) Remove the outlet valve shield, if fitted. (2) Remove all visible dirt and dust from the valve by means of lint-free clean clothes. (3) The outlet system (pump, deliver pipe), if incorporated, shall be started or opened as appropriate in order to get a sample. (4) Allow the oil to trickle slowly through the valve so as to remove the impurities and stagnant oil in the valve and associated pipework. After about 10 litres have b been removed or the oil has run for 4 to 5 minutes, run a quantity of oil into a sample container for rinsing. (5) Rinse the sampling bottles with liquid dielectric. (6) Then fill bottles with sample. (b) Sampling with a thief dipper or a cream dipper - Sampling with a thief dipper or cream dipper should be done only after the tank has been allowed to stand for at lest 1 hour after the vehicle has arrived. Note : It is also possible, by this procedure, to obtain the equivalent of an average sample, if the sampling is done immediately after the vehicle has arrived. Procedure with the thief dipper (bottom samples) For taking bottom samples (that is, within 13 mm from the bottom of the tank) the dipper is lowered till the projecting stem of the valve rod strikes the bottom of the tank. The dipper then fills; filling is complete when its contents poured into a sample container or more usually a glass mixing container for collecting the various samples taken. In the latter case, the total volume collected is distributed among the sample container. Note : The dipper should always be suspended by means of a metal wire or chain, string or other fibrous materials shall not be used. Procedure with the cream dipper (top samples) - With this device, the sampling procedure shall be as follows : With the valve closed, fill the dipper by slowly immersing it in the liquid to be sampled until the rim
WBSEBEA - 126

is just below the surface of the liquid so that it shall flow slowly into the dipper. Discard the first filling. Refill the dipper as above and transfoer the sample to the container by allowing it to flow from the bottom orifice against the side of the container and not in a stream into the bottom of the container. Repeat the operation until sufficient liquid is obtained. 5.3. Sampling from drums - samples should be taken only after the drums have been allowed to stand for at least 8 hours with the bung intact on top. The Pipette or the syphon pressure thief is used. The cream dipper (for taking a sample from the surface layer of the liquid) may also be used. (a) Procedure with a pipette. (1) Block the upper orifice of the pipette with the thumb, and then immerse the pipette in the liquid to the required depth. (2) Remove the thumb to allow liquid to enter the pipette. (3) Again close the upper end of the peyote with the thumb and withdraw the pipette. (4) The first content is used for rinsing, transfer the next filling into either a sampling or a mixing container. If the pipette is immersed right down to the bottom, the sample comes from the level at least 3 mm above the bottom. (b) Procedure with the syphon. (1) Fit the bung carrying the riser and the pressure tubes into the bung hole of the drum and ensuce that this seal is air-tight. (2) Adjust the pressure inside the drum by means of the rubber bulb. (3) Raise the pressure inside the drum by means of the rubber bulb. (4) Run off the sample enough to rinse the tube and then run off the required quantity directly into the sampling or mixing container.
WBSEBEA - 127
ON-LINE RECLAMATION OF TRANSFORMER OIL

ABSTRACT : Mineral insulating oils derived from the petroleum crude is widely used in transformers as a coolant cum dielectric medium. The requirement of this insulating oils is increased over the years due to the steep increase in power production to meet the growing demand. In the recent years, the depletion of petroleum crude all over the world has focused the attention in finding possible methods of conserving this petroleum speciality. Reusing the degraded oil through reclamation techniques was adopted by many utilities. In this paper, different conventional reclamation techniques used are highlighted. The on-line reclamation system developed by CPRI is described in detail and advantages over the conventional batch process are presented. 1.0. INTRODUCTION : The bulk of the oils used in transformers are mineral based oil obtained by refining of petroleum crudes. This oil functions as a di-electric medium as well as a coolant for the transformer windings. In service, the oil deterlorates due to the physical and chemical contraindication occurring in the oil caused by adverse working conditions of thermal and electrical stresses. Presence of oxygen, construction materials like fibres & decomposition products of insulation and oil soluble constituents of impregnating varnishes etc. acts as a catalyst during oil deterioration. Extended life of the e quipment calls for perlodic monitoring of oil quality and necessitates perlodic reconditioning of oil for continued service. /the normal reconditioning techniques removes only insoluble contaminants. moisture and dissolved gases by way of filtration and vacuum drying process [1]. However, this purification process does not remove organic acids and sludge materials that are formed during service. When the properties of the oil in service viz. IFT DDF, acidity, resitivity etc. falls below the permissible limits, they are replaced. Reclamation technique is basically used to remove the insoluble sludge, organic acids and other contaminants in addition to conditioning of the oil, resulting in an oil as good a new oil. The reclaimed oil can be used in the transformer with little addition of antioxidant. 2.0. NEED FOR OIL RECLAMATION : In the developing countries like India, power generation occuples a predominant place in the overall development programme. Presently, the installed capacity of power generation is about 70,000 M.W. It is estimated that the total quantity of mineral insulating oil under use works out to 80 million KL, of which more than 65% is being used in distribution transformers. The worldwide oil crisis & the depletion of petroleum crudes coupled with the increased demand of insulating oil realised the importance and necessity for conservation of this petroleum specially. Reusing of used oil and finding possible routes to increase the service life of the oil becomes imperative in such situations. Reclamation process service as a measure of conserving this petroleum speciality and increase the service life of the oil to the full extent. The problems associated with the disposal of used oil is greatly reduced by reclamation. The studies conducted at CPRI has indicated that when the acidity level reaches a value of 0.2 mg KOH/g of oil, almost all the required properties falls below the permissible limits. The oil is considered to have reached a stage of reclamation when the acidity reaches a value of 0.2 mm KOH/ g of oil. 3.0 TYPES OF RECLAMATION PROCESS : Reclamation process can be broadly classified in to two groups. 1. Mechanical process 2. Adsorption process (a) Contact process (b) Percolation by gravity (c) Percolation by pressure. CPRI has carried out a series of laboratory studies on reclamation of aged oil using the adsorption techniques. The adsorption process consists of making of predetermined quantity of adsorbent material for a specified period at the amilinc temperature of oil. CPRI has also carried out experiment with different types of ad sorbents such as fuller's earth. activated alumina and molecular sleves. The studies have shown that the most economical means of reclamation is by use of Karvi fuller's earth. The fuller's earth is basically a naturally occuring day consisting of aluminosillcates with exides of iron magneshum and calcium. 3.1. Contact process (Batch process) : This method is basically adworption process wherein the aged transformer oil is subjected to continuous contact with korvl earth of 200 mesh size (100 microns) in a reaction vessel. The mixture is stirred continuously for 2 h rs. while the oil temperature is maintained at GSG. The mixture is allowed to settle and the clear supernatent oil is then decanted
WBSEBEA - 128

and filtered through a high vacuum filter (0.5 kpa). Fig.1 shows the flow diagram of reclamation process. In general, the aged oil from different transformers are pooled in a single location and the reclamation is carried out in a centralised location. Presently, the contact process is being practiced by some electricity, boards for reclaiming small quantity of aged oil (2). The quantity of earth material required for treating a given quantity of oil is depends on its initial quality. Experiments conducted at CPRI has revealed that about 250 gms of fuller's earth is required for reclaiming one litre of oil having acidity of 0.5 mg KOH/g. During the adsoption process the natural oxidation inhibitors present in the original oil will be adsorbed by the day material. Thus, the reclaimed oil obtained is more susceptile to oxidation and the rate of oxidation is also higher than that of new oils. In order to improve the oxidation stability. synthetic antioxidant is added to the reclaimed oil at a specified dosage of 0.3% by weight. 3.2. PERCOLATION PROCESS : In principle, this process is similar to the contact process except that the oil to be reclaimed is percolated through a column containing coarse grained fullers earth (30 to 40 mesh) either by gravity or by pressure. The treated oil is filtered under h igh vacumn. The size of the system for reclaiming a given quantity of oil by this process is small compared to the contact process. Hence, this system can be readily u sed for in-situ reclamation. Since the process is continuous in nature, a large bolume of oil can be reclaimed even when the transformer is under energized condition, in a shorter duration. 3.3. ON-LINE MOBILE RECLAMATION SYSTEM : In a vast country like India wherein the transformers are scattered over different regions, the batch reclamation process becomes difficult and expensive as it involves transportation of the oil from long distance. Keeping this in view, CRRI has developed prepare percolation process based reclamation system having 1000 litres capacity for use in distribution transformers. A laboratory pilot scale plant of 100 liters capacity was initially designed and developed by CPRI [B] The results obtained using the plant were quite encouraging and has shown good potential for on-line reclamation. Subsequently the plant was sealed up to 1000 litres capacity to cater to the demands of distribution transformers. The system compulses of mainly fullers earth treatment column. and chamber, inlet & outlet pumps etc. are mounted on a trolley which can be easily taken to the site using any light vehicle. The reclamation process is carried out with the transformer in th e energized condition. Fig.2 shows the schematic layout of the mobile reclamation system. Eventhough the mobile reclamation system is widely practiced in western countries, the availability of such systems in India for commercial use is quite lacking. The literature survey sh own that a commercial mobkle reclamation plant having capacity of 50000 liters per day has been designed by M/s Filterall, U.K. [4]. 3.4. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE INVOLVED IN MOBILE RECLAMATION : The know earth of 30-40 mesh size is dried in a hot air even for 2 hours a t 110 C to remove inherent and substance moisture which accrued during storage and transil. This drying should be done before use. The dried earth is filled in the reaction columns, Perforated steel support plates with 60 mesh filter cloths is suitably provided at top and bottom of the earth columns thereby the possibility of fine earth materials getting enter into the filtration units is eliminated. The columns are pivoted al center so that they can be casily ulted for filling and removal of earth. The air in the filter and degassifeng chamber is evacenated using the vacuum pump. The dead volume in the system (volume of oil pooled in the filters columns and associated pipings during the openational is filled with either new or reclaimed oil in order to avoid decrease in the level of oil in the transformer during the reclamation process. The inlet tubeoil the plant connected to the drain / illuation por of the transformer while the onlet pipe is to the conservation tank. The oil from the transformer is drawn by the gear pump and is pumped through heater tank to the reaction columns in parallel the outlet oil from th e columns is passes through the preliter and line filter and finally enters th e degassing chamber. The oil is then pumped back to the transformer using the outlet pump. This process is continued till the required properties are attained. The number of passes required dependa on the initial quality of the oil. It is learnt that about 5-6 passes are required for an oil of acidity 0.2 mg KOH/g to obtain an oil of acceptable quality. Table 1 & 2 shows the properties of discarded and reclaimed oil obtained using the mobile reclamation plants. Provision has been made in the plant for addition of antioxidant (DBPC) to the oil. The DBPC is dissolved in a sample of oil and poured into the DBPC container incorporated in the system. The hot oil under process is passed through the DBPC container and pumped back to the transformer through filters. It may be noted that columns and degassing chamber are isolated during the DBPC circulation.
WBSEBEA - 129

Table 1. Properties aof discarded and reclaimed oil obtained using 100 liters Capacity pilot plant. Sl. Properties Discarded No. oil 1. Neutralisation Value 0.IG mg KOH/g 2. Interfactial Tension N/M 3. Electric Strength kv 15 4. Moisture content, ppm 5. Resistivity @ 90C 0.80 x E 12. ohm-cum 6. Tan Delta @ 90C 0.20 I 0.098 0.017 40 102 2.0 0.0017 Reclaimed oil after II III IV 0.090 0.051 0.032 0.026 42 40 2.0 0.015 0.027 3525 42 2.2 0.012 0.032 35 2.5 0.008 passes 0.032 0.035 35 4.0
4.0. ECONOMICS OF MOBILE RECLAMATION : The cost of batch process is considerably high compared to mobile reclamation system designed & developed by CPRI. The increased cost of the batch process is due to the requirement of high volume reaction vessel and setting tanks. The space and the process cycle time is also high. The cost of ther 1000 liters capacity plant works out to 8.0 lakhs. The cost of reclamation per liter of oil is worked out in full detail. I. Fixed charges per day 1. Reclamation plant of 1000 liters capacity, consisting 8.00 Lakhs oil filteration unit. Reaction columns. Pumps, Heater unit and trollcy etc. (excluding the cost of LMV). 2. Portable Electric Strength equipment 0.75 3. Oil quality Index left 0.10 4. Baking oven for earth heating 0.40 Total : 9.25 lakhs Interest on fixed change at 18% 1.665 Lakhs Depriciation at 10% 0.925 Total 2.59 lakhs Taking an average of 8 Hrs. / day for 300 days in a year. Fixed charge per day = 225000/300 = Rs.863/II. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Running cost of the plant for 1000 Liters. Cost of 250 Kgs earth @ Rs.3/- kg Power Consumption Labour ch arges Cost of DBPC (2.6 kgs @ 750/- per kg) Wastage of oil @5% (50 Hts. x Rs.7)
750/300/300/1950/350/Total : 3650/Total cost for reclaiming 1000 liters oil (Fixed + Running cost) = Rs. 863 + 3650 = 4513 Cost of reclamation per liter of oil Rs. 4513/1000 = Rs.4.51 The cost of fresh transformer oil is Rs.22/- litre, where as the cost of reclamation is only Rs.4.50 per litre. Hence the process of r eclamation is very attrative. 5.0. ADVANTAGES OF MOBILE RECLAMATION SYSTEM : 1. The reclamation process can be carried out at site with the transformer under equipment condition. 2. The system is compact, simple and can be attached to a light vehicle. 3. Calculation of hot oil through the information formed inside the transformer. This clikinates the requirement of prior cleaning as done in case of new oil fill up.
WBSEBEA - 130

4. The down time is greatly reduced as the process climinates transportion of oil. 5. Wastage of oil is minimum. 6. Bypassing the reaction columns, this systemc can also be used for periodic. reconditioning of oil in service. Hence no separate purification system is required. 7. The cycle time is low & less space is required. 6.0. CONCLUSIONS : The following conclusions are drawn. 1. Since the reclaimed oil meets all the properties of new oil. It can be extensively used in the distribution transormers and switch gears. 2. CPRI has developed a simple and economical process for on0line reclamation of transformer oil. 3. The mobile reclamation system developed at CPRI is novel, compact and first of its kind in the country.' 4. New oil should be prohibited from being used wherever possible. 7.0. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT : Authors are thankful to the authorities of CPRI for according permission to present this paper/. 8. REFERENCES : 1. A guide to transformer maintenance by S.D. Mayers, J. J. Kelly, R.H. Parrish. 2. "Field results and economcs of reclaimed transformer oil". A.V. S. Rao et. al. pressented inthe Workshop on Transformer oil and other related aspects CPRI, 20th Aug. 1988. 3. Transformer oil regeneration by Filterall Transform oil Treatment Plant Manufacturers information catalogue. Filterall (UK. Ltd. PO. Box 29. Daventry, Northants, NN 11 5 (AQ. 4. Reclamation of transformer oil at site, Seminar organised by CPRI, Jan 31, 1994. Heat at 110o0 For 4 hrs.
Earth
Mix with discaded oil at 60o for 2 hrs.
v
Allow to stand for 16 hrs at ambient
v
Decant and filter under vacuum 0.5 kPa and filter porosity 5-15 um
v
Reclaimed oil
v
Add 0.3% by wt. DBPC
v
Oil ready for use
WBSEBEA - 131
DBPC ANTIOXIDANT FOR RECLAIMED

TRANSFORMER OIL
CENTRAL POWER RESEARCH INSTITUTE, BANGALORE
SYNOPSIS
Mineral insulating oils used in transformers deterioprate in service due to oxidation. Proper equipment design, such as inclusion of conservator, breather, etc., and production of properly refined oils have to some extent helped in prolonging the life of these oils. Despite these measures, insulating oils deteriorate with time leading to the formation of sludge and acides which prevent the officient performance of the equii=pments in which these are used. When sludge and acid contents exceed certain limits, and the oil becomes unfit for further use, reclamation is resorted to. The reclaimed oil has however poor oxidation stability characteristics. For effecting improvement in oxidation stability characteristics, anti-oxidants have been developed. 2,6 ditertiary butyl para cresol (DBPC) is one among them. This paper covers the investigations carried out at CPRI regarding the indigenous DBPC antioxidant for use in reclaimed transformer oil and analyses the influence of this product on the xodation stability characteristics of the oil. INTRODUCTION : Ever since the introduction of mineral oil as an insulating medium in transformers, efforts have been continuously made to prevent its deterioration so as to improve the service life of the oil as well as that of the quipment in which it is used. Mineral insulating oils, consisting essentially of hydrocarbons, react with available oxygen, normally atmospheric, to give rise to acids and sludge. This reaction, a chemical one, is enhanced at elevated temperatures and catalysed by the presence of certain metals, particularly copper. The deterioration products viz. acids and sludge beyond certain limits render the oil unfit for further use. At this stage the oil is normally discarded or reclamation is resorted to for its r e-used. It is observed that oil obtained after reclamation by chemical or absorption process has all the characteristics required of a new oil except the right amount of stability against oxidation This is attributed to the fact that the natural antioxidants inherent in new oil are used up during the service life of the oil and are removed during the reclamation. The characteristic could be improved by adding a compon ent to the oil which would increase its oxidation stability without harming any of its other properties. DBPC possesses the desired characteristics of suitable antixodant. PROCESS OF OXIDATION AND ANTIOXDIANTS : Osidation of mineral oils is a consequence of the reaction between the hydrocarbons of the oil and oxygen. It begins with the formation of free radicals in the presence of heat, light, metal or by reaction with oxygen : RH - R* (1) After the initiation step, two propagation steps may occur : R* + O2 - RO2* -(2) and RO2* + RH - RO2H + R* (3) Reaction (2) is generally very rapid, having an activation energy E of about zero value. Reaction (3) is less rapid and possesses a value of E in the vicinity of 7 kcal / mole. After the propagation steps, three types of termination steps can ensue. These are :2R* Products (4) RO2* + R* - Products (5) 2RO2* Products + O2 (6) These termination reactions are generally very rapid and possess values of E of about 3 kcal / mole. However, in the presence of Oxygen (greater than 100mm), steps (4) and (5) may be neglected. Thus, termination s tep (6) is the most important termination process during oxidation. Copper is the most active oxidation catalyst of hydrocarbons. Its catalytic effect is determined by the formation of free radicals : RO2H + Cu++ - RO2* + H+ + Cu+ (7) RO*2 + RH - RO2H + R* (8)
WBSEBEA - 132

The rate of oxidation of hydrocarbons is mainly determined by the concentration of the peroxy radicals RO2*. This concentration depends on the ratio of the rate of formation to the rate of annihilation of free radicals. Thus in order to control the oxidation process, the amount of peroxy radicals must be decreased. This is the principle of this action of various additives AH which on the whole lead to a retardation of the oxidation : RO2* + AH - RO2H + A* (9) A* + RO2* - Products (10) 2A* - Products (11) The predominant termination steps will be either (10) or (11). A large number of such additives are now available commercially and these are termed "Antioxidants" or "Oxidation Inhibitors". These when adaed in small quantities (ranging from 0.1 to 0.5%) to petroleum oils successfully arrest the oxidation reactions. An oil containing these additives is said to be "Inhibited". The chemical structure of DBPC and the reactions by which it inhibit oxidation of hydrocarbons are depicted in Fig.1. OH
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 C C CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
CH 3
OH H3C RO 2 + H 3 C H3C C C CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
CH 3
O
H3C RO 2 H + H 3 C H3C
+
CH 3 C C CH 3 CH 3
CH 3
WBSEBEA - 133

OH3C H3C H3C C C CH 3 CH 3 +RO+ 2 CH 3 H 3C H 3C H 3C C C OCH 3 CH 3 CH 3
CH 3
CH 3
One Module of DBPC reacts With Two Free Radicals
MIXING OF TRANSFORMER OIL

J. R. Nanda Non-member Assistant Director and K. r. Krishnaswami Non-member Estra Assistant Director
Power Research Institute, Central Water and Power Commission (Power Wing). Mixing of different brands of transformer oils has always posed a problem to the maintenance engineers. In india, where bulk of the oils are imported from various sources, shortages of one brand of oil and the need to top up he oil - filled equipment are the usual causes which necessitate such mixing. Experimental work has been carried out by the authors an different types of oils having varied composition with thd without additives. Various properties of oils and their mixtures are discussed. Results obtained on accelerated life tests on oils and their mixtures alone and in contact with transformer constructional materials are presented. It is concluded that new oils without any additives. i.e. un inlibited oils, can be mixed with each other irrespective of their composition and degree of refinement. With inhibited oils, the compatibility of the additives must be evaluated prior to mixing. 1. Introduction : During recent years, the question of mixing of different types of transformer oils has gained considerable importance and doubts are often expressed as to whether the mixed oil would be abail to give satisfactory performance during its service life. The State Electricity Boards and various electricity supply undertakings who form the main consumers of transformer ils have normally to fulfill their requirements by purchasing oil from different sources, and therefore mixing of different oils is a problem for a maintenance engineer, who has to top up a transformer with oil of a different brand when the brand of oil he uses is in short supply. This very often occurs since the bulk of insulating oil is imported from various sources. The IS : 335 (1963) (Specification for insulating oil for Transformers and switchery)1 lays down in its caluse 3.3. "Unused oils considered to be compatible with one another and can be mixed in any proportion. This provision does not, however supply to inhibited oils". Ths trend, these days, is to add antioxidations or inhibitors to the oil for prolongine its service life. Every oil supplier usually develops his own inh ibitors and the formulation of these is a carefully guarded secret. The question then arises whether oils containing various inhibitors of unknown composition can be mixed without any serious damage. The paper reports the results of the experimental work conducted on this subject.
WBSEBEA - 134

2. TRANSFORMER OIL. Transformer oil is essential a derivative of crude petroleum (Petra-rock, Oleum -oil) from which it is obtained by various processes of refining. The nature and characteristics of an oil depend largely on the parent crude from which it is derived and the extent of refining which is has undergone. The crudes are of different varieties and complexity, but it is possible to classify them broadly in our categories namely. (i) Parallinic (ii) Naphthenic (iii) Olefenic (iv) Aromatic While these are the four main simple groups, the constitution of transformer oil is often more complex with different proportions of components belonging to more than one - category. However, irrespectie of the nature of the crude and the refining methos, the final product is essentially a mixture of hydrocarbons. These hydrocarbons are inert and do not react with each other, the oil being merely a physical mixture. During service, the deterioration of the oil is due to the oxidation of thse hydrocabons in which each hydrocarbon as a separate entity undergoes a definite set of reactions. The overall oxidation characteristics of the oil is thus the combined result of the various reactions and this is normally assccssed in practice by means of standard oxidation stability test... The IS : 335 (1963) oxidation stability test prescribes that 100 gm. of the oil he oxidized contiously at 150oC in the presence of a sheet of supper metal................. an at the rate of 2 litres ......... is troubted through the oil. After this period, the ......... and acide formed are determined by chemical analysis. The limits fixed for the acceptance of new oils are : (i) Sludge ... 1.2% (maximum) (ii) Acidity ... 2.5 (maximum) (iii) ..... mg . of KOH per gm. It has been observed that oils conforming to these alues have given trouble-free service for a long time. In evaluating oils for their compatibility during fixing, this oxidation test has been taken as the main riteration indicating the service life of the oil. Another standard oxidation test utilized for the experimental work is the ASTM-D 1934/62T2 (method or oxidative ageing of electrical insulating petroleum .... by open-breaker method). This method briefly consisists in ageing 300 ml. of the oil in a 400 ml. open caker at 115oC. with 15 cm2 surface area of metal ..... for a period of 96 hr. Thereafter, relevant .... ropertics of the oil before and after ageing are compared. A feature of this test is that by replacing the metal ....... by various materials, the catalytic activity of .... same during oxidation can be determined. The main objects of the experimental work are as follows. (i) To determine the composition of oils and their mixtures. (ii) To compare various physical, chemical and electrical properties of the oils and their mixtures. (iii) To study the ageing characteristics of inhibited and uninhibited oils and ascertain their comparatibility. (iv) To determine the rate of deteioration of oils and ... their mixtures. (v) To study the effect of transformer constructional .. materials, viz, metals and insulating materials .... on the deterioration of oils and their mixtures. The selected oil samples termed A., B, C, D and E were mixed in equal proportions with each other resulting in the formation of ten sample mixtures, viz AB, AC, AD, AE, BC, BD, BE, CD, CE and DE. The composition of the oils and their mixtures was determined by using the analysia described by Correlisen and Waterman 3,4. The results of this analysis are given in Table 1. The five
WBSEBEA - 135
TABLE -1 Composition of oil samples and their mixtures

Property OilA OilB OilC OilD OilE OilA OilA OilA OilA OilB + + + + + OilB Oil C OilD OilER OilC Carbon aromatic% 5 7 -14 8 6 2 10 6 3 8 Carbon naphthenic% 56 46 45 40 48 51 45 46 52 49 Carbon parafinic % 39 47 55 46 44 43 53 44 42 48 Average molccular 255 263 310 283 279 259 300 278 265 305 TABLE - 2 Properties of Oils and oil-mixtures Property Oil A oil B oil C Oil D Oil E Oil A + Oil B 0.8807 29.36 1.4897 - 51 147 30.0 0.004 0,.10 passes test With stands Oil A + Oil C 0.8782 33.15 1.4796 - 48 147 30.0 0.004 0.10 passes test With stands Oil A + Oil D 0.8896 33.85 1.4885 - 48 144 28.0 0.008 0.12 passes test With stands Oil A + Oil B 0.8887 32.11 1.4862 - 45 156 37.0 0.00 0.08 passes test With stands OilB OilB OilC OilC OilD + + + + + OilD OilE OilD OilE OilE 7 5 4 12 41 48 42 47 42 51 45 52 49 42 265 270 294 292 281
.. nsity gm. per cm.2 at 20oC cosity, centistokes, at 35oC fractive index ur point, oC sh point, oC crfncial tensions, dyne per cm. utralization number ng. of KOH per gm. onification value, mg per strip corrosion test tric strength (40 kv er min.)
0.8823 29.58 1.4806 - 51 147 35.2 0.00 0.06 passes test With stands
0.8954 32.84 1.4913 - 40 162 45 .0 0.00 0.05 passes test With stands
WBSEBEA - 136
Approximate requirement of major materials for R.E. works (upto 11 K.V.Line)

Sl. No. 1 1. Description of materials 2 ACSR 50 mm2 3-wire Requirement per unit work 3 for drawing of 1Km 11 K.V.. 3-phse/O.H. lines - 3Km. + 3% i) For drawing at 1 Km. of 11 KV. 3-phase O.H.line : 3 Km. + 3% For drawing 1 Km. of 11 KV 1-0phase/of O.H. line : -2Km. + 3% For drawing 1 Km. of 3 phase/L.T.O.H. line for Stw-4 Km. +3% For drawing of 1 Km. 3-phase/L.T. O.H. line using PMEN System,4 Km,+3% For drwing 1 Km. 3-phase / L.T.O.H. line using PMEN System 4 Km + 3% For drawing 1 Km. of single ghase / L.t.O.H. line with PMEN System2Km. + 3% 2.5 Kg. per single PCC pole on 11 KV. O.H. line 4.5 Kg. per PCC D.P. structure - do Remakrs 4 3% allowance to cover sag, wastage
2.
ACSR 30 mm2
- 3 wire - do-
2 wire
ii)
4 wire
iii)
- do -
3.
AAC 50 mm2
4-wire
i)
4.
AAC 25 mm2
4-wire
i)
2 wire
ii)
- do -
5.
Barbed wire
i) ii)
on 11 KV. line barbed wire may be fixed on compounnd structure supports at all road crossing & the supports inside the village locality as per I.E. Rules. 3% allowance to cover wastage
6.
G.I. Stay wire (7/3. 15mm) per stay set
i)
9 meter to 11 meter +3% for ordinary stay with guy insulator with PCC Pole support. 12 meter + 3% for Y-stay with guy insulator with PCC Pole support.
ii)
- do -
WBSEBEA - 137
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Sl.No. Description of materials 1 2 7. G.I. Wire 5 mm (6SWG) i) ii) iii) Requirement per unit work 3 12 meter + 3%-per PCC Pole earthing 25 meter + 3% per PCC D.P. earthing 75 meter + 3% per PCC Sub-Station D.P. Earthing with PMEN system Remakrs 4 3% extra to cover wastage - do - do -
iv) 4 x Crossing span length +3% for craddle guard with 4-wire. v) 2x Crossing span length +2% for crodle guard with 2 wires. 3-meter/safety device +3% for 3-phase L.T. line 15 meter/safety device +3% for 1 phase L.T.line
- do -
- do -
8.
G.I. Wire 4 mm (8SWG)
i) ii) iii)
- do - do -
2.8 m/lacing X No. of lacing +3% for craddle guard - do As per drawing No. (SE/PCC/16) 4.12 meter + 3% for transformer platform (63KVA) as per drawing No.RE/SS/44 1.38m to 3.38m +3% for extension channel cum top adopter at road crossing As per drawing No. (RE/PCC/16) 0.35m + 3% - for top channel of single PCC Pole for 11 KV line (substitude of tapadopter) 3% allowance to cover wastage and scrap. - do -
9. M.S. Channel 100 x 50 mm
i)
ii)
iii)
- do -
10. M.S. Channel 75 x 40
i)
4.12 meter + 3% for transformer plat form (25KVA) As per - do drawing No. RE/SS/44 4.12m + 3% for PCC sub station D.P. top channel 2 (drawing no. RE/SS/44) 2 meter +3% for transformer support, isolator rod & handle support. As per drawing No. RE/SS/44.
ii) iii)
- do -
iv) 4.12 meter + 3% for isolator support. As per drawing No. RE/SS/44.
- do -
WBSEBEA - 138
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Sl.No. Description of materials 1 2 v) Requirement per unit work 3 2.35 metre + 3%for each craddlle guard backet. As per drawing No. (RE/PCC/16) vi) 1.35 metre +3%for bottom channel of single PCC Poles for 11 KV line (Substitute of 'V' bracket) As per drawing no. RE/LF/51. i) 4.12 metre +3% for main switch support. As per drawing No. RE/SS/44 ii) 1 metre to 1.24 metre + 3% for L.T. bracket (Drawing No. RE/LF/50) iii) 3.48 metre +3%for 2 L.t. box bracket. As per drawing No. RE/SS/4 i) 5.4 metre +3%for 2 Nos diagonal bracking of each PCC D.P. As per drawing No. RE/PCC/3A. ii) 3 metre +3%for 2 Nos. horizontal bracing on each PCC, D.P. As per drawing no. RE/PCC/3A. iii) 4.5m + 3%for sub-station fuse support. As per drawing No. RE/SS/44. iv) 8.46m + 3%for tie of L.T. box bracket. As per drawing No. Re/SS/49. i) 0.5 m+3% - for clamp required for fixing of 11 KV top adopter & V bracket on single PCC Pole. 0.1m to 0.9m + 3% for top channel support cum stay clamp required at PCC D.P. Structure (Re/PCC/3A) 0.6m + 3% - for clamp required for cross bracing - do Remakrs 4
11. M.S. Angle 65 x 65 x 6 mm
- do - do -
12. M.S. Angle 50 x 50 x 6 mm
-do -
- do -
13. M.S.Flat 75 x 8mm
3% allowance to cover wastage & scrap.
14. M.S. Flat 65 x 6 mm
i)
- do -
iii)
WBSEBEA - 139
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. TYPICAL S/C DATA OF 33/11 KV TRANSFORMER STANDARISED BY REC. Transformer Capacity kva 630 1600 3150 5000 S/S Capacity 2 x 630 kva 2 x 1600 kva 2 x 3150 kva 2 x 5000 kva % Impedence % of full load 33kv (short circuited) 75 6 54 54 Fault level 25 mva 53 mva 90 mva 143 mva Current 11 kv (short circuited) 25 21 18 18
5 6 7 7
(Considering % Imp) 5% 6% 7% 7%
Insulation resistance limit value (with 1000 volts mgger) Rated voltage of winding 33kv 33 kv Minimum safe insulation resistance in megohms at temperature (oC) 30o 500 400 40o 250 200 50o 125 100 60o 65 50
33/11 kv. transformer with TC fuse rating Cpacity kva 5000 3150 1600 630 Size of T.C. Fuse wire 33kv 11kv mm (SWG) mm (SWG) 1.80 (15) 1.25 (18) 0.80 (21) 0.63 (23) 0.90 (20)
Bushing insulator test, as IS : 2099-1973 Nominal Rated Visible Arrest System voltage discharge voltage voltage of bushing voltage rating kv (RMS) 11 33 12 36 9 27 9 30 one minute Wet & dry test Maxm 100% 1.2/50 sparkover voltage 32.5 108.0 Lightening impulse with standard tegt (implse voltage)
35 75
75 170
WBSEBEA - 140
CORROSION IN SOIL Range of sril resistivity (Ohm-metre) 0-25 25-50 50-100 above 100 class Severely corrosive Moderately corrosive Mildly corrosive Very mildly corrosive
Recommended steel conductor size (mm of steel flat) Transformer Order of Capacity (kva) fault current (Amp) Soil resistivity more than 100 - m welded joints 2 x 630 2 x 1600 2 x 3150 2 x 5000 1300 2800 4800 7500 10 x 6 20 x 6 30 x 6 50 x 6 bolted joints 10 x 6 20 x 6 30 x 6 40 x 6 Soil resistivity (25-100) - m Soil resistivity less than 25 ( -m) or soil has been treated welded bolted joints joints 10 x 6 20 x 6 30 x 6 50 x 6 10 x 6 20 x 6 40 x 6 60 x 6
welded bolted joints joints 10 x 6 20 x 6 30 x 6 40 x 6 10 x 6 20 x 6 40 x 6 50 x 6
Soil resistivity ( - m) 25
Transformer No. of earth electrode Value of earthing Capacity (kva) recommended resistance 2 x 630 2 x 1600 2 x 3150 2 x 5000 2 x 630 2 x 1600 2 x 3150 2 x 5000 2 x 630 2 x 1600 2 x 3150 2 x 5000 6 6 10 15 12 13 12 15 15 15 15 15 1.77 1.77 1.24 0.76 1.97 1. 97 1.97 1.52 1.82 1.82 1.82 1.82
Remarks
50
100
Treatment of soil to be done to bring down soil resistivity to 60 - m
WBSEBEA - 141
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. H. T. LINES Tree Clearance to be generally adopted Voltage of line i) low/ medium voltage 240v to 415 v. ii) 11 kv normal lines Tree clearance required Clerance of 3' (0.914m) should be cut Relexation Nil
All growth within 4.572m (15ft) on either side from centre line of support and all trees which may fall and foul the line All growth within 6.096 m (20 ft) from the centre line of support and all trees which may fall & foul the line. All trees with 40' (12.19m) on either side should be cut.
In case of betel leaf garden all growth with in 3.048 m (10 ft) on either side of line. nil
iii) 11/33 kv (trunk) lines
iv) For EHT Lines
Regulation of electrical crosing of railway track 1987, (ministry of railway)
VERTICAL CLEARANCE OVER RAILWAY TRACK
Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Voltages Upto & including 11 kv Above 11 kv & upto 66 kv. Above 66 kv & upto 132 kv Above 132 kv & upto 220 kv Above 220 m & upto 400 kv.
Board metre & narrow guage Normally by cable 14.10 mtrs 14.60 mtrs 15.40 mtrs 17.90 mtrs.
Minm clearance while working on a railway crane under overhead lines. Normal system voltage Minm safe clearance (in meters) 33 kv 1.50 66 kv 2.00 110 kv 2.25 132 kv 2.50 220 kv 3.50 400 kv 6.,00 Minimum clearance should be maintained above 2.00 mtrs.
WBSEBEA - 142
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Relaxsation by the electrical Inspector (under clause 18...... ] Voltage a) Upto & including 33 kv b) Above 33 kv & upto 66 kv. c) Above 66 kv & upto 110 kv. d) For 110 kv & 132 kv e) For 220 kv f) For 400 kv Broad, meter & narrow gauge (in meter) 4.44 4.44 4.75 5.05 6.58 9.71
Clearance between Gaurd wire & live crossing conductor > 1.5 mtrs. Angle of crosing < 30o Earthing Earth resistance of the crossing line structure < 10 Cable crossing Cable crossing for 25 kv 1Ac. traction should be at last 5 mtrs. away from traction s/s or switching s/s. Type of cable It should be armoured & sheathed type where cable are suspended from supports & not laid in a protective pipe. Pipe shall be laid at not less than one metre below the formation level. Clearance for bare conductor & live parts of any apparatus in outdoor sub-station encluding over head lines of HV/EHV installation. Voltage Not exceeding 11 kv Not exceeding 33 kv Not Exceeding 66 kv Not Exceeding 132 kv Not Exceeding 220 kv Not exceeding 400 kv Ground Clearance (in mtrs) 2.75 3.7 4.0 4.6 5.5 8.0 Sectional clearance (in mtrs) 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.5 4.3 6.5
Clearance required for sub-station Clearance of bus/conductor in a s/s System Voltage (kv) 33 66 132 220 400 Clearance (mtrs) (a) 1.5 2.0 2.7 4.5 7.0 (b) 1.5 1.8 2.5 4.0 6.5 Sectional clearance (in mtrs) 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5/5.0 6.5
b a a b
WBSEBEA - 143
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Relative Dielecetric strength Name of Gas Strength relative to air Air 1 Hydrogen 0.6 Nitrogen Sulfer hexaflouride Freon (CCL2F2) 1.0 2.5 2.5
GAP SETTINGS
System Voltage Gap on transformer bushing inches (MM) 45 (1145) 25 (635) 15.5 (395) No gaps Gap on terminal tower inches (MM) 44 (1120) 23.5 (600) 13 (330) No gaps Gap on next three approach towers inches (MM) 44 (1120)' 24.5 (625) 24.5 (355) No gaps
KV RMS 220 110 66 33 and below
STANDARD MINIMUM CLEARANCE : OUT DOOR Voltage KV For equipments and Phase to earth rigid conductor in air Phase to Phase inches (mm) inches (mm) 132 (3350) 66 (1675) 48 (1220) 36 (915) 24 (610) 18 (460) 15 (380) 66 (1675) 40 (1015) 30 (760) 24 (610) 18 ( 460) 12 (305) 12 (305) Phase to phase spacing in isolator and switches inches (mm) 132 (3350) 84 (2135) 60 (1525) 30 (760) 30 (760) 24 (610) Switches with arcing hovns inches (mm) 156 (3960) 120 (3050) 84 (2135) 48 (1220) 42 (1070) 36 (915)
220 110 66 33 22 11 04
Indoor clearance for enclosed busbars and connections in air where the space between conductors is not filled with any insulating medium like compound etc.
Rated Voltage KV 33 22 11
Minimum clearance in inches (mm) Between Phase Phase to earth 14 (355) 9.5 (240) 7 (180) 8.75 (335) 5.50 (140) 4.50 (115)
WBSEBEA - 144
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 1. Clearances along / across the road and cross country (Refer I.E. Rule No. 77) Clearance other than along with road or across the road Voltage 1. Low medium voltage 2. High voltage upto 11 KV 3. High voltage above 11 KV upto 33 KV Across the road 19 ft (5.791 m) 20 ft. (6.096 m) 20 ft (6.096m) Along the road 18 ft (5.486 m) 19 ft. (5.791.m) 19 ft (5.791m) If bare Conductor 15 ft (4.572) 15 ft 4.572 m) 15 ft (5.182 m) If insulated Conductor 13 ft (3.963) 13 ft (93.963) 13 ft
MINIMUM ELECTRICAL CLEARANCE FOR OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR (Ref : Is : 10118 (part 111)- 1982 clause 2.1.9.) voltage Rating (Highest System Voltage) lmpuise withstand Level* minimum Clearance to Earth+ minimum Clearance Between phases minimum clearance from any point where the man may be Required to stand to the Nearest Unscreened Conductor in Air (Sectional Clearance) (5) mm 2600 2600 2750 3000 3500 3500 4000 3500 4000 4000 4000 4500 4500 5000
(1) kV (rms) 12 36 725 123 145
(2) kV (peak) 60 75 145 170 325 450 550 450 550 650 650 750 850 950 1050 (List1) (Lisr11) (List1) (List11)
(3) mm 90 120 320 630 900 1100 900 1100 1300 1300 1500 1600 1900 2400
(4) mm 90 120 270 320 630 900 1100 900 1100 1300 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
245
The impulse withstand levels are as given in IS : 2165-1977 Insulation coordination (second revision). For guidance regarding choice between list 1 and List II (as in col 2) for rated voltages 12 KV and 36 kV and between levels against higher rated voltage, see IS : 2164-1977. The values of minimum clearance to earth are based on Table 6A of IS : 3716-1978 Application guide for insulation coordination.
WBSEBEA - 145
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. CLEARANCES OPEN TYPE OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR AND BUSBAR CONNECTIONS : Rated KV Not exceeding 6.6 11 22 33 66 110 132 220 Min. Clearance to earth in air inches (mm) 5.5 (140) 7 (180) 11 (280) 15 (380) 27 (685) 34 (865) 43 (1070) 70 (1780) Min clearance between phase in air inches (mm) 7 (180) 9 (230) 13 (330) 17 (430) 31 (790) 39 (990) 48 (1220) 81 (2060) Safely sectional clearance inches (mm) 120 (3050) 120 (3050 108 (2745) 109 (2770) 120 (3050) 132 (3350) 138 (3505) 168 (4280)
BUS BAR CLEARANCE IN MM IN OIL OR COMPOUND Rated Voltage between phases or poles kv upto 0.6 3.3. 6.6 11 22 33 Min. clearance to earth inches (mm) 0.5 (12) 0.5 (12) 0.75 (20) 1.0 (25) 1.75 (45) 2.50 (65) Min. clearance between phase inches (mm) 0.5 (12) 0.75 (20) 1.0 (25) 1.5 (40) 2.5 (65) 3.5 (90)
CLEARANCE (IN MM) IN AIR INDOOR SWITCHGEAR Min. length of insulator inches (mm) 3/4 (20) 3/4 (20) 2 (50) 3.5 (90) 5 (125) 6 (150) 8 (200) 12 (305) Min. clearance to earth inches (mm) 5/8 (16) 3/4 (20) 2 (50) 2.5 (65) 3 (75) 4 (100) 5.5 (140) 8.75 (220) Min. clearance between conductors inches (mm) 3/4 (20) 3/4 (20) 2 (50) 2.5 (90) 5 (125) 6.5 (165) 9.5 (240) 14.0 (350)
Rated Voltage KV Upto 0.415 0.6 3.3 6.6. 11 15 22 33
WBSEBEA - 146
PHASES OR BETWEEN CONNECTIONS OF SAME PHASES SEPARABLE ELECTRICALLY FROM EACH OTHER PHASE AND EARTH CLEARANCES IN CABLE BOXES Min. length of to earth inches (mm) 2 (50) 3 (75) Min. clearance to earth inches (mm) 5 (125) 6.5 (165) Min. clearance between conductors inches (mm) 2 (50) 4 (100)
Rated Voltage between phases Upto and including 11 KV Above 11 kv and upto and Including 22 KV Above 22 KV and upto and including 33 KV
4 (100)
8 (200)
5 (125)
Note : (i)
For extra high voltage lines, the clearance above ground shall not be less than 17' (5.182 metres) plus 1 (0.30 metres) for every 33000 volts or part there of by which the voltage of the line exceeds 33 000 volts. (ii) The minimum clearance along or across any treet shall not be less than 20 (6.096 metres)
2. Clearance from building (Refer I.E. Rule No. 79) Voltage 1. Low medium voltage and service line 2. (a) For high voltage lines upto and including 11000 volts (b) For high voltage lines above 11000 V upto and including 33000 volts 3. For extra high voltage line (for every additional 33000 volts or part thereof) Vemrtical Clearance 8' (2.439 m) 12' (3.658 m) 12' (3.658 m) Horizontal Clearance 4' (1.218 m) 4' (1.219 m) 6' (1.829 m)
1' (0.305)
1 (0305)
3. Clearance between lines of different voltages on same or independent supports (i) Between 66, 33, 22, 11 KV LT. OR Telephone lines and 66 KV lines 8' (2.439 m) (ii) Between 1 , 10, 66, 33, 22, 11 KV LT OR Telephone lines and 110 KV lines 9' (2.744 m) (iii) Between all lines upto 230 KV or Telephone lines and 230 KV lines 15' (4.572 m) 4. Clearance over the river : Minimum 10' (3.048 metres) over highest flood level for rivers which are not navigable. For navigable rivers, clearance to be fixed in relation to the tallest mas. in consultation with the concerned navigation authorities. 5. Tree clearance : (i) For E.H.V.T. Lines all tall trees with 40 (12.19 metre) on either side of the line and all trees which are falling or would fall, to be cut. (ii) All bush growth 20' (6.096 metres) on either side to be completely cleared. Grafted fruit tress which will not grow tall may be left out. (iii) All branches or levels which are with 3 (0.914 mitres) from the conductors, neutral and earthwires in case of L.T. Line should be cut.
WBSEBEA - 147
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 6. Clearance from supporting structure of another the (i) Low or medium voltage line 4' (1.210 metres) (ii) High voltage lines 6 (1829 metres) (iii) Extra high voltage lines 9' (2.744 metres) CLEARANCE BETWEEN LINES AND GUARD WIRES The verifical clearance between the guard wire and any conductor under maximum sag shall be as under : (i) L. T. Voltage 4' (1.219 metres) (ii) High Voltage upto 33 KV 4' (1.219 metres) Every guard wire shall be securely bound to earth at each point where its electrical continuity is broken. Guard wires shall have an actual breaking load of not less than 1400 lbs. (635 Kgs) and shall be galvanised. The earth should be efficiently maintained and the earth resistance should not exceed 10 Ohms. The sizes of the guard wire to be used for (i) Railway crossing (a) 7/10 SWG for Longitudinal wires (ii) Road crossing / Telephone (b) 6 or 8 SWG for cross lacing. Equivalent Spacing of conductors No.8 SWG wire. Line voltage Single Circuit 33 KV & 22 KV 5' (1530 mm) 11 KV 4' (1220 mm) LT Vertical 10" (260 mm) Horizontal 9" (230 mm)
WBSEBEA - 148
RELAYS
Relay Designation : 2. Time delay starting or closing relay. 3. checking or interlocking relay 21. Distance relay. 25. Sijnehrouising or sychronism check relay. 27. Under voltage relay. 30. Annuration relay. 37. Under current or under power relay. 40. Field failure relay. 46. Reverse phase or phase balma current relay. 49. Machine or transformer thermal relay. 50. Instantanious over current or rate of rise relay. 51. A.C. time over current relay. 52. A. C. circuit breaker. 52a. Ci rcuit breaker auxiliary switch normally open. 52.b. Circuit breaker auxiliary switch normally closed 55. Power Factor relay 56. Field application relay. 59. Over voltage relay 60. Voltage or current balance relay. 64. Earth Fault protective relay. 67. A. C. directional over current relay 68. Blocking relay. 74. Alarm relay. 76. D.C. over current relay. 78. Phase angle measuring or out of step protetive relay.' 79. A. C. reclosing relay. 81. Frequency relay. 83. Automatic selective control or transfer relay. 85. Carrier or pilot wise receive relay. 86. Locking out relay. 87. Differential protective relay.
WBSEBEA - 149
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 'RELAY INDICATION WITH THEIR MEANINGS FOR VARIOUS DISTANCE PROTECTION SCHEME. Relay meaning Relay meaning
ENGLISH ELECTRIC SR 3V 30A 30B 30C 30D 30G phase A involved in earth fault Phase B involved in earth f ault Phase C involved in earth fault s/c to earth Zone I faulty 30H 30 J 86 AX 86 BX Zone II faulty Zone III faulty Distance relay operated CDD/E/F relay in distance scheme operated.
ENGLISH ELECTRIC SSRR 3V A B C AB BC CA Phase A involved in earth fault Phase B involved in earth fault Phase C involved in earth fault Phase AB shorted Phase BC shorted Phase CA Shorted Zone 1 Zone II Zone III 186 A 186 B 86 X I Zone I f aulty Zone II faulty Zone III faulty Breaker lockout Breaker lockout Auxiliary trip relay.
ENGLISH ELECTRIC MM 3V 30A 30B 30C 30AB 30BC 30CA 30G Phase A involved in earth fault Phase B involved in earth f ault Phase C involved in earth fault Phase A&B shorted Phase B&C shorted Phase C&A Shorted Fault in 1st zone 30H 30 J 86 Y 186 A 186 B VARM Fault in 2nd zone Fault in 3rd zone Distance relay operated CB lockout CB lockout Auto reclose operated.
ABB RAZFE RN SN TN 2 V Start indication For 1ph fault RN Start indication For 1ph fault SN Start indication For 1ph fault TN Start indication For 2ph fault (RS ST RT) Start indication for 3ph fault General tripping TK-2 TK-3 P DC Z-I Z - II Operation of step 2 time lay relay Operation of step 3rd time lay relay Power Swing blocking DC Power supply inturruption. Zoen - I Zone - II
ABB RAZOA Trip R S T Tripping occured Start Ph R Start Ph S Start Ph T N 2 3 4 Start Nutral N Step 2 time lag relay operated Step 3 time lag relay operated Step 4 time lay relay operated
WBSEBEA - 150
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. MM3T & OTHER (400 KV) PROT A-B B-C C-A Z-2 Z-3 A-N B-N C-N 85 S 85 X2 86-A 86-B 86-C 97-X 2 98 2A 64 A-B ph fault B-C ph fault C-A ph fault Zone II fault Zone - III fault A Ph earth fault B Ph earth fault C Ph earth fault carrier send operated Carrier receive A Ph trip B Ph trip C Ph trip 64 x Back up E/F trip operated 96TBCYL Remote and tripping when transfer 162 Cricuit breaker pol discripan trip operated 2L Local breaker back up AL Protection operated 186 A Auto reclose lack out 59 X A NZ3 B NZ 3 C No. 3 A-B-Z3F B-C-Z3F C-A-Z-3F 85L0 Over voltage trip A Phase E/F in Zone - III B Phase E/F in Zone - III C Phase E/F in Zone - III Fault beta A & B Ph in Zone-III Fault beta B & C Ph in Zone-III Fault beta C & A Ph in Zone - III Lock out trip retmote end fault.
Main VT fuse failed Zone - II timer operated Regulator protection timer operated Aununciation timer operated Back up E/F trip operated ENGLISH ELECTRIC (GEC - ALSTHOM) DISTANCE SCHEME ' MM3T" For Feeder to 220 KV STPS Feeders 1 & 2 - do - KTPS Feeders 1 & 2 220 KV STPS Feeder 1 & 2 220 KV Howerah Feeders 1 & 2 220 KV Durgapur Feeders 1 & 2 RELAY INDICATION OF "MM3T" (FOR 220 KV LINES)
Installed at S/S Howrah S/Stn. Durgapur S/Stn. STPS
Phase to Earth fault. Zone 1. 2. 3. R-E M2 (A) 186 M2 (A) Z2 (E), 186 S2 (A), Z3 (E), 186 Y-E M2 (B), 186 M2 (B), Z2 (E), 186 S2 (B), Z3 (E), 186 B-E M2 (C), 186 M2 (C), Z2 (E) 186 S2 (C), Z3 (E), 186
Note :M is the measuring relay indication (for zone 1 & 2 there is no indication for starting relay) S2 is the starting and measuring relay for zone 3 and 186 is the tripping relay indication. Phase to Phase Fault Zone 1. 2. 3. R &Y M1 (A-B), 186 M1 (A-B), Z2 (Ph), 186 S1 (A-B), Z3 (Ph), 186 YB M1 (B, C), 186 M1 (B-C) Z2 (Ph), 186 S1 (B-C), Z3 (Ph), 186 BR M1 (CA), 186 M1 (CA) Z2 (Ph), 186 S1 (C-A) Z3 (Ph), 186
WBSEBEA - 151
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. ENGLISH ELECTRIC (GEC - ALSTHOM) DISTANCE SCHEME 'MM3VA' No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Installed at sub-Station Liluah Rishra Durgapur Purulia Sainthia Gokarna Raghunathganj Kasba Joka Salt Lake Ashoknagar Dharampur Haldia Kharagpur Bishnupur For Feeders to Bandel Liluah & Hind Motor - Liluah BTPS 1 & 2, DPL 1 & 2, Bishnupur Sainthia 1 & 2 Santaldih 1 & 2 Gokarna 1 & 2 Sainthia 1 & 2, Raghunathguni, Malda Gokarna Ashoknagar Lakshmikantapur Ashokenagar Dharmpur, Kasba BTPS 1 & 2, Ashoknagar 1 & 2 Kolaghat / KTPS (S/Stn) Feder 1 & 2 DVC Incoming, Egra Durgapur
RELAY INDICATION OF "MM3V DISTANCE SCHEME (FOR 132 KV LINES) I. Phase to Earth Fault : Flag Starting Tripping / Locking (a) R-E 30A Y3AX 186 (b) Y-E 30B Y3BX 186 (c) B-E 30C Y3CX 186 II. Phase to Phase : (a) R-Y (b) Y-B (c) B-R 30 (A-B) 30 (B-C) 30 (C-A) Y3AX, Y3BX Y3BX, Y3CX Y3CX, Y3AX 186 186 186
In all the above cases zone indications will be as below : Zone 1 : 30G
Zone 2 : Zone 3 : Zone 4 : (Non-Dir) 30G, 30H 30G, 30J 2A, 30G, 30J
WBSEBEA - 152
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. SIEMENS DISTANCE SCHEME DISTANCE SCHEME RR3V Sl. No. 1.
2. 3. 4.
Name of Sub-Stn. Kasba

Sonarpur Salt Lakeq Kalyani
Name of feeder Sonarpur 1 & 2

Kasba 1 & 2 Kasba Bandel & Dharampur
5. I.
Malda Earth-fault in Phase R Y B Phase to Phase : R-Y Y-B B-R
Malda (NHPC)
Relay Indications Starting Y3AX Y3BX Y3CX Measuring 30A 30B 30C
II.
Y3AX, Y3BXq Y3BX, Y3CX Y3CX, Y3AX
30 (A-B) 30 (B-C) 30 (C-A)
Zone Indication First Zone 30G Second Zone 30G, 30H Third Zone 30G, 30J Fourth Zone 30G, 30J, 2A.
SIEMENS DISTANCE SCHEME R3Z24

So. No. 1. 2. Name of sub-Station Howrah Liluah Name of 132 KV lines Bandel, Liluah 1 & 2 Behala 1 & 2 Howrah 1 & 2 Hind Motor Rishra Bandel 1 & 2 Bandel 1 & 2, Belmuri 1 & 2 Howrah 1 & 2 Sonarpur 1 & 2 Dharampur 1 & 2 Howrah, Liluah, Rishra 1 & 2 Dharampur 1 & 2 & 3 Kalyani, Durgapur 1 & 2 Adisaptagram 1 & 2
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Rishra Adisaptagram Behala Titagarh Bandel
WBSEBEA - 153
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. REALY TARGETS FOR R3Z24 So. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Note : Type of Fault RE YE BE RY YB BR RYB Over current starting Impedence starting Tripping Ground Fault O/C JR JM RA RF JS JM SB SG JT JM TC TH JR JS RA SB RF SG JS JT SB SG TC TH JR JT RA TC RF TH JR JS JT RA SB TC F SG TH JR' JS' Jt' RA SB TC : for R, Y, B phase RF SG TH : Respectively. JM
Zone Indications in all the above cases will be as follows : 1st Zone : Instantaneous 2nd Zone : 0.5 Sec. 3rd Zone : 1.0 Sec. 4th Zone : 1.5 Sec. 5th Zone : 2.0 Sec. RELAY INDICATIONS Make : Siemens Type : R3Z24 use in 132 KV line Red Yellow Blue Earth fault Starting : JR JS JT JM Fault recording : RA SB TC Final Tripping : RF SG TH Zone selection Timer : 1st Zone : Instantaneous 2nd Zone : 0.5 Sec. 3rd Zone : 1.0 Sec. 4th Zone : 1.5 Sec. 5th Zone : 2.0 Sec.
Directional : Non-Directional :
2. Make : English Electric : T ype : MM3V - used in 132 KV line Red Yellow Blue Starting : Y3 A Y3 B Y3 C Phase - Neutral : 30A 30B 30C Phase-Phase : 30 (A-B) 30 (B-C) 30 (C-A)
WBSEBEA - 154
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Zone Selection : 30G 1st Zone : Instantaneous 30-G, 30-H2nd Zone : 0.5 Sec. 30-G, 30-J 3rd Zone : 1.0 Sec. 30-G, 30-J, 2A timer, 1.5 Sec.
None-Dir
3. Make : English Electric Type : MM3T (YCG) (used in 220 KV line) Red Yellow Blue Phase - Selection : A-N B-N C-N ) Phase Neutral M2 (A) M2 (B) M2 (C) ) (A-B) M1 (A-B) Zone Selection : (B-C) M2 (B-C (C-A) ) Phase-Phase M1 (C-A)
1st Zone - Instantaneous 2nd Zone (Z2) 0.5 Sec. 3rd Zone (Z3 + Z3) 1.0 Sec. Ofset 25% of 3rd Zone Selling.
Back Up Protection : The protection system to suppliment to the main protection in case the latter is ineffective. The Power System generally comprises in distribution of EHV lines, transformers, reactors. The protective schemes are accordingly designed by various companies either electromagnetic or static. EHV Lines For very short lines (less than 3 Kms) Pilot wire Schemes GEC Co's Horn Relays are used. For medium and l ong lines Unit protection based on Phase Comparison (Static Schemes) 400 KV Lines EE Co. P-40 220 KV & below P-10 Distance Schemes generally used for 66 KV to 220 KV in our grid. Electro-magnetic Schemes : G.E.C. Alshtom A.B.B. RR 3V L3 / L6 SSRR3V RY2FB Solid State / Static Schemes : EE. Co. ABB E.R. PYTS RAZOA THR3PE1 Quadra Mho RAZFE THR3PE2 All distance schemes are backed by Over Current & Earth Fault relays. Presently static back up protection with high set are also available. This reduces the size of the relay too. Solid State / Static Distance Schemes generally used for 400 KV Lines in our grid, as Main Protection & Main II protection GEC Alstom ABB MM3T & P 40 RAZEF & RALDA Micro Mho & P-40 REZ & RAZFE
WBSEBEA - 155
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. The distance schemes are used alongwith protection couplers to get carrier aided tripping to avoid delay in tripping. Various types of solid state / Static schemes presently used : MM3T - This scheme is static three step scheme suitable for Phase & Earth Fault protection of high voltage transmission line. It provides high speed clearance of all types of fault and is particularly suitable for use with carrier equipment. The second and third zone time are independently adjustable for Phase and Earth Fault. Micro Mho - This is a microprocessor based (static) distance protection which provides phase and earth fault protection for high voltage and exra high voltage transmission lines. The measurement of fault impedance is done by a comparator. Three phase faults and three earth fault comparators are provided for each zone. Very fast operating speed (10mS) high measuring accuracy very low current and voltage burden built in testing facility and monitoring. P-40-It is a unit protection which makes comparison of phase angle of currents at both ends by modulating high frequency signal transmission over a line. The phase comparison scheme consists of a high lfrequency transmitter receiver for two way communication between two ends of line. Quadre Mho - Microprocessor scheme logic with wide range of built in scheme selected by option swithes : Full 3 zone distance relay with 18 measuring elements. Continuous self monitoring on demand and periodic self testing. TH R3PE1-Relay provides phase and Earth fault coverage from a single common measuring element with two zones of direction protection and a third zone which is provided with shaped offset starting elements. THR4PE2-This relay has got additional measuring element (to THR3PE1) connected to measure in the reverse direction. This gives a fourth zone. This has four zones of phase and Earth Fault protection and two measuring elements. RAZOA - The scheme is static, high speed distance relay which provides complete multizone phase and ground fault protection. The relay has a combined reactance and resistance measurement characteristic (each independent). RAZFE - The operating characteristics of the relay for ground faults has a reactance characteristic and for phase to phase faults Mho characteristic. High speed operation of relay. REZ - This is the line protection terminals which form part of the PYRAMID system. (The PYRAMID system includes complete range of flexible object terminals, functional sub stn., controls & sub-stn. monitoring). The characteristic of the relay is same as RAZFE Each zone has its own setting for resistive and reactive reach and earth fault compensation. EHV Transformers are provided with gas operated protection (Bucholz) Differential / P.R.V./R.E.F./Winding and oil Temperature protection and Over current E/F protection as back up. Incase of EHVT Transformers also electro magnetic & solid state protection are provided. 400 KV Reactor : Reactors are provided with Gas operated (Bucholz) Differential PRV / Winding and oil Temperature protection and distance scheme as back up. Bus bar protection : The B/B protection is provided to clear the bus fault very fast instead of clearing from remote end. Presently the CAG Relay of M/s. GEC Alsthom & RADSS scheme of ABB are used in our grid. Local Breaker Back up : Protection; The LBB protection is provided to clear the stack breaker fault very fast instead of clearing f rom remote end. Presently the CTIG relay of M/s GEC Alsthom & PX19 of M/s ABB are used in our grid.
WBSEBEA - 156
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Differential relay connection diagram
Voltage Tranformer
Fuse Failure Alarm V. T. Fuse
10
TYPICAL EXTERNAL & INTERNAL CONNECTIONS FOR TYPE VAPM 31 (Fuse Failure Relay)
Distribution Transformer
Generator
9 10
Alarm
Trip
SOL SW
Operating Coil
Disc Unit Aux. Unit
Shading Coil
52 T
PR 52 T A 52 I
Protective Relay Contact Circuit Breaker Trip Coil Alarm Device Circuit Breaker Auxilary Contact
Shunt Reinforcing Indicator
TYPICAL EXTERNAL & INTERNAL CONNECTIONS FOR TYPE VDG 14 Generator Stator Earth Fault Relay
WBSEBEA - 157
V. T. Alarm
1 2 3
Trip
4 5 9 10
Aux. Unit
Operating Coil Disc Unit
TYPICAL EXTERNAL & INTERNAL CONNECTION FOR TYPE VDG II

1 2 3 4
T R 1 2
Surge Protector
10
CAG 17 Relay
WBSEBEA - 158
A B C
Alarm Trip CT shorting contact
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 5 6 7 8 9 10
T1
T2 T1 T2 T1 T2
CT CONNECTION
Note: One over current element is shown. Other two over current elements will be similarly connected. Alarm & trip contacts are paralled.
THREE PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH SHUNT

REINFORCING UNIT IN SIZE 3D DOUBLE ENDED VERTICAL CASE
A B C
Alarm Trip CT shorting contact
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
52 T
C R
A Shunt reinforcing indicator 52

52 T
A Shunt seal in indicator
Note: One over current element is shown. Other two over current elements will be similarly connected. Alarm & trip contacts are paralled.
A Seal in indicator
52 T
WBSEBEA - 159
A B C
P1 S1 S2
P2
Relay operates when Current Flows in this direction
V1 V2
9
Current Coil
7
Voltage Coil
V2 V1
10
10
10
DIAGRAM OF CONNECTION FOR TYPE CDD RELAY

(PHASE FAULT RELAY-QUADRATURE CONNECTION)
P1 S1 S2
P2
Relay operates when Current Flows in this direction
V1 V2
V2
V1
Current Coil Voltage Coil
EARTHFAULT CONNECTION (POTENTIAL POLARISATION)
WBSEBEA - 160
T1 T1
V1 V2 V2
T2 T2 T2
T1
Alarm
1 2
Trip
3 4 6 7 8
Cup Unit Current Coil
10
CT Shorting Contracts
ISOL SW Voltage Polarising Coil
Shading Coil Disc Unit
CDD 21 VOLTAGE POLARISED DIRECTIONAL EARTHFAULT RELAY WITH SHUNT REINFORCING UNIT
Initiating contacts
(CTN) APPLICATION DIAGRAM

Reset counter
Power supply to relay Square ware oscillator Binary coded decimal counter Binary coded decimal switches
Comparator
Output appears at the end of sit time delay
Output Element
VOIT
VTT 14 RELAY WITH TIME DELAYED PICKUP
WBSEBEA - 161

Output element Power supply to relay Reset counter
Square ware oscilla tor
Binary coded decimal counter
Comparator
Binary coded decimal switches Time delayed reclosing of O/P contact
Inhibit
oscillator
Output disappears at the end of set time delay
Output Element
VTT 15 RELAY WITH TIME DELAYED DROP OFF
P1
S1 S2
P2 P1
S1 S2
A
P2 P1
S1 S2
B
P2
A5 + A3 A4 D9 D 10
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
DC Supply
To Annunciation
(CTN) APPLICATION DIAGRAM

TA A
A
CA
RS 2 CA 2
9C
13
RT C
R7
VOIT
R S=R 1+R 2 +R 3+R 4 R T=R 5+R 6 +R V2
AB
NEGATIVE SEQUENCR FILTER
WBSEBEA - 162

IA-BRT IA-B IA IA-B ( WC
1
IA-B ( RT
1 WC
=V2
If, (
1 WC
3 2
RS and RT =
Rs 2
Vout = V1 +V2=0
IC
IB
IA-BR' T IO IA-B IA-B( RT - -1

WC
=V2
POSSITIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
VOUT=V1 +V2 = 3 IC-A Rs IB IC IC-A IA-B( -1

WC
VOUT
IC-A R5=V1
NEGETIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

A
P2
S1 S2
P1
Aux. Supply Alarm Trip CT shorting contacts
Induction cup unit CCD
Static timer unit
TYPICAL EXTERNAL & INTERNAL CONNECTIONS FOR TYPE CCUM 21 RELAY
WBSEBEA - 163

Main CTS
R
Generator
9
Main V.T Relay current coil
5 Earth Resistance
10
Relay voltage coil
EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF YCGF
k4
k3 k2
C PoL
k1
Cup Unit
REST
k5
Auto Transformer
PoL
WIRING DIAGRAM OF YCGF

PoL OP Rest Polarising coil Operating coil Restraint coil MHO circle diameter coarse adjustment MHO circle diameter offset adjustment Polarising circuit phase angle timmer MHO circle diameter fine adjustment
k5 k3 & k4 k2 k1
WBSEBEA - 164
Restrain
ad Lo . P.F ing gg La
UPF Load
-R
Operate
d oa .L P.F ing ad Le
-X
YCGF CHARACTERISTICS WITHOUT OFFSET & RESTRAIN FEATURES
WBSEBEA - 165

Trip Relay Trip Coil
11
A CB Aux Switches
Trip Supply
+
18
10
Trip Supply
Alarm Contract
SUPERVISION CIRCUIT WITH TYPE VAX 21
Trip Relay
12 9 11
Trip Coil
A B
10
Trip Supply
A-1 B-1
CB Aux Switches
17
Alarm Supply
1 2 3 4 5 6
Alarm Contract
SUPERVISION CIRCUITS WITH TYPE VAX 31
WBSEBEA - 166

P1 S1 S2 P2 Load Current
V1
Busbar
V2
A
V.T
O/C O/C
O/C
V1
V
Vn
10
LOAD TEST ON DIRECTIONAL EARTHFAULT RELAY
P1 S1 S2
P2 Load Current
V1
Busbar
Vn
Vn
O/C O/C O/C
V2 V1
10
LOAD TEST ON DIRECTIONAL E/F RELAY - ALTERNATIVE METHOD
WBSEBEA - 167
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Relay Type SKD & SKE VARM III VAPM 31 MVAPM32 VDG14 VDG 11 CTIG CAA , VAA CAF, VAF CAG, VAG VAM VAJ13 VAJS13 VAJH 13 CDG 13 CDG12 CDG 13 COG 14 CDG11 CAG 13 CDG 21 CDG31 CDG51 CDG61 VAX VAX21 VAX31 VAJH13 VAJS13 VAJHM13 CDD CDD21 CDD23 CDD24 VTT 11 VTT 14 VTT 12 VTT 15 CDV 22 CDV 62 CTN CTNM31 Function Check sychronising relays Static autoreclose relays Fuse Failure Relay Voltage balance relay for Generator VT Supervision Inverse Time voltage nutral displacement relay Inverse Time over voltage relay Circuit breaker fail protection Auxiliary relay Indicating relay Measurement relay Semaphore Indicator Very high speed Tripping Relay Self reset tripping relay Hand reset tripping relay nondirection inverse time O/C relay with a definite minimum time Long time delay O/C relay very inverse time o/c relay extrelmly inverse time o/c relay. Self powerd inverse time o/c & E/F relay high set instaintanious o/c & E/F unit (for s/c) Singh pole type CDG 11 with high set instantanious tripple unit with 3 o/c unit or 2 o/c & E/F tipple pole unit type CDG31 with high set instanious unit on two outer elements. Tripple pole unit type CGD21 Trip circuits upervision relay monitor trip circuits only when CB is closed (after closing supervision) monitor trip circuits continiously (both preclosing & after closing supervision) High speed tripping relay. High Speed tripping relay with self reset contracts High speed tripping relay with hand resetcontact Direction inverse time o/c & E/F relay Directional version of CDG11 (inverse) Directional version of CDG13 (very inverse) .... CDG14 (etremely inverse) - Time delay relay
Time delayed drop oft. Voltage controlled over current relay both for fault & o/c for alternator. Negative ph sequence relay (for generals protoction) Rarriation in test point only.
WBSEBEA - 168
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. VDG 11 VDG14 VDG13 VTIG 12 VTIG M12 VTU 21 VTUM21 VAR41B CCUM, YCGF CAA VAA CAF VAF inverse time over voltage protoction of A.C. circuits, static capacitors, & m/c such as generator & synchronous motors. intomtanious operation in over voltage or unde voltage. definite time operation, with adjustable time (independent of input voltage). Auto reclosing relay Definite time reverse power relay. Field failure relay Attracted armeture relay for current operation. Attracted ameature relay for voltage openition indicating relay.
PROGRAMABLE INVERSE TIME CURRENT RELAY Requirement a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) Single pole over current relay Single pole E/F current relay Two pole O/C relay Three pole o/c relay Three pole combined o/c & E/F relay Four pole combined o/c & F/F relay Single pole relay o/c with highest inst unit Single pole E/F relay with high set Inst. unit Two plle o/c relay with high set Inst. unit Three pole o/c relay with high set Inst. unit Three pole combined o/c & FE relay with Three pole combined o/c E/F relay with High set instutions unit for o/c only. m) Three pole combined o/c & E/F relay with High set instantanious unit JRV171 JRV 172 IRV 173. JRV 181 JRV 182 JRV 188 Relay type JRCO51P JRCO51 JRCO52 JRCO53P JRCO53 JRCO54 JRCO62P JRCO62 JRCO64 JRCO66P JRCO66 JOCO67 JRCO68 JRCO68 IDMI Phase Earth 1 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 Phase High set Earth 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 Auxiliary Relay
electromechanical hinged armeture type high speed relays for tripping CB (self reset contact)
Same as above (hand reset contacts)
WBSEBEA - 169
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Setting adjustement Switch A Switch B for selecting different cirres. inverse time set ting To set 50% = 50 + [0+0+0+0] = 50% To set 100% = 50 + [0+10+0+10] = 100% To set 200% = 50 + (80 + 40+ 20+10) = 200% Switch C Inverse time current setting for E/F To set 5% - 5+ [0+0+0+0+0] To set 80%-5+ [40+20+10+5] Switch DTo set time multipler setting on (Ok) To set 0.1 = (0+0+0+1) x 0.1 = 0.1 To set 1.0 = (8+0+2+ 0) x0.1 = 1..0 Switch E To set Tms calibration from 0.01 to 0.09 To set 0.09 = (8+0+0+1) x 0.01 = 0.09
Toset 0.11 = {[0+0+0+1] x 0.1}+ [0+0+0+1] x 0.01 Switch H = Instanious high set o/c setting. minimum setting - 200% = (0+0+0+2) x 100 maximum setting - 3000% = (16+8+4+3) x 100
19 20
POWER SUPPLY
R PH 1 2 3 4 B PH 5 6 7 8 Y PH
O/C ALARM
11 12
O/C TRIP
13 14
O/C ALARM
15 16 17 TRIP 18
WBSEBEA - 170

R Y B 1 kv Bus
CB
TRIP COIL
CT
i i i i
IF
IF I
E/F
O/C
O/C
TO FEEDER LINE
ASS
i i
A R Y B
Y and B phase shorted

R
i 1 2 i i
Y
i
ASS
As such, I Y = I B = I F but direction of I Y & I B is opposite
O/C or E/F Relay ASS Ammeter selector switch Ammeter Corresponding secondary curent
Amm. Sel. switch internal connections showing current measurement of Y- Phase. Y-Phase is shorted to Pt. 1 and R & B phases to Pt. 2 through selector switch and as such star Pt. is formed at Pt. 2, because Y-Phase current meets R & B phase currents at Pt. 2 after ammeter.
IY + I B Primery short Ckt current

i
WBSEBEA - 171

11 kv Incoming From 33/11 kv Transformer R Y B
CB (Incoming)
i i
TRIP COIL
CT (Ratio=100/5)
i i
E/F
F
O/C
O/C
1000 A ASS
i
1
A
R Y B
11 kv Bus
CB (Feeder)
i i
TRIP COIL
CT (Ratio= 50/5)
i i
= Primery fault current = Corresponding secondary CT current
i
E/F O/C O/C
ASS
E/F
1
A
i
F
=1000 A
Earth fault at Red phase of a Feeder showing current flow through 11kv Feeder and Incoming Protn. CTS & relays.
WBSEBEA - 172
WBSEBEA - 173
33 KV. BUS AT TRANSMISSION SUB - STATION

R Y B
ISO
I I Y
R Y
BRK .
I
B
T/C
BR
I I I
33 KV. DIS
R
R 3I
n r
NCT
B
ZIGZAG / STAR EARTHING TRANSFORMER [33 / 0.4 KV.]
LEGEND :
1. RESTRICTED E/F RELAY - 64 R 2. PRIMARY CURRENT - I 3. SECONDARY CURRENT-i 4. NEUTRAL CT - NCT 5. E / F RELAY - R
REMARKS:
2. O / C RELAY WILL BE ENERGISED
1. NO CURRENT WILL PASS THROUG
3. ISO. NEAR 33 KV. BRK. HAS NOT BE SHOWN TO AVOID COMPLEXITY
4. DISTRIBUTION OF CURRENT THRO METERING CKTS. HAS NOT BEEN S
WBSEBEA - 174
33 KV. BUS AT SUB - STATION
B
T/C
BRK.
RK.
T/C
ASS A
3I
O/C METER - INST
STRIBUTION LINE.
2I
3i
E/F [ 64 R ]
6.3 MVA. 33 / 11 KV. TR. DYI

164 R
O/C
E/F
ASS METER
GH - 64 R BRK.
T/C
EEN
R Y B
11 KV. BUS
OUGH SHOWN
WBSEBEA - 175
ISO
BRK
T/C
BRK.
33 KV. DISTR
ZIGZAG / STAR EARTHING TRANSFORMER [33 / 0.4 KV.]
1. RESTRICTED E/F RELAY - 64 R 2. PRIMARY CURRENT - I 3. SECONDARY CURRENT-i 4. NEUTRAL CT - NCT 5. E / F RELAY - R
1. NO CURRENT WILL PASS THROUGH 2. O / C RELAY WILL BE ENERGISED
3. ISO. NEAR 33 KV. BRK. HAS NOT BEEN SHOWN TO AVOID COMPLEXITY
4. DISTRIBUTION OF CURRENT THROUG METERING CKTS. HAS NOT BEEN SHO
WBSEBEA - 176
BRK. T/C
O/C METER - INST
RIBUTION LINE.
E/F [ 64 R ]
22 3
6.3 MVA. 33 / 11 KV. TR. DYI

164 R
E/F
ASS METER
- 64 R BRK.
T/C
GH OWN
11 KV. BUS
WBSEBEA - 177

R Y B CB
TRIP COIL
Axu. Contact (N.O) Breaker
1 kv Bus
Trip relay contacts
3 3 3 O/C O/C E/ F 4 4 4
Battery and its Charger
CT
E/F
O/C
O/C
Alarm relay contacts

1 O/C O/C 2
TO FEEDER LINE
ASS
A
E/ F
Battery and its Charger
Bell
Switch
From Line (11 kv)
CB
FUSE BLOWN
T.L. FUSES
CT
E/F
O/C
O/C
T.L. FUSES
ASS
TO CONSUMER END
A
WBSEBEA - 178
ELECTRICAL PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTION

Topics : Fundamentals of Protection Practice for Distribution system I. System parameters / Equipment Technical Parameters 1. Nominal voltage (system voltage) : 11 KV 2. Rated voltage (Max continuous operating voltage) : 12 KV 3. Max. short Circuit Level (short circuit with (i) 13 KV Eqv stand capacity for 3 seconds) to 250 MVA (ii) 18 KA Eqv to 342. MVA 4. Rated current (Max, continuous current Depending on at which equipment will be operated) Rating of Equip. 5. Rated cupacity in KVA " 6. No load voltage (in case of Transformer) 11/0.415 KV 7. Percentage Impeilance IZ/V x 100 1 to 4.5% (in case of transformer) or 5% 8. Basic Insulation level (i) Power Freq. with stand voltage 28 KV rms (ii) Lightning Impulse withstand voltage 75KV peak at 1.2/50 us wave crest 9. a) System Earthing effectively earthed b) Coefficient of Earthing earthed 0.8 10. Transformer vector Group DY 11 11. Max. Allowable Temp. rise under normal operating condition (in case of Transformer) (i) Winding Temp. 55 Deg C (ii) Oil Temp. 45 Deg C 12. Normal operating Temp. Specified 13. Losses (In case of transformer) (i) No load loss Specified 2 (ii) I R Loss depending on rating 14. Over voltage factor of P.T. 1.2 continious 1.5 for 30 Sec. Explantation of Accuracy class of C.T. & P.T. 5 C.T. 5 P P 1s or 10 33 KV 36 KV (i) 13.1 KV Eqv to 750 MVA (ii) 17.5 KA Eqv to 1000 MVA Depending on Rating of Equip. " 33/11 KV 6% to 7%
70 KV rms 170 KV peak at 1.2/50 us wave crest non effectively earthed 1.0 DY 11
55 Deg C 45 Deg C Specified Specified depending on rating 1.2 continious 1.9 for 4 trans.
Protection core Allowable composite Error
(ALF) Accuracy limit factor i.e. upto 10 time 15 times rated current of C.T. error will by within allowable limit.
WBSEBEA - 179
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. C. T. : 1.0 or 0.5 KIs - Ip Current Error, Accuracy class of metering core. Ip Current Error : Phase angle error :
0.5 class 0.5 at rated current 30 min at at rated current
1.0 class + 1.0 a+ rated current 60 min at rated current
Instrument Security Factor (I.S.F.) of metring .....core I.S.F. is the multiple or rated primary current at which the current Error at rated burden arounds to 10% with a view 10 protect measuring instruments f rom excessive s.c. current. Metering core should have small I.S.F. P.T. : P.T. : 1.0 or 05. Accuracy class of metering P.T. 3p or 5P Accuracy class of protection P.T. allowable Error : 3 or 5
Load shaing of transformer operated in paonllel 2 - Transformer operated in parallel : H. V P.U. Impedances expressed in same common Base. DY II DY II Transformer T1 T2 TI T2 Capacity 10 MVA 5MVA II I2 % Imp on own base 10 10 ZI Z2 PI P2 P.U. Irup 0.10 x 5/10 0.10 on own base L. V P.U. Im 0.10 x 5/10 0.10 on 5 MVA P= PI + P2 I= I I + I 2 Base (base MVA) = 0.05
2 Trasnfomers operated in Parallel
I1Z1 = I2 Z2 I = I1 + I2 Z1 = 0.05 Z2 = 0.10 Z1 or I = I1 + I1 Z2
Z1 + Z2 = I Z2 Z2 I1 = I. Z1+Z2 Z2 0.10 2 I1 = I = I = I Z1 + Z2 0.05 + 0.10 3 Z2 2
WBSEBEA - 180
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. P1 = P. = P. Z1 + Z2 3 Z1 0.05 1 I2 = I. = I = I Z1 + Z2 0.05 + 0.10 3 2 P2 = P 3 3- Transformer operated in parallel base MVA is to be considered : % Imp of T1 Base Z1 = x Rated capacity 1 H. V of T1 in MVA DY II DY II DY II
II
TI ZI PI P2 T2 Z2 P3 L. V T3 Z3
I= I I + I 2 + I 3
P= PI + P2 + P3
3 Trasnfomers operated in Parallel
Similarly : Z2 and Z3 are to be calculated. I1Z1 = I2 Z2 = I2 Z3 I = I1 + I2 + I3 Z1 Z1 or I = I1 + I1 + I1 Z2 Z3 Z2Z3 + Z3Z1 + Z1Z2 or I = I1 ( ) Z2 Z3
Z2Z3 I1 = I. Z!Z2 + Z2Z3 + Z3Z1 Z3Z1 I2 = I. Z1Z2 + Z2Z3 + Z3Z1 I3 = I. Z1 Z2 + Z2Z3, Z3Z1
conditions of parallal operation of... (1) Vector Group of transformter will be identical 2. No volgage Ratio will be identical 3. voltage at the seconary terminal of transformer at the time of parallel operation will be nearty equal. 4. Same phasco are to be connected 5. All protective Equipment and current carrying conductors shall be capable to withstand sinse operate at increased S.C. level due to parallel operation of transformer. Maximum Fault Level. For 3 phase fault current E IF = When E and Z1 are expressed in P.U. Z1 WBSEBEA - 181
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. For 1 phase to ground Fault Current 3E I1 = Z1 + Z2 + Zo + ZE 3E = (For Transformer Z1 = Z2) 2Z1 + Zo + ZE Say Transformer cpacity 5 MVA, 33/11 K.V. % on own Base : 7% 5 x 103 DY II Rate current at 11 KV. IR = A = 262.43A V3 x 11 Z1 = 0.07 P.U. ; E-1.P.U. TI ZI Max. Fault Current (i) For 3 phase Fault IF 1 I1 = P.U. = 14.28.PU 0.07 = 14.28 times noted current = 3.748 KA F (iii) For single phase to current fault say Zo 0.85 x 0.07 I.v. = 0.0595 and ZE = 0 MAXIMUM FAULT LEVEL 3 IF = P.U. 0.07 x 2 + 85 x 0.07 3 P.V. = 15.0375 P.V. 0.1995 = 15.0375 times rated current = 3.946 KA when 2 suah trasnformer will be operated in parallel for 3 phase fault IF = 2.56 P.V. = 7.496 KV For 1 phase to current Fault If = 30.075 P.V. = 7.692 KA
WBSEBEA - 182
Relay co-ordination :
33 kv Bus of 132/33 kv s/s LOC 1 C.T: 400-200/1-1A
LOC 2 C.T: 400-200/1-1A LOC 3 C.T: 400-200/1-1A 33 kv Bus of 33/11 kv s/s LOC 4 C.T: 400-200/1-1A
33 kv DY II
LOC 5 C.T: 400-200/5-5A LOC 6 C.T: 200-100/5-5A 11 kv Bus of 33/11 kv s/s LOC 7 C.T: 200-100/5-5A
Relay Co-ordination
Protective Non directional Relays at different Locations are shown Relay co-ordination is achieved by : A. 1. Proper current setting For I.D.M.T.L. current play 2. Time multiple setting B. 1. Boper current setting For Definite Time Earth Fault Relay 2. Time settimg Time setting : 1. Minimum difference in time setting may be 0.4 sconds for between two zones of IDMIL relay. 2. Minimum different in time setting may be 0./25 seconds between two zones of definite time earth fault relay.
WBSEBEA - 183
PROTECTION RELAYS FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Protection system Type of Relay Setting Range 50% to 200% in equal steps for IDMTL unit : 500% to 2000% in equal steps for high set time multiple setting : 0 to 1 for IDMTL unit current setting range 10% to 40% in equal steps timer setting range 0 to sec. continuously variable. I. 33KV Radial Feeder Protection : 1. Over current 3 element O/C Relay having normal IDMTL and high set instantanous unit
2. Earth Fault
1-Element instantaneous E/F relay with timer i.e. definite time earth fault relay.
II. 33 K.V. 8.11 KV patallal Feder protection i.e. directional Feeder Protection at Receiving End. : 1. Over current 3 Element voltage polarisid o/C relay Current setting range : having normal IDMTL unit only 50% to 200% in equal steps time multiplior setting 0 to 1. 2. Earth Fault 1-Element voltage palarised E/F Relay Current setting Range having normal IDMTL unit only 10% to 40% in equal steps Time multipliser setting : 0 to 1. 33/11KV Power Transformer Protection : Vector Group DY 11 a) H.V. Side : 1. Over current Same as in I (4) Same as in 7 (1) 2. Earth Fault Restricted Earth Fault relay Instantanous operation 3. Buchholz Relay Voltage actuated Auxiliary Relay Function (a) Trip Function (b) Non-trip Alarm Function 4. High Winding Temp voltage actuated Auxiliary relay (a) Trip Function (b) Non-Trip Alarm Function 5. High Oil Temp Non-Trip Alarm Function Voltage actuated Auxiliary relay 6. Low oil Level Voltage actuated Non-Trip Alarm auxiliary relay function
WBSEBEA - 184
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 7. Tripping Function (b) L.V. Side : 1. Over current High speed bipping relay 2-Element O/C Relay having normal IDMTL unit Current setting range 50% to 200% in equal step time multiple setting 0 to 1. current setting range : 10% to 40% in equal s t ep time multiple setting 0 to 1. Setting Range 10% to 40 timer setting range 0 to10.
2. Earth Fault
1-Element E/F relay with having normal IDMTL unit
3. Stand by Earth Definite time earth fault fault (connected relay between nantral IV. 11 KV Radial Feeder Protection : 1. Over current Same as III (b) (1) 2. Earth Fault Same as III (b) (2) Protection system Type of Relay V. 11 KV Shant capacity Bank Protection : 1. Over Current 3-Element o/c Relay having normal IDMTL unit 2. Earth Fault 1-Element E/F Relay having normal IDMIL unit 3. Over voltage Definite time over voltage relay
Setting Range
4. Under voltage
Definite Time under voltage relay
O/V setting Range : 105% to 130% timer setting 0 to 1 Sec. U/V setting range : 30% to 90% timer setting 0 to 1 sec.
5. Unbalance protection (a) Neutral displacement relay by using R.V.T. for single start formulation of capacitor Bank. (b) Current sensing relay using C.T. Connected between two neutral points for double star formulation of capacitor Bank Time delay Relay or timer
6. Inherrent closing time relay
5 minutes or 10 minutes delay in pick up.
WBSEBEA - 185
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. 33 KV CLASS POWER TRANSFORMERS
S. Capacity Current No in KVA H.V . Amps L.V . Protection NoLoad H.V . L.V . Losses T.C. Wire T.C. Wire in W 26 27 22 20 18 13 C.B. C.B. 21 19 18 15/C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B. 2200 3000 4500 6400 8000 8500 Full Load Losses in W 11500 16000 23000 36000 47000 52000 % Impedance 4.5 5.0 6.0 6.0 7.00 7.00 7.00 8.00 Total Tr. Weight in Kgs. 4500 6932 5770 10932 12200 16850 17250 Qty.o Oil in litres 1750 2410 1710 2990 3350 4800 5250
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
500 750 1000 1500/1600 3000/3150 5000 7500 8000
8.50 12.75 17.50 26.50 52.50 87.46 131.00 140.00
26.25 39.38 52.50 78.75 157.50 262.40 393.00 420.00
EARTHING
Range of registivity of soil : Type of earth (i) Fly ash from pulvarised coal fitted boiler (ii) Wet organic soil (iii) Moist soil (iv) Dey Soil (v) Bed soil RISISTIVITY OF VARIOUS ROCK (i) Morain Gravel (ii) Boulder (iii) Gronite Current (Ma) (1-6) (9-25) Resistivity ( - m ) 10 10-1000 100-1000 1000-10,000
1000-10,000 (Av-3000) 3000-30,000 25000 Physiological effects Threshold of perciption let go current un-phasant to sustain Pain ful & can make it difficult / impossible to release energised object grapsed by hand. Mascular contrastion, breating trouble Verticular, fibrillation, stoppage to heart, inhibition of respirary.
(25-60) (60-100(
WBSEBEA - 186
Earthing System Design : The earthing system design for the instant case has been done as per AIEF Guide for "safety in alternating current sub-station grounding - Vol. 80, 1961 The detailed calculation is as follows : (A) Basic Technical Data : Natural Soil Resistivity Maximum Fault curent Fault Duration Resistivity adjacemnt to feet (due to gravelling) Area of the ground met Depth of burial
P1 : 30 ohm - metres Ig : 40 kA t : 1 sec. Ps : 3000 ohm - m A : 43,000 M2 (approx) H : 00 mm
B. Area of Cross section of conductor The area cross section of the conductor is given by a 450.P 1 a 4050 P1 t = I ds Log10 (1+QML) I ds log10 MOhm 1+QeL HOQL Where a - Cross-section of conductor in Cir mils, I - Fault current in amps; p - Resistivity in micro - ohm - cm; (15 for steel) L - Resistance temperature co-efficient (0.00423 for steel) t - duration of fault in sec. d - density of material (7.86 gm/cc for steel) s - specifiec heart of material in Cal/.gm (0.114 for steel) QM - Max. allowable temp. in oC; (900oC for steel). Qe - Ambient temp. in oC (40oC) Substituting the above values, a 4050 x 15 x 0.00423 = I 7.86 x 0.114 x log10 1 + 900 x 0.00423 x t 1 + 40 x 0.00423 = 21.6 x t a = 21.5 x I x / t incircular mils; 1 mol = 0.25 mm 1 Cir. mil = 0.0005067 mm2 Hence a = 21.6 x I x / t x 0.0005067 mm2 = 0.0109 x I x / t mm2 = 0.0199 x 40,000 x 1
WBSEBEA - 187
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. = 436 mm2 Taking an overall factor of safety of 3, a = 436 x 3 = 1308 mm2 So, diameter of Rod comes to 40.8 mm Hence, size of MS rod chosen = 40mm For risers beneath the ground surface, taking the same factor of safety as 3, size of the strip = 65 x 20 mm for risers portion above ground surface, size of M.S. strip chosen = 75 x 10 mm and galvanised which given an overall safety of 750/436 = 1.72, a corrosion factor of 10 percent is adequate. (c) Tolerable limits of touch and step potentials mayu be computed from the expression - E step = Ik. (RB + RFs) and E touch = IK (RB + RF2P) 165 + Ps 165 + 3000 E step = = = 2165 volts t 1 165 + 0.25 Ps 165 + 0.25 x 3000 E touch = = = 915 volts t 1 With natural soil, 165 + P 165 + 30 E step = = = 172.5 volts t 1 .157 Presently, Ik is taken as, Ik = for 70 kg. ts .116 or Ik = for 50 kg. ts It is evident that the limit of 'step' and 'touch' potential is more stringent now a days. (D) Length of burried conductor (Minimum) : P Km Ki Ig The formula for E mesh = L E mesh = Maximum potential rise in mesh L = Total Length of burried conductor. Equating, E mesh = E touch (Tolerable limit) 165 + 0.25P PK Ki Ig We get, = t l Pkm Ki Iq L = for t = 1 sec. (165 + 0.25P) Km - a co-efficient which takes into account the effect of number n, spacing D, diameter d and depth of burial h of grid conductor Ki - irregularity correction factor to allow for non-uniformity of ground current flow from different parts of the grid.
WBSEBEA - 188
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. The outer corners being finely divided, a figure of 1.4 is quite adequate for the product of Km. Ki (Figures 7 and 8 in page Nos. 21 and 23 may be referred in AIEE guide). 1.4 x 30 x 10000 x /1 Hence L = = 1836 metres. 216 metre 165 + 0.25 x 3000 A B (E) Layout Design. Let the area be 216 x 200 n The main earthmat is laid at spacings of 14m and 13m alternate parallel to AC. Across the main mat 12 nos. of parallel rods are considered according to the availability of space and position of equipments. The total quantity of conductors is as C follows : Q Total quantity = (17 x 200) + (12 x 216) = 5992m. For finer divisions of the meshes at four corners = 400 mm approx. Number of earth Electrondes : Mx. ground fault current The minimum no. of earth electrodes required is given by, 500 40,000 So, in this case, no. of earth electrodes required = = 80 500 We shall use 40 mm dia, 4 m long pipe electrodes. The earthing electrodes should be distributed over the entire grid at suitable distance and specially at the corners of the grid Lighting arrestors, CVTs, transformer neutrals, LMs and towers. Total length of electrodes = 80 x 4 = 320 metres. Hence overall quanity of buried conductros = 592 + 400 + 320 = 6712 = 6700 meters. So it is seen that length of conductor actually required as per above calculation is already more than what is required for gradiant control. F) Maximum value of mesh voltage within the grid. From Equ. (16) of AIEE, Km Ki Pi E Mesh = L Km x Ki = 1.4 (as previously mentioned) L = Total length of buried conductor = 670 m. 1.4 x 30 x 40,000 E Mesh = 250.7 V 6700 This is well within the permissible limit of 915 volts, as the overall quantity of burried conductors is higher than minimum conductor requirement, touch and mesh voltages will be within limits inside the switchyard. (G) Check of step voltages at the periphry. 216 metre
WBSEBEA - 189
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Step voltage is max. for x = n As per equ. (21) of AIEE guide. Ks Ki Pi E step = L Ks = a co-afficient which takes into account the effect of number, n, spacing D and depth h of grid conductors. Ki = Irregularity factor as defined earlier. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ks = [ + + + + .... + ] 11 2h D+h D 2 3 n-1 As conductors are laid at 14 and 13 m alternate, average spacing D is taken as 13.5 m. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Hence Ks = [ + + + + .... + ] 11 1.2 14.1 13.5 2 3 1 1 1 1 = [ + + (2.9271) 11 1.2 14.1 13.5 = 3567 1 D2 1 3 5 7 Ks = + logs + + + .... + 11 16hd 11 4 6 6 1 13.52 == in = 0.3467 2-11 16 x 0.6 x 0.04 (n considered equals 12) Km = 0.633 Product of Km Ki = 1.4, Km = 0 .633 1.4 So, Ki = - 2.21 0.633 0.3567 x 2.21 x 30 x 40,000 Hence E Step = = 141.2 volts 6700 Allowable value - 195.volts. (H) Calculation of Resistance of Grounding system Laurent's formula gives P P R = + 4r L When r = equivalent radius of the switchard. L = Total length of burried conductor = 700 m
WBSEBEA - 190
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. P = resistivity in ohm - metres = 30 ohm - metre. Area A = 43200 m2 1 2 So, r = 43200 x = 117.2 m 2 11 1 1 R = 30 + 4 x 117 .2 6700 = 0.068 ohm (I) Sustained fault Current : Another point to be examined is whether the sustained ground current is below the let go value of body current of not. The tolerable sustained current which may be permitted to be circulated through the body is 9 MA. Therefore sustained touch potential is 3 9 3 9 E touch (sus) = 1000 + Ps). = (1000 + x 3000) x 2 1000 2 1000 = 49.5 volts. Km Ki PI So, mesh potential i.e. should be less than 49.5 volts L 49.5 x 6700 Km KI PI So I should be less than = 7962 A = 0.633 x 2.21 x 30 L In oprder, however, to make the system safe for sustained ground fault currents, the relay clearing time and ground fault must be set for a minimum pick up current of less than 7900 Amps.
soi
soil resistivity
ddddddd
ssshhtgjyuyuyuyuytu
WBSEBEA - 191
soil resistivity measurement
ddddddd
his method entails the passing current between two current electrodes(outer) driven into the ground gfhjjgjklgkl;loitot and detecting the voltage appearing due this currents at the two other electrodes(inner). in this methodes 4 electrodes are driven into the earth along a st. line at equal interval. The current in the ground produces an electric field proportional to the current density and to the resistivity of soil . The voltage measured between the inner portion is proportional to this field.Consequently the resistivity will be proportional to the V/I ratio . If the length 'L' of the electrodes in the ground is negligible compared to the spacing 'A' between them,then the soil resistivity 'P' is given by--P=2*3.175*A*V/I (V/I=R) If however L/Ais not very small, then the expression for P is given by-P= 2*3.175*A*R 2 2 1+2A/root(A +4L )-2A/root(4A2+B2) If A>>L ,the equation reduces to P=2*3.175*AR
WBSEBEA - 192
EARTHING SYSTEM
1. Earthing of H.T. & L.T. Line supports (i) On metal supports : (ii) On RCC Poles : Every fifth pole and all supports provided with mass or block concrete foundation should be earthed. The metal cross arm and the insulator pins shall be bonded together and earhted at every pole for H.T. lines and at every fifth pole for L.T. Lines.
All special structures carrying switches, transformers, fuses etc., should be earthed. 3. 4. The supports on other side of road, railway or river crossing span should be earthed. All supports metal, wood or RCC of both H.T. & L. T. lines running through inhableted locations, road crossings and along such other places where earthing of all poles is considered desirable from safety consideration should be earthed. In special locations Railway & Telegraph crossings, special structure etc., pipe earth by means of 25 mm G.I. pipe driven 2.5 to 3 Mtrs. into the ground should be adopted. At other locations coil earth consisting of 10 Mtrs. length of No. 6 or No. 8 SWG G.I. wire compressed into coil 1 Mtrs. Length and diameter 75 to 100 mm and buried 1.5 mtr. deep should be adopted. 6. 7. The Ohmic resistance of earth should not exceed 10 ohms. Plate Earth : a) Large power stations and major sub-stations 120 x 1 20 cms cast iron plates of 12.5 mm thick b) Small stations 8. Pipe earthing : a) Large poer stations and major sub-stations b) Small Sub-Stations 9. Earth Connections (a) Main and subsidlary earth connections (b) Branch Connections 10. Earth Resistance : Station a) Large Power Stations b) Major Sub Stations c) Small Stations Not less than 64.5 Sq. mm. Combined resistance of earth in the station - Ohm. (Maximum) 0.5 1.0 2.0 Not less than 161 Sq. mm. Cast iron pipes 152 mm dia 3-Nos. of 0.48 Mrs. long and not less than 12.7 mm thick G.I. Pipe 50.0 mm dia and 3 Mtrs. long 60 x 60 Cm cast iron plates of 9.4 mm thick
5.
WBSEBEA - 193
SIZE OF EARTH LEAD

(a) For Transformer Neutral Point Earthing : Transformer rating Electrolytic bare copper conductor or strip 50 KVA & below 8 SWG 75 KVA/63 KVA 8 SWG 100 KVA 4 SWG 150 KVA / 160 KVA 2 SWG 200 KVA 25 mm x 1.5 mm 250 KVA 25 mm x 3 mm 300 KVA/315 KVA 25 mm x 3 mm 500 KVA 25 mm x 3 mm 750 KVA 25 mm x 6 mm Insulated (PVC) Single core Standard Aluminium 16 Sq. mm 35 Sq. mm 35 Sq. mm 70 Sq. mm 95 Sq. mm 50 Sq. mm 225 Sq. mm 300 Sq. mm 300 Sq. mm Galvanised Iron Conductor or strip 25 mm x 3 mm 40 mm x 6 mm 40 mm x 6 mm 40 mm x 6 mm 40 mm x 6 mm 40 mm x 6 mm 40 mm x 6 mm 50 mm x 6 mm Above 500 KVA only Copper / Aluminium strips to be used.
Above 750 KVA size of earth to be determined as per IS : 1886 / 1 967
(b) For Equipment Earthing (Applicable to Transformers, Motors, Generators, Switchgears etc.) Rating 400-V 4 ph Size of Earth Conductor 50 cy-equipment Bare Aluminium PVC Galvalsed In KVA Copper Insululated Iron Upto 5 14 SWG 8 Sq. mm 7/22 6 to 15 10 SWG 10 Sq. mm 8 SWG 15 to 50 10 SWG 16 Sq mm 25 mm x 1 1/2 mm 51 to 75 8 SWG 25 Sq. mm 25 mm x 1 1/2 mm 76 to 100 6 SWG 35 Sq. mm 25 mm x 3 mm 101 to 125 4 SWG 50 Sq. mm 25 mm x 6 mm 126 to 150 2 SWG or 70 Sq. mm 25 mm x 6 mm 25 x 1 1/2 mm 151 to 200 25 x 1 1/2 mm 70 Sq. mm 38 mm x 6 mm 201 and above 25 x 3 mm 185 Sq. mm 50 mm x 6 mm Note : Conductor to be protected so that no mechanical damage could be caused. Earth connection for all H.V. equipment and swtich gear should not be less than 0.1 Sq. inch. copper or 185 Sq. mm PVC insulated standard aluminium conductor of 2" x 1/4 G.I. strip.
WBSEBEA - 194
BATTERY
Condition of Charged Cell
Active material on positive cell Type of cell Lead Acid Nickel cadmium Positive Plate Lead per exide Nickel Hydrate Negative Plate spongy lead Cadmium Hydoxide
Fully charged cell Sp. Gr. 27C Volts per cell Final / Avg 1.205 1.200 207. 1.75 20.5 1.25 Symptom Free gassing Constant voltage for 3 to 4 hrs.
State of discharge all Type of all 0 Lead acid Nickel Cadmium March-1990 Sp. Gr. VPC 1.240 1.3 At % discharge 25 50 1.200 1.2 1.160 1.15 75 1.130 1.1 100 1.100 1.05 Lower permissible value per cell 1.8 1.0
Preparation of water (in 1 titre of sulphuric - acid of sq. gr. 1.835 Designed Sq.gr. at 27oC 1.400 1.380 1.360 1.340 Distilled water in ltrs. 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.1 Desired Sp. gr. at 27oC 1.320 1.300 1.280 1.260 Distilled Water in litrs. 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.1 Desired Sp. gr. 1.240 1.220 1.200 1.180 Distilled Water in litres 3.5 3.9 3.9 5.1
WBSEBEA - 195

BATTERY CHARGING PROCEDURAL FORMAT PRESCRIBED BY EXIDE INDUSTRIES LTD. Sent in by Date Installation Battery of Cells, Type ( plates per cell). Reference No. Contractor Note : For batteries containing more than 60 cells, use further copies of the format as continuous settes. The total volds and the information asked for in the next and in the last paragraphs need only be given on the first sheet, but all other information should be given on each sheet. Acid in carboys. Specific Gravity Acid temperature oC (it is important that temperature should be given in every instance)
FIRST CHARGE REPORT
Acid poured into cells commencing (a. m.) (p.m) on 19 First charge commenced (a.m.) (p.m.) on 19 First charge completed (a.m.) (p.m.) on 19 Total net number of hours of charge (exdludin rests) 19 Numbr of hours at end of chargue, during which specific gravity had remained constant hours (Analysis allos for temperature correction above comparing Sp. Gr. reading) Three hours after completion of charge, specific gravity of acid was at temperature of oC Height of a cid above tops of plates when filled in inches. After completion of charge inches Variation of level of acid during change inches. Level was maintained by addition of NOTE : The acid should be maintained at a constant level by addition of acid unless the specific gravity exceeds the working value given on the instruction Card, in which case and approved water (preferable distilled) instead of acid. ON COMPLETION OF CHARGE - Where the positive plates of a rich chocolata colour? Where the negative plates of light grey colour? Where all the plates gassing freely for some hours before completion? Pilot Cell Readings. One cell out of each group of 60 cells to be taken as a "pilot" cell. Readings to be entered at the end of such hour's net charge (eactuding rests). The cell should be in th e main part of the battery; it should not be an end cell. Enter Temp, corrected Sp. Gr. readings. Pilot Cell No. Air temperature at commencement of charge oC. Hrs. Amps. Corrected Acid Hrs. Amps. Corrected Acid Hrs. Amps. Corrected Acid Hrs. Amps. Corrected Acid Sp. Gr. Temp. Sp. Gr. Temp. Sp. Gr. Temp. Sp. Gr. Temp 1. 16 31 46 2 17 32 47 3 18 33 48 4 19 34 49 5 20 35 50 6 21 36 51 7 22 37 52 8 23 38 53 9 24 39 54 10 25 40 55 11 26 41 56 12 27 42 57 13 28 43 58 14 29 44 59 15 30 45 60 List of all stoppages, their cause and duration Ait temperature on completion of charge oC Also special remakrs about the charge
It is particularly requested that the report be filled-up and forwarded to Exide Industries Limited, 59E, Chowringhee Road, Calcutta - 700 020 so that the details may be carefully considered, and further advice given in necessary. Sufficient sheets are supplied to enable the customer to retain copies if he so desire. PTO
WBSEBEA - 196

RECORD OF SPECIFIC GRAVITIES AND TOTAL VOLTS Hours Ord. Total Volts Cell No.
1+ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
12
Final Readings 3 Hours After after adjustment Charge (if any) Observed Specific Gravity reading (enter with correction for temperature)
16
20
24
28
32
Positive No. 1 Cell is Negative 36 40 44 48
+ When this form is used as a Continuation Sheet, after "Call No." coloumn as required
WBSEBEA - 197
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. CHARGING EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS Our technical services are freely available for advice concerning special requirements and to prepare specifications and quotations for charging and control equipment of all types. Stands Teak wood stands are provided, finished with several coats of black antisulphuric paint. No metal fastenings are used in the construction of stands thereby eliminating the risk of corrosion. Where the stand is to be manufactured locally, or at site, constructional drawings will be provided on request. For convencience in handling and to minimise warping, no length of timber should exceed 3050 mm (10 ft.) Insulations Porcelain insulators are used between the stand and the battery room floor when the number of cells in the battery exceeds 55. Battery Layout Recommended space between battery and the wall is 305 mm. (1ft.) with a minimum of 152 mm. (6 in). The width of gangways should be sufficient to allow the withdrawal of cells for any possible overhaul, but with a minimum of 610 mm (2 ft.). A layout drawing will be made for each battery upon receipt of a sketch showing the dimensions of the proposed battery room.
TABLE OF CELL DATA

Type Capacity in Ah AT 27oC When discharged in Charge Current Amperes Start ing Finishing 2.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2.75 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 kg 4.1 4.8 5.5 7.8 8.5 9.2 9.9 Weight of cell Approix complete plate Quantity of with acids acid1. 190 sp. kg 1.4 1.3 1.2 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 gr litres 1.2 1.1 1.0 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 Trickle charge rates Min mA 10 15 20 30 40 45 50 Max mA 40 45 60 90 120 135 150
10 h Final YAMP YAMP YAMP YAMP YAMP YAMP YAMP Voltage 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1.85 16 24 32 40 48 56 64
5th
3h
1h 1.75 9.8 14.6 19.6 24.4 29.3 34.2 39.0
1.82 1.80 14.1 12.8 21.1 19.2 28.1 25.7 35.2 32.1 42.2 38.5 49.2 44.9 56.3 51.3
* The trickle charge value should be adjusted to keep the cell as at 2.25 to 2.30 volts.
WBSEBEA - 198
EXIDE HIGH PERFORMANCE PLANT CAPACITIES, WEIGHTSAND D
Capacity in Ampere hours when discharged in Type 10h 5h 3h 1h Start A
Charge current Finish A First portion of charge
Weight +5% Cell without acid Cell with acid
Final Voltage YXP 7 YXP 9 YXP 11 YX 13 YXP 15 YXP 17 YXP 19 YXP 21 YXP 23 YXP 25 YXP 27 YXP 29 YXP 31 YXP 33
1.85 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400
1.82 66 88 110 132 154 176 198 220 242 264 286 308 330 352
1.80 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320
1.75 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 240
2.35 10 13 16 20 24 28 31 34 38 42 46 48 52 56
2.75 5.0 6.5 8.0 10.0 12 14 15.5 17 19 21 23 24 26 28
Ah 360 470 600 700 820 940 1060 1170 1290 1400 1530 1640 1760 1870
Kg 10.5 13.5 15.5 18.0 19.7 22.0 24.3 26.7 29.1 31.5 36.3 38.5 40.8 43.2
Kg 17.0 19.5 21.0 23.0 28.6 30.6 34.9 36.9 41.4 43.4 52.6 54.4 56.4 58.4
Note : (i) E edge to edge (ii) Cell widths are measured parallel to the plates
* The trickle charge value
WBSEBEA - 199
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CORRECTION FACTORS FOR TEMPERATURE

Temp oC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Correction Factor 0.0189 0.0182 0.0175 0.0168 0.0161 0.0154 0.0147 0.0140 0.0133 0.0126 0.0119 0.0112 0.0105 0.0098 0.0091 0.0084 0.0077 Temp oC 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Correction Factor 0.0070 0.0063 0.0056 0.0049 0.0042 0.0035 0.0028 0.0021 0.0014 0.007 0.0000 0.0007 0.0014 0.0021 0.0028 0.0036 0.0042 Temp oC 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Correction Factor 0.0049 0.0056 0.0063 0.0070 0.0077 0.0084 0.0091 0.0098 0.0105 0.0112 0.0119 0.0126 0.0133 0.0140 0.0147 0.0154 0.0161
Specific Gravity at 28oC = S. G. ToC + 0.0007 (T-27 Where S. T. ToC is the specific gravity as recorded by the Hydrometer. When ToC is the temperature of the Electrolyte.
CHLORIDE INDIA LIMITD

Calcutta, New Delhi, Bombay, Madras, Nagpur, Jullundur, Lucknow
WBSEBEA - 200
Discharge may also produce sulphation t roubles. Internal evidence is apparent by abnormal colour (light brown) of positive plates and presence of white spots on top parts of the plates. Sulphated negatives are gritting and texture. Advanced stages of sulphation need special treatjent and the process is very slow and tedious because rapid charging will cause serious buckling. There are various methods of restoring the capacity of sulphated cells.
1.
2.
3.
Lead-Acid Cell and Battery Troubles and Their Remedies Trouble Cause Remedy The Cell has a low 1. Plates worn because 1. Replace Plates Capacity of long service 2. Seeding of active 2. Replace is considerable. material from positive If shedding is only slight plates. add 0.5 to 1.0 percent of hydroxylamine sulfate to electrolyte. Check density of electrolyte; if too grant, reduce it. 3. Systematic under charge 3. Carry out a long overor failure to carry out charge cycle. preparatory cycles. 4. Contemination of 4. Replace electrolyte, electrolyte was out cells. 5. Sulfation of plates. 5. Carry out charges to restore capacity (desul fation charging). 6. Leakage of current heavy 6. Check cell continers, self discharge. clean and dry the cells. 7. Battery is used at a low 7. Lag the batter to reduce Temperature the loss of heat, slightly in crease the density of the electroilytt. No voltage or practically Short circuit, high leakage Eliminate short circuit. no voltage across cell of current, sulfation. Wash out cell wash the terminals cell, and clean and dry it Carry out a ddsulfaction charge. Abnormal increase in 1. Execessive charging current 1. Discontinue charge and temperature of electrolyte decrease charging current durring charging. 2. Short circuit in cell 2. Eliminate short circuit. 3. Heavy sulfation 3. Carry out a desulfaction charge.
WBSEBEA - 201
Alkaline Cell Troubles and Their Remedes. Trouble 1. Cell shows low capacity Cause 1. Electrolyte is contaminated Remedy 1. Renew electrolyte, check plugs and gaskets, charge with current of increased value. 2. Renew electrolyte, bring density to raised value, charge with increased current. 3. Top up and bring density to required value, charge with increased current. 4. Charge with increased current, carryout "Training" cycles. 5. Carry out cycles of charge and discharge. Check ammeter indications, eliminate cause of current leakage. 6. Carry out a test dischrge and reject the faulty cells. Reew electrolyte and wash out cells, check insulation between cells, clean off dust and dirt. No remedy for plates which have lost their original sizes and shape. 1. See above, item 2 2. Clean contacts and tighten terminal indust. 3. See above, item 2.
2. Density of electrolyte is low.
3. Reduced level of electrolyte top edges of plates remain exposed. 4. Systematic deep discharges with light currents. 5. Systematic under charging due to leakage of current in charging circuit, incorrect reading of ammeter in charging circuit. 6. Deep discharges of separate cells because of faults in the cells. Short circuit because of large amount of sediment, bulging of plates, "buckling of walls, or leakage of current.
2.
Excessive self discharge
3.
4.
Abnormal voltage; low on upon circuit, high during charge and law during discharge, low during charge and discharge. Gassing is not normal : a) excessive gassing during charge and discharge. (b) absence of gassing in some cells. Rapid formation of carbonates near terminal
1. Short circuit 2. Current leakage poor contacts. 3. Short circuit due to large amount of sediment at bottom of cell. 1. Excessive current 2. Impuritis in electrolyte
1. Use normal-value current 2. Renew electrolyto, charge with increased current. 3. See above, item 2 1. Set normal level of electrolyte.
5.
1. Level of electrolyte too high
WBSEBEA - 202
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. posts. 2. Damaged disckets at t erminal 2. Check glands, tighten posts (see page of electrolyte) lower nuts. 3. Excessive density of 3. Correct to required Electrolyte. Value. 1. Damaged vent plungs or 1. Repair or replace valve valves. parts. 2. Charging with plugs left in place. 2. Charge cell with plugs remvoed. To pemedy bulging discharge cell to 0.81.0V, pour out electrolyte and compress container in a vise between two boards. 3. Building of pocket elements 3. No remedy for this trouble. 1. Switch off the battery, lower current a normal value. 2. Wash out the cell, remedy short circuit. 1. Clean contacts and tighten t erminal nuts. 2. Lower the current, check instrument indications. 3. Top up electrolyte. 1. Correct electrolyte density to value according with climatic conditions. 2. Renew electrolyte. 3. Lag the battery. 1. Charge battery in the evening and at night in a cool place. 2. Renew with a composite electrolyte. Renew electrolyte. If capacity is low, restore it by cycling.
6.
Bulging of container walls.
7.
Electrolyte heated becomes. 1. Large current
2. Short circuit between the plates. 8. Excessive heating of terminals 1. Poor contact 2. Excessive current 3. Low level of electrolyte 9. Battery fails to operate in winter. 1. Density of electrolyto is too low.
2. Electroryte contains too much potassium carbonate 3. Battery is not lagged. 10. Battery capacity is low in summer 1. Charging is carried out at high temperature. 2. Electroyte contains no lithium hydroxide. 11. Battery foams Electrolyte contains organic
WBSEBEA - 203

MULTIPLYING FACTOR FOR CALCULATING THE SIZES OF CAPACITOR FOR POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT Power Factor of load before applying Capacitors 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.54 0.55 0.56 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.60 0.61 0.62 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.66 0.67 0.68 0.69 0.70 0.71 0.72 0.73 0.74 0.75 0.76 0.77 0.78 0.79 0.80 0.81 0.82 0.83 0.84 0.85 0.86 0.87 0.88 0.89 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 0.99 Size of Capacitor in KVA per KW of load for raising the Power Factor to 0.80 1.537 1.474 1.413 1.356 1.290 1.230 1.179 1.130 1.076 1.030 0.982 0.936 0.894 0.850 0.809 0.769 0.730 0.692 0.655 0.618 0.584 0.549 0.515 0.483 0.450 0.419 0.388 0.358 0.329 0.299 0.270 0.242 0.213 0.186 0.159 0.132 0.105 0.079 0.053 0.026 0.85 1.668 1.605 1.544 1.487 1.421 1.360 1.309 1.260 1.206 1.160 1.112 1.066 1.024 0.980 0.939 0.899 0.860 0.822 0.785 0.748 0.714 0.679 0.645 0.613 0.580 0.549 0.518 0.488 0.459 0.429 0.400 0.372 0.343 0.316 0.289 0.262 0.235 0.209 0.183 0.156 0.130 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.026 0.90 1.805 1.742 1.681 1.624 1.558 1.501 1.446 1.397 1.343 1.297 1.248 1.202 1.160 1.116 1.075 1.035 0.996 0.958 0.921 0.884 0.849 0.815 0.781 0.749 0.716 0.685 0.654 0.624 0.595 0.565 0.536 0.508 0.479 0.452 0.425 0.398 0.371 0.345 0.319 0.292 0.266 0.240 0.214 0.188 0.12 0.136 0.109 0.083 0.054 0.028 0.91 1.832 1.769 1.709 1.651 1.585 1.532 1.473 1.425 1.370 1.326 1.276 1.230 1.188 1.144 1.103 1.063 1.024 0.986 0.949 0.912 0.878 0.843 0.809 0.777 0.744 0.713 0.682 0.652 0.623 0.593 0.564 0.536 0.507 0.480 0.453 0.426 0.399 0.373 0.347 0.320 0.294 0.268 0.242 0.216 0.190 0.164 0.140 0.114 0.085 0.059 0.031 0.92 0.93 0.94 1.924 1.860 1.800 1.742 1.677 1.626 1.567 1.519 1.464 1.420 1.369 1.323 1.281 1.237 1.196 1.156 1.117 1.079 1.042 1.005 0.971 0.936 0.902 0.870 0.837 0.806 0.775 0.745 0.716 0.686 0.657 0.629 0.600 0.573 0.546 0.519 0.492 0.466 0.440 0.413 0.387 0.361 0.335 0.309 0.283 0.257 0.230 0.204 0.175 0.149 0.121 0.090 0.063 0.032 0.95 1.959 1.896 1.836 1.778 1.712 1.659 1.60 1.552 1.497 1.453 1.403 1.357 1.315 1.271 1.230 1.190 1.151 1.113 1.076 1.039 1.005 0.970 0.936 0.904 0.871 0.840 0.809 0.779 0.750 0.720 0.691 0.663 0.634 0.607 0.580 0.553 0.526 0.500 0.574 0.447 0.421 0.395 0.369 0.343 0.317 0.291 0.264 0.238 0.209 0.183 0.155 0.124 0.097 0.066 0.034 0.96 1.998 1.935 1.874 1.816 1.751 1.695 1.636 1.588 1.534 1.489 1.441 1.395 1.353 1.309 1.268 1.228 1.189 1.151 1.114 1.077 1.043 1.008 0.974 0.942 0.909 0.878 0.847 0.817 0.788 0.758 0.729 0.701 0.672 0.645 0.618 0.591 0.564 0.538 0.512 0.485 0.459 0.433 0.407 0.381 0.355 0.329 0.301 0.275 0.246 0.230 0/.192 0.161 0.134 0.103 0.071 0.037 0.97 2.037 1.973 1.913 1.855 1.790 1.737 1.677 1.629 1.575 1.530 1.481 1.435 1.393 1.349 1.308 1.268 1.229 1.191 1.154 1.117 1.083 1.048 1.014 0.982 0.949 0.918 0.887 0.758 0.828 0.798 0.769 0.741 0.712 0.685 0.658 0.631 0.604 0.578 0.552 0.525 0.499 0.473 0.447 0.421 0.395 0.369 0.343 0.317 0.288 0. 262 0.234 0.203 0.176 0.145 0.113 0.079 0.042 0.98 2.085 2.021 1.961 1.903 1.837 1.784 1.725 1.677 1.623 1.578 1.529 1.483 1.441 1.397 1.356 1.316 1.277 1.239 1.202 1.165 1.131 1.096 1.062 1.030 0.997 0.966 0.935 0.905 0.876 0.840 0.811 0.783 0.754 0.727 0.700 0.673 0.652 0.620 0.594 0.567 0.541 0.515 0.489 0.463 0.437 0.417 0.390 0.364 0.335 0.309 0.281 0.250 0.223 0.192 0.160 0.126 0.089 0.047 0.99 Unity 2.146 2.288 2.082 2.225 2.022 2.164 1.964 2.107 1.899 2.041 1.846 1.988 1.786 1.929 1.758 1.881 1.684 1.826 1.639 1.782 1.590 1.732 1.544 1.686 1.502 1.644 1.458 1.600 1.417 1.559 1.377 1.519 1.338 1.480 1.300 1.442 1.263 1.405 1.226 1.368 1.192 1.334 1.157 1.299 1.123 1.265 1091 1.233 1.058 1.200 1.027 1.169 0.996 1.138 0.966 1.108 0.937 1.079 0.907 1.049 0.878 1.020 0.850 0.992 0.821 0.903 0.794 0. 936 0.767 0.909 0.740 0.882 0.713 0.855 0.687 0.829 0.661 0.803 6.634 0.776 0.608 0.750 0.582 0.724 0.556 0.698 0.530 0.672 0.504 0.645 0.478 0.620 0.450 0.593 0.424 0.567 0.395 0.538 0.369 0.512 0.341 0.484 0.310 0.453 0.283 0.426 0.252 0.395 0.220 0.363 0.186 0.329 0.149 0.292 0.107 0.250 0.060 0.203 0.143
1.861 1.895 1.798 1.831 1.738 1.771 1.680 1.713 1.614 1.647 1.561 1.592 1.502 1.533 1.454 1.485 1.400 1.430 1.355 1.386 1.303 1.337 1.257 1.291 1.215 1.249 1.171 1.205 1.130 1.164 1.090 1.124 1.051 1.085 1.013 1.047 0.976 1.010 0.939 0.973 0.905 0.939 0.870 0.904 0.836 0.870 0.804 0.838 0.771 0.805 0.740 0.774 0.709 0.743 0.679 0.713 0.650 0.684 0.620 0.654 0.591 0. 625 0.563 0.597 0.534 0.568 0.507 0.541 0.480 0.514 0.453 0.478 0.426 0.460 0.400 0.434 0.374 0.408 0.347 0.381 0.321 0.355 0.295 0.329 0.269 0.303 0.243 0.277 0.217 0.251 0.191 0.225 0.167 0.198 0.141 0.172 0.112 0.143 0.086 0.117 0.058 0.089 0.027 0.058 0.031
Exmple Given 100 KW load to be improved from 77 to 95 Power Factor Factor from table is 500 Capacitor (KV Ar) = 100 x .500 = 50 KVAr.
WBSEBEA - 204

RECOMMENDED CAPACITOR RATING FOR DIRECT CONNECTION TO INDUCTION MOTORS To Improve Power Factor to 0.95 or better at all loads Capacitor rating in KVAr when motor speed is : motor speed is : Motor Motor H.P. 3000 1500 1000 750 600 500 H.P. r.p.m r.p.m r.p.m r.p.m r.p.m r.p.m r.p.m r.p.m 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5 15 17.5 20 22.5 25 27.4 30 32.5 35 37.5 40 42.5 45 47.5 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 1 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.5 10 10.5 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 2 3 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.5 10 11 11.5 12 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.5 16.5 17 19 20 21 22 23 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5 6 6.5 7 8 9 9.5 10 11 11.5 12 13 14 14.5 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8 9 10 10.5 11.5 12 13 13.5 14 15 16 16.5 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2.5 4 5 6 7.5 8.5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 2.5 4 5.5 6.5 8 9 10.5 12 13 14.5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 31 32 34 35 37 38 40 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 Capacitor rating in KVAr when 3000 r.p.m 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 38 39 40 41 42 42 43 44 45 46 46 47 48 1500 r.p.m 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 40 41 42 43 44 44 45 46 47 48 48 49 50 1000 r.p.m 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 43 44 45 46 47 47 48 49 50 51 51 52 53 750 600 500 r.p.m r.p.m r.p.m 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 45 46 47 48 49 49 50 51 52 53 53 54 55 36 38 39 40 41 43 44 46 47 48 49 50 51 53 54 55 56 58 59 60 61 61 62 63 64 65 65 66 67 68 41 43 44 46 47 49 50 52 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 75 76
RECOMMENDED CAPACITOR RATING FOR DIRECT CONNECTION TO PRIMARY SIDE OF WELDING TRANSFORMER FOR PWOER FACTOR CORRECTION TRANSFORMER RATING KVA CAPACITOR RATING KVAR 12 18 24 30 36 57 95 128 160
9 4
12
15
18
25
45
50
75
The protection of capacitors should be provided by delayed action fuses which must be capable of carrying about 1.7 fines the current for which the capacitor is rated.
WBSEBEA - 205

REGULATION CONSTANTS FOR OVERHEAD LINES THREE PHASE 50 CYCLES PER SECOND PER `00 KVA PER KM Phase to Phase Voltage 415 V 415 V 415 V 11KV 11KV 11KV 11KV 22KV 22KV 22KV 33KV 33KV 33KV Size Conductor Equivalent in mm Copper area in Sq. mm Rosde 7/1.96 mmAAC Gant 7/2.21 mmAAC Ant 7/3.31 mm mmACC Squirrel 7/2 .11 mmACSR Weasel 7/2.59 mmACSR Ferret 7/3.0 mmACSR Mink 7/3.66 mmACSR Weasel 7/2.59 mmACSR Ferret 7/3.0 mmACSR Mink 7/3.66 mmACSR Weased 7 /2.59 mmACSR Ferret 7/30 mmACSR Mink 7/3.66 ACSR 13 16 30 13 20 25 40 20 25 40 20 25 40 Equivelent Spacing in meters 0.483 0.483 0.483 0.914 0.914 0.914 0.914 1.066 1.066 1.066 1.371 1.371 1.371 Resistance at 400 C in Ohms/Km 1.472 1.1566 0.5879 1.475 1.977 0.73 0.49 0.977 0.73 0.49 0.977 0.23 0.49 +Reactance Percentage regulation constant for in lagging P.F. Ohms/Km 0.8 0.9 Unity 0.3396 0.333 0.115 0.39 0.382 0.376 0.365 0.392 0.386 0.38 0.4085 0.043 0.398 80.5 65.33 38.16 0.1169 0.084 0.0671 0.05049 0.0212 0.0169 0.012 0.0095 0.0076 0.0058 85.5 68.9 38.57 0.1237 0.0871 0.068 0.0495 0.0218 0.0171 0.0126 0.0098 0.0077 0.0057 85.5 67.03 34.14 0.1219 0.0815 0.0606 0.0414 0.0204 0.0152 0.102 0.0091 0.0067 0.0045
* Reac tance of ACSR conductor is taken at 155 Amps / Sq. cm. Example : 1km S/S A 500 kVA 2km B 500 kVA
Percentage voltage regulation at B for 11 kV feeder of Squirrel Conductor where Es = Sending end voltage kVA km between B & A = 500 x 2 = 1000 Er = Receiving end voltage kVA between A & SS = 1000 x 1 = 1000 Er = Es - [1R cos 0 + IX Sin 0] Total kVA = 1000 + 1000 = 2000 [Es - Er] Constant from table % Voltage Regulation = x 100 therefore % regulation total = kVA km x Es 100 2000 x 0.1237 = = 2.474 % 100 * This should not exceed 6% for LT & 12% for HT For L.T. Lines : The above procedure is also applicable for L.T. Lines by substituting T/C at place of S/S and load in HP in space of KVA at above load beam.
WBSEBEA - 206
SAMPLE CALCULATION FOR DETERMINING ACTUAL LOAD LOSS AT 750C FOR THREE WINDING TRANSFORMER (Ambient temp for resistence measurement & load test are 34oC & 35oC respectively.) TRANSFORMER READING Capacity in MVA - 35/25/10 Rated voltage in kv HV / IV / LV = 132 / 6.6 / 3 Rated current in Amps = 153.1 Hv = 2186.8 IV 1924.5 LV D. C. RESISTANCE OF WINDING Measured value of d. c. resistance of HV winding (betn IV-IN say) = 0.8162w. Per phase value = Rdc (Hv) = 0.816 2w Measured value of d.c. resistance of IV winding (betn 2U-2v say ) = 0.004325w Per ph. value = Rdc (IV) = 0.004325 x (3/2) = 0.00649w Measured value of d.c. resistance of L.V. winding (Between 3U-3V, say) = 0.001183W Per phase value = Rdc (LV) = 0.001183 x (3/2) = 0.00178w LOAD LOSS CALCULATION FOR HV-IV AT 25 MVA BASE : I2R loss for all th e 3 ph. in HV winding at 34oC. 25MVA 2 3x ( ) x 0.8162 = 29.274 kw 3 x 132kv
q
vector group = Ynd11d1 Phases = 3 Fren in Hz = 50 Tap possition = Nominal (at HV winding)
I2R Loss for all the 3 phases in IV winding at 34oC
1 25MVA 3 x ) x 0.00649 = 31.04 KW 3 3 x 6.6 kv Total calculated I2R loss at 34oC taken HV-IV at 25 MVA base = 29.274 + 31.04 = 60.314 KW Total calculated I2R loss at 35oC 235 + 35 270 (I2R loss) 34oC x = 50.314 x = 60.51 KW 235 + 34 269 Stray loss at 75oC Actual load loss meassured at 35oC for HV-1V = 79.49 KW Stray loss at 35oC = Actual load loss - calculated I2R loss = 79.49 - 60.54 = 18.95 KW I2R loss corrected to 75oC 235 + 75 310 (I2R loss) 35oC x = 60.54 x = 69.51 KW 235 + 35 270
WBSEBEA - 207
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Stray loss at 75oC. 235 + 35 270 (Stray loss) 35oC x = 18.95 x = 16.5 KW 235 + 75 310 Total full load Cu loss at 75oC = 69.51 + 16.5 = 86.01 KW q Load Loss calculation for HV-LV at 10 MVA base : I2R loss for all the 3 phases in HV winding at 34oC 10 MVA = 3 x ()2 x 0.8162 = 4.85 3 x 132KV I2R loss for all the 3 phases in IV winding at 34oC 2 1 10 MVA = 3 x ( x 0.00178 = 6.593 KW 3 3 x 3 KV)
Total calculated I2R loss at 34oC taken HV-LV at 10 KVA base = 4.685 + 6.593 = 11.278 KW Total calculated I2R loss at 35oC
q
235 + 35 270 (I2R loss) 34oC x = 11.278 x = 11.23 KW 235 + 34 269 Actual load loss measured at 35oC for HV.LV = 14.84 KW Stray loss at 35oC = Actual load loss - Calculated I2R loss = 14.84-11.32 = 3.52 KW I2R loss corrected to 75oC 235 + 75 310 (I2R loss) 35oC x = 11.32 x = 12.997 KW 235 + 35 270 Stray loss at 75oC 235 + 35 270 (I2R loss) 35oC x = 3.62 x = 3.066 KV 235 + 76 310 Total full load Cu loss at 75oC 12.997 + 3.066 - 16.063 KW LOAD LOSS CALCULATION FOR IV - LV AT 10 MVA BASE : I2R loss for all the 3-ph in IV winding at 34oC 1 10MVA 3 x ( ) 2 x 0.0649 = 4.966 kw 3 3 x
q
I2
R loss for all the 3 phases in LV winding at 34oC.
1 10 MVA 2 = 3x (- ) x 0.00178 = 6.593 kw 3 3x3

q
Total calculated I2R loss at 34oC taken IV-LV at 10 MVA base = 4.966 + 6.593 = 11.559
WBSEBEA - 208

q
Total Calculated I2R loss at 35oC 235 + 35 270 + = 11.559 x = 11.602 kw 235 + 34 269
= (I2R loss) 34oC
Actual load loss measured at 35oC for IV - V = 17.31 kw Stroy loss at 35oC = Actual load loss - calculated I2R loss = (17.31 - 11.602) = 5.708 kw 235 x 75 310 I2R loss to 75oC = (I2R loss) 35oC x = 11.602 x = 13.321 kw 235 x 35 270 Stray loss at 75 C 235 + 35 270 = (Stary loss) 35oC x = 5.708 x = 4.971 kw 235 + 75 310 Total full load cu loss at 75oC = (13.321 + 4.971) = 18.292 kw Calculation of total Load loss of the given three winding (HV - IV - LV) Transformer at 75oC
o
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Load loss at 75oC (25MVa) - do - (10 MVA ) - do - (10 MVA) W 1.2 at 35 MVA base W 1.3 at 35 MVA base W2.3 at 35 mva baseq (W 1.2 + W 1.3 + W 2.3) at 35 MVA base loss of all the three wdg. (w1, 2, 3)
= 86.01 kw' = 16.063 kw = 18.292 kw = 168.58 kw = 196.77 kw = 224.08 kw = 589.43 kw = (w1.2 + W1.3 + w2.3) /2 = 294.715 kw Loss of HV WDG W1 = (W1.2.3W 2.3) = 70 635 kw Loss of IVa WDG w2 (W1.2.3 - W1,.3.) = 97.945 kw Loss of LV WDG W3 = (W1.2.3 - W1.2) = 126.135 kw. Converting these losses to their respective MVA rating HV WDG loss at 35 MVA (W1) = = 70.635 kw IVWDG loss at 25 MVA (W2) = (25/36)* 97.945 = 49.972 kw LV WDG loss at 10 MVA (W3) = (10/35)* 126.135 = 10.297 kv Hence total loss of three WDG = (W1 + W2 + W3) = 130.904 kw Note : 1. The present calculation may be considered as supplement of calculation of loss for 2 winding transformer published in Power News, Vol.5 1995-96. 2. It is convenient to calculate the above through a suitable computer programming for planning / testing inspection engineers.
HV - IV (W1.2) HV - LV (W 1.3) IV - LV (W 2.3) = (35/25)* 86.01 = (35/25)* 16.063 = (35 / 10)* 18.292
WBSEBEA - 209
Sample Calculation for Determining Actual Load Loss at 750C For Transformer
(Ambient temp. for Resistance Measurement & Load Tests at 20oC & 24oC respectively)
q
Transformer Rating : Capacity = 800KVA, HV/LV = 6.6/0.415 KV Vector Group = DynII, Phases = 3, Tap position= nominal
Measured value of d.c. Resistance for HV winding (between 1U-1V, say) at 20oC = 0.3025 3 Per phase value = Rdc (HV) = 0.302 x = 0.453 2
Measured value of d.c. Residence for LV winding (between 2U-2V, say) at 20oC = 0.57 x 10-3 Per phase value = Rdc (LV) = 0.57 x 10-3 HV winding resistance per phase converted to 24oC (as land loss measurement is made at 24oC) = RHV (24) = RHV (20) 235 + 24 259 = 0.453 x = 460 235 + 20 255
LV winding resistance per phase converted to 24oC (as land loss measurement is made at 24oC) = RLV (24) = RLV (20) 235 + 24 259 = 0.57oC x 10-3 x = 0.6 x 10-3 235 + 20 255
HV side phase current at full load = (800/3 x 66) / 3 = 40.4 A LV side phase current at full load = 800 / (3 x 0.415) = 1113A I2R loss for all 3 phase in HV winding at 24oC = 3x 40.42 x 0.46 = 2252 W I2R loss for all 3 phases in LV winding at 24oC =3 x 11132 x (0.6 x 10-3) = 2237W Total calculated I2R loss at 24oC = 2252 + 2237W = 4489W Actual load loss measured at 24oC = 5120W
WBSEBEA - 210

q
Stray loss at 24oC = Actual load loss measured - Calculated I2R loss = 5120 - 4489 = 653W
I2R loss corrected to 75oC
235 + 75 310 = (I2R loss) 24oC x = 4489 x = 5373W 235+24 259

q
Stary loss at 75oC
235 + 24 259 = (Stray loss) 24oC x = 653 x = 546W 235+75 310

q
Total full load cu loss at 75oC = 5373 + 546W = 5919W Guaranteed load loss as stipulated in specification / order = 5600W x 1.15 = 6440W (15% tolerance as per IS) Conclusion : Loss within limit
WBSEBEA - 211
SURGE IMPEDANCE & ECONOMIC LOADING OF A OVER HEAD LINE

Definition of Surge Impedance Z : The Surge impedance Z of a line is the square roof of the ratio of the positive sequence impedance per unit length to positive sequence admittance per unit length Thus :
q
Z=
R1 + WL1 G1 = WC1
This definition gives the surge impedance as a vector, and is used for hyperbolic function in long-line problems. In most cases it is sufficient to use the expressions. positive sequence reactance positive sequence susceptance WL1 WC1 L1 C!
Z=
=
q
Surge Impedance Load : The surge impedance load at al given line to line voltage V is the load PN which a resistance having the ohmic value of surge impedance Z would impose at this voltage. Thus (KV)2 in MW Z
PN
where Z is ohms. Economic Loading : It is peculiar coincidence that the most economic voltage usually is found to correspond closely with Neutral or surge impedance loading i.e. when the leading volt-ampere due to line capacitance are balanced by lagging volt ampere due to line impedance.
q q
Surge Impedance Loading chart (overhead line) Line Voltage (KV) Surge Impedance (ohms) Surge Impedance Load (MW) Current (Amps) 132 350 50 220 275 315 240 500 400 290 550 800 750 265 2100 1600
WBSEBEA - 212
TINNED COPPER FUSE WIRE TABLE

The following Table is based on the information given in the I.E.E. Regulations 12th Edition 1950 talbe 21. Approximate sizes of fuse elements composed of tinned copper wises for use in semienclosed fuses. The figures are an approximate guide only the current at which the fuse will blow will depend upon the construction of the fuse holder in which the wire is used. S.W.. 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 16 14 13 Current Ratin of fuse in ampere 1.5 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0 8.0 8.5 10 12 13 14 15 17 20 24 29 34 39 45 65 73 78 102 130 Approximate fusing current 3 4 5 6 8 8 9 10 11 13 13 16 18 23 28 30 33 38 48 58 70 81 106 135 166 197 230 295
M.G. FUSE RATINGS FOR TRANSFORMERS Capacity of trans formers in KVA 5000 3000/3150 1500 / 1600 1000 750 500 500 250 100 75 63 50 25 H.T. Voltage Rating 33 KV " " " " " 11KV " " " " " " Size of T.C. fuse wire in S.W.G. 2 x 20 20 21 22 23 26 20 23 33 33 33 33 38 Horn gap length in mm (inches) 386 (15) " " " " " 205 (8) " " " " " "
WBSEBEA - 213
PAPER INSULATED POWER CURRENT RATINGS FOR 11KV SINGLE/3 CORE UNARMOURED Nominal Area Unarmoured 3 single core in of Conductoe Trafoil servings touching mm2 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 225 240 300 400 500 625 800 1000 Ground 63 78 93 115 140 165 185 210 240 260 270 305 355 395 445 495 550 Duct 62 82 96 115 140 165 185 205 230 250 260 285 335 365 410 455 495 Air 66 88 105 130 165 200 230 265 300 340 355 400 490 570 670 750 820 3 core unarmoured and served Belted Cable Ground 55 72 84 105 130 155 170 190 220 240 260 300 345 385 410 Duct 50 64 77 94 115 135 150 170 195 210 235 265 300 330 365 Air 50 65 79 100 125 155 175 200 230 260 275 315 375 425 480 Ground 60 73 92 115 140 165 185 210 245 270 285 310 360 405 435
WBSEBEA - 214
R CABLES (PILC) / ARMOURED / BELTED, SCREENED / SL CABLES. 3 core Aromoured & Served Belted calbes Air 59 77 93 115 140 175 200 230 265 280 315 355 405 460 520 Ground 58 72 84 105 130 155 170 190 220 240 250 280 320 360 385 Duct 49 64 74 92 115 135 155 175 200 220 225 250 285 310 345 Air 50 68 80 100 125 155 175 200 230 260 275 310 365 415 470 Ground 61 80 95 115 140 165 185 205 235 260 275 300 340 385 410 Duct 54 65 80 100 125 145 160 180 210 235 240 265 305 330 370 Air 59 77 93 115 140 175 200 230 265 280 310 345 395 450 510
ened Cables Duct 51 66 77 94 115 135 155 175 200 225 235 265 320 350 390
WBSEBEA - 215
ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR HEAT RESIST OR UNCARMOURED AND P.V.C. SHEATHED CABLES F (Maximum Conductor Tem
Laid in ground Conductor Area mm2 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 225 240 300 400 500 625 Single Core (3 Nos) Amp 20 28 36 46 60 77 101 117 140 164 205 228 256 280 304 316 345 380 403 456 Twin (Single) Amp 21 29 37 47 64 82 105 129 158 187 222 246 280 322 357 374 415 450 3/12 or 4 core (Single) Amp 18 24 33 41 54 70 89 108 119 158 193 216 246 275 304 322 357 392 427 462
In Single Single Core 3 Nos. Amp 20 28 35 43 60 76 97 117 135 158 181 199 222 246 258 264 286 322 345 374
WBSEBEA - 216
TING PVC INSULATED ARMEARED FOR WORKING VOLTAGE UPTO 1100 VOLTS. mperature 85oC)
In Air 3, 312 or 4 core (Single) Amp 16 21 27 35 46 59 74 90 111 135 164 183 205 234 268 275 304 340 368 398 Single 3 Nos. Amp 18 26 33 43 57 77 102 127 159 189 232 268 305 354 390 409 364 531 -586 671 Twin 3, 312 or 4 core (Single) (SDingle) Amp Amp 20 16 26 34 43 57 72 95 121 153 183 226 256 292 336 372 397 445 513 22 28 37 49 61 85 105 128 159 189 220 250 293 302 342 384 458 513 586
e Way Duct Twin (Single) Amp 18 24 32 40 53 68 89 108 135 164 199 222 246 281 304 322 357 404
WBSEBEA - 217
Aluminium Conductor PVC insulated armoured & serv (Maximum Conductor Tem
Laid in ground Conductor Area mm2 1.5 2.5 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 225 240 300 400 500 625 Single Core (3 Nos) Amp 1 7 24 31 39 51 66 86 100 120 140 175 195 220 240 260 270 295 325 345 390 Twin (Single) Amp 18 25 32 40 55 70 90 110 135 160 190 210 240 275 30 5 320 355 385 3 or 4 core (Single) Amp 16 21 28 35 46 60 76 92 110 135 165 185 210 235 260 275 30 5 335 365 395 Single Core 3 Nos. Amp 1 7 24 30 37 51 65 84 100 115 135 155 170 190 210 220 225 245 275 295 320
(Single
WBSEBEA - 218
ved cables for working Voltage upto 1100 vlts mperature 70 o C)

In Single way duct 3, or 4 core (Single) Amp 14 18 23 30 39 50 63 77 95 115 140 155 175 200 220 235 260 290 315 340 Single 3 Nos. Amp 15 21 27 35 47 64 84 105 130 155 190 220 250 290 320 335 380 435 480 550 In Air Twin (Single) Amp 16 21 27 35 47 59 78 99 125 150 185 210 240 275 30 5 325 365 420 3, or 4 core (SDingle) Amp 13 18 23 30 40 51 70 86 105 130 155 180 205 240 265 280 315 375 420 480
n e)
WBSEBEA - 219

CURRENT FORA.C. MOTORS Approx, Amps per phase taken by modern Induction motors, allowing reasonable efficiences and power factors. B.H.P. of Motor 1/8 Single Phase 230 Volts 1.0 1.8 3. 5 4.8 6.2 7. 4 8.7 10.0 11.8 14.0 17.5 20.0 24.0 36.0 47.0 59.0 70.0 91.0 135.0 183.0 227.0 400 Volts 0.6 1. 1 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.8 5.7 6.3 7. 0 8.2 9. 5 12.0 14.0 21.0 27. 0 34.0 40.0 53.0 78 .0 105.0 130.0 Two Phase 200 Volts 0.6 1.3 2.5 3.9 4.0 4.8 5.5 6.3 7. 0 8.5 10.0 12.0 14.0 21.0 26.0 32.0 38.0 51.0 7 5. 0 100 . 0 120.0 499 volts 0.3 0. 7 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.3 5.0 6. 5 7. 0 10.0 13.0 15.0 19.0 25.0 38.0 50.0 60.0 Three Phase 346 volts 400 volts 0.4 0.8 1.5 1.9 2. 2 2.7 3.0 3.5 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.5 9.0 13.0 17.0 21.0 25.0 33.0 48.0 63.0 79.0 0.3 0. 7 1.2 1.7 2.0 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.5 4.3 5,.0 6. 5 8.0 12.0 15.0 19.0 22.0 29.0 42.0 56.0 71.0 400 volts 0.3 0.6 1.0 1.4 1.7 2. 2 2.5 2.8 3.2 4.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 11.0 14.0 18.0 21.0 28.0 39.0 53.0 66.0 500 volts 0.3 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.9 2. 2 2.5 2.8 3.6 4.2 5.5 7. 0 10.0 13.0 16.0 19.0 25.0 36.0 47.0 58.0
1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 7 10 12 15 20 30 40 50
CURRENT FOR D.C. MOTORS

Approxmiate full load current (in amperes) assuming average efficiency. Volts H.P. 100 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 11 20 29 46 67 88 120 169 250 330 413 615 805 110 10 18 26 42 60 80 117 154 227 300 375 560 740 200 220 5 10 14 23 33 44 64 85 125 165 206 308 408 506 600 5 9 13 21 30 40 59 77 114 150 187 280 370 460 550 230 5 8 12 20 29 38 56 74 109 143 179 268 354 440 526 240 4 8 12 19 28 36 54 7 1 105 137 172 257 340 422 504 250 4 8 11 18 27 35 52 68 100 132 165 24 7 326 405 484 400 3 5 7 12 1 7 22 32 43 63 82 103 154 204 253 303 352 401 420 3 5 7 11 16 21 31 41 60 78 98 147 194 241 28 8 338 38 2 440 2 4 6 10 15 20 29 38 57 75 93 139 185 230 275 320 365 460 2 4 6 9 14 19 28 36 55 72 89 134 177 220 264 306 349 480 500 2 4 6 9 14 19 27 35 52 69 86 128 170 211 252 294 334 2 4 6 9 13 18 26 34 50 66 82 123 163 202 242 28 2 3 22 530 550 600 2 4 5 9 12 1 7 24 32 47 62 78 116 154 191 228 266 303 2 3 5 8 12 16 23 31 46 60 75 112 148 184 226 256 292 2 3 4 8 1 1 15 21 28 42 55 68 103 136 168 202 235 268
WBSEBEA - 220
CURRENT RATINGS
FOR ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR CABLES SUBJECT TO VOLTAGE DROP Vulcanized Rubber, P.V.C. or Polythene Insulated Cables including tough rubber, P.V.C. lead sheathed types
SINGLE-CORE
CONDITIONS OF INSTALLATION Bunched and enclosed in one conduit, troughing or casing or Bunched in free air or in an open trench Ambient temperature : 30oC (86oF)
Size of conductor Nominal area mm2 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 Number and diameter of wires mm 1/1.40 1/1.80 1/2. 24 1/2-80 1/3.55 7/1.70 7/2.24 7/2.50 7/3.00 19/1.80
2 cables d. c. or single-phase s.c. Current rating amp 10 15 20 27 34 43 59 69 91 Approximate length of run for I-volt drop metres 2-3 2-5 2-9 3.4 4.3 5.4 6.8 7.2 7.9
3 or 4 cables balanced three-phase Current rating amp 9 12 17 24 31 38 54 62 82 Approximate length of run for I-volte drop metres 2.9 3.6 3.9 4.3 5.4 7.0 8.5 9.3 10.1
4 cables d.c. or single - phase s.c. Current rating amp 9 11 15 21 27 35 48 55 69 Approximate length of run for I-volte drop metres 2.5 3.4 4.1 4.3 5.4 6.8 8.5 9.0 10.0
* At rated current
Ratings for larger insulated cable upto 625 mm2 are given in Tables 13 and 15
Ambient Temperature ... ... Rating Factor Grouping Factor Number of cables Rating factor
25 oC (77oF) 1.13
35oC (95oF) 0.86
40oC (104oF) 0.69
45oC (113oF) 0.47
10
12
18
20
D.C. or single-phase A.C. (2 cables per circuit) A.C. balanced three phase (3 cables per circuit, excluding neutral)
0.7 0.8
0.65
0.6 -
0.6
0.55
0.5 -
WBSEBEA - 221
CURRENT RATINGS
FOR COPPER CONDUCTOR CABLES SUBJECT TO VOLTAGE DROP Vulcanized Rubber Insulated Cables SINGLE - CORE
CONDITIONS OF INSTALLATION Number of cables in run : 3 or 4 (balanced three-phase) Run in free air or open trench (for cables in throughing or casing, see note below) Ambione temperature : 30oC (86oF)
Cable Sheath
Approxmate length of fun for I-volt drop* Nominal Number and Flat Trefoil Flat Trefoils area diameter of formation formation formation formation inches wires inch amp amp metres metres 1 .15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .75 1.0 19/.083 37/.072 37/.083 37/.103 61/.093 61/.103 91/.103 127/103 155 200 245 325 425 480 610 735 140 185 220 295 360 410 520 630 11.6 11.9 11.9 11.0 7.9 7.6 6.7 6.4 13.4 14.0 15.0 15.0 14.3 13.7 12.5 11.0
Sized of conductor
Current rating a.c.
T.R.S. or Taped AND BRAIDED
WBSEBEA - 222
CURRENT RATINGS
FOR ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR CABLES SUBJECT TO VOLTAGE DROP* Vulcanized Rubber, P.V.C. or Polythene Insulated Cables* sheathed with tough rubber, P.V.C. lead
TWIN, 3-CORE AND 4-CORE

CONDITIONS OF INSTALLATION One cable in run In conduit, troughing or casing or In free air or open trench Ambient temperature : 30oC (86oF)
Size of conductor
One twin-core cable d.c. or single-phase s.c Current rating Approximate length of run for I-volt drop+ d.c. metres d.c. metres
One 3-core of 40core cable balanced three]-phase Current rating Approximate length of run for I-volt drop+ metres
Nominal area
Number and diameter of wires mm
mm
amp
amp
1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 225 240 300
1/1.40 1/1.80 1/2.24 1/2.80 1/3.35 7/1.70 7/2.24 7/2.50 7/3.00 19/1.80 19/2.24 19/2.50 37/2.06 37/2.24 37/2.50 37/2.80 37/3.00 61/2.50
10 15 20 27 34 43 59 69 91 118 135 162 181 209 240 263 289
2.3 2.5 2.9 3.4 4.2 5.3 6.6 7.1 7.7 9.0 9.8 10.8 11.4 12.3 13.5 14.0 14.6
2.3 2.5 2.9 3.4 4.2 5.3 6.6 7.1 7.7 8.8 9.5 10.3 10.7 11.2 11.7 11.9 12.1
7 11 14 19 24 30 42 48 62 82 94 114 127 146 169 185 202
3.7 3.9 4.8 5.5 6.8 8.7 10.8 11.7 13.1 14.7 15.7 16.8 17.5 18.4 19.1 19.5 20.0
* These ratings apply for P.V.C insulated and polythene insultated cables the maximum conductor size of which is 50 mm2 + At rated current Ambient Temperature. For ambient temperatures other than 30oC (86oF) multiply the current ratings and divide the lengths for I-volt d rop by the appropriate factor below . Ambient air temperature Rasing factor GROUPING FACTOR Number of cables Rating factor 25 o C (77 oF) 1.13 2 0.8 35 o C (95 oF) 0.86 3 0.7 40 o C (104 oF) 0.69 4 0.65 45 o C (113 oF) 0.47 5 0.6
WBSEBEA - 223

CONDUCTOR CHARACTERISTICS BASED ON I.S. 398/1961 Electrical Characteristics
Code Name Equivalent Cu. Copper/Alu. wire Area Sq. SWG Inch/mm2 resistance at 20C ohm/Km Approx. Amp Carrying 400 C 450 C each kg
Mechanical Characteristics
Stands AI/St. & Dia in mm each Conductor Approx Dia in Wt. in Approx mm Kg/ tensile Strkg/km km ength kg
ALL ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS Rose Gnat Iris Pansy Ant Aster 8 7 6 4 3 2 0.02/20.0 0.025/26.56 0.030/33.0 0.040/42.0 0.05/52.00 0.065/66.96 1.361 1.071 0.850 0.677 0.544 0.423 116 133 150 178 204 239 108 123 138 165 189 198 7/1.96 7/2.21 7/2.48 7/2.78 7/3.10 7/3.51 5.88 6.63 7.44 8.34 9.30 10.53 58 73 92 116 144 184 362 485 582 730 802 1157
A.C.S.R. CONDUCTORS Squirrel 0.02 Weasel Ferret Mink2 8 6 5 40/ 13/ 2.07 20/ 24/ 0.456 48/ 0.275 103.6 80/ 95/ 154.3 0.158 130/ 207.0 140/ 232.5 185/ 316.5 0.122 0.089 1.374 0.911 0.679 234 0.365 325 0.222 0.184 475 0.137 555 680 0686 115 150 181 217 270 300 382 430 440 520 515 630 737 107 139 168 6/1 250 6/7 4.72 354 2.36 398 30/7 2.79 482 30/7 3.18 630 737 6/1 2.11 6/1 10.98 6/1 14.15 30/7 30/7 2.59 19.53 30/7 3.0 22.26 30/7 3.71 54/7 3.18 Moose 0559 836 836 54/7 3.53 31.77 1998 159 6.33 7.77 9.00 255 12.27 394 16.62 18.13 844 21.00 1097 25.7 28.62 85 128 171 2107 318 3299 604 727 7950 976 10210 1492 1621 137 130 9127 2746 0.1 5758 6880 771 1136 1503
Raccoon 1 0.075 77.80 DOG2/0 1.57 Tiger 128.0 Wolf 0.15 65/3/0 4/0
Lynx 6/0 110 0.175 179.0 Panther 0.2 Lion 0.225 Goat 0.3 Zebra
WBSEBEA - 224
AAAC-HS ALUMINIUM ALLOY STRANDED CONDUCTOR

IS : 398 (Part IV) 1 979 (R-1990)
AAAC Size to size equivalent to ASCR
Nominal Alu-Area mm2
Stranding and Wire Dia mm
Sectional Area (Maximum) mm2
Approx Approx Overall Dia Mass Load mm kg/mm
Calculated Resistance at 20oC ohm/km
Approx Calculated Breaking KN
Mole Squirre1 Weasel RabbH Racoon Dog Wolf Panther Kundah Zebra Moose Morkulla
10 20 30 50 80 100 150 200 400 420 520 560
7/1.40 7/2.09 7/2.56 7/3.31 19/2.46 19/.2.79 37/2.49 37/2.88 37/3.92 61/3.19 61/3.55 61/3.68
12.21 24.02 36.03 60.24 90.31 116.20 180.20 241.16 446.60 487.50 603.70 649.00
4.47 6.27 7.68 9.93 12.30 14.45 13.95 20.16 27.44 28.71 31.95 33.12
33.38 65.68 98.56 164.70 248.10 320.30 496.30 663.80 1230.00 1345.00 1666.00 1791.00
2.759 1.41 0.944 0.5617 0.3789 0.2937 0.1903 0.1417 0.07648 0.07009 0..05678 0.05282
3.41 6.72 10.04 16.82 25.27 32.35 50.26 67.49 121.80 129.00 159.80 171.80
WBSEBEA - 225
WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD

Distribution Head Quarters (R. E. Wing)
Bidyut Bhawan (2nd Floor), Salt Lake, Calcutta - 700 091 Circular
Dated : 25/7/95 Sub : Drawal of H. T. and L. T. lines following the Maximum / Average permissible span indicated in the Cost Data as far as practicable. This is for information of all concerned afresh that the Maximum permissible spans and approximate average spans for drawal of H.T. and L.T. Lines have ben indicated in the Cost Data (Both R.E.C. & NON_ R.E.C) as under :
Sl. No. Support 1 1. 2 9 Mtr. x 400 Kgs. P.C.C Pole 8 Mtr. x 200 Kgs. P.C.C. Pole - do -
Net size of conductor 3 3 x 100 mm Sq. ACSR 'DOG' 3 x 50 mm Sq. ACSR 'Rabbit'
Voltage 4 33 kv
Maximum permissible span. 5 112 Mtr.
Approx.average span 6 90 Mtr.
2.
11 kv
73.5 Mtr.
60 Mtr
3.
3 x 30 mm Sq. ACSR ' Weasel' 4 x 50 mm. Sq. ACSR 4 x 25 mm Sq. AAC 'GENT' 4 x 20 mm. Sq. ACSR Squirrel 4 x 30 mm. Sq. ACSR Weasel'
11 kv
95 Mtr.
80 Mtr
4.
- do -
430 v
63 Mtr.
43 Mtr.
5.
- do -
- do -
59.5 Mtr.
43 Mtr
6.
- do -
- do -
97 Mtr.
80
7.
- do -
- do -
82.5 Mtr.
65 Mtr.
WBSEBEA - 226
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPANS (IN METERS) FOR TYPICAL LINES
Particulars 33 KV lines over 9.1 M.PSCC Poles with Dog/Raccon ACSR Conductor Sl. No. Particulars
75 Kg/m2 Wind pressure 75
100 Kg/M2 Wind pressure 75
75 Kg/M2 WP/ (140 Kg. Wt.) 8M.PSCC poles
100 Kg/M2 (200 Kg Wt.) 8M, PSCC poles
(i)
11 KV lines over 8.O.M. PSCC poles with ACSR Conductor (a) Rabbit (7/3.35) (b) Weasel (7/2.59) (c) Squirrel (7/2.11) 6.3 KV single phase line over 8.0 M. PSCC poles with ACSR conductor (HVD system) (a) Weasel (7/2.59) (b) Squirrel (7/2.,11) LT. 3.5 wire (Vertical formation) lines over 8.O M. PSCC pole with ACSR conductor (a) 3 x Rabit + 2 x Squirrel (b) 3 x Weasel + 2 x Squirrel (c) 5 x Squirrel Lt.3 4 Wire line : (a) Rabbit (7/3.35) (b) Weasel (c) Squirrel (7/2, 11) L.T. 1 3 wire : (a) Weasel (7/2.59) (b) Squlrrel (7/2.11) Lt. 12 wire : (a) Squirrel (7/2.11) (b) Squirrel (City)
65 80 100
70 90 90
(ii)
110 110
110 110
(iii)
54.5 65.5 67
67 77 45
(iv)
62.5 77.5 91
66.5 82.5 100
(v)
67 67
67 67
(vi)
67 45
67 45
WBSEBEA - 227
WT. OF MATERIAL
Description R.S. Joists ISLB ISLB ISLB ISMB ISMB ISMB Channels ISLC ISLC ISLC ISLC ISLC ISMC Size (mm) 2125 x 75 150 x 80 175 x 90 125 x 75 150 x 80 175 x 90 75 x 40 100 x 50 125 x 65 250 x 100 75 x 40 125 x 65 100 x 50 x 6 150 x 75 x 8 40 x 40 x 6 Angles ISA ISA ISA ISA 25 x 25 x 3.0 40 x 40 x 3 50 x 50 x 6 65 x 65 x 6 65 x 65 x 8 65 x 65 x 10 ISA ISA 75 x 75 x 8 75 x 75 x 10 100 x 100 x 10 40 x 40 x 6 75 x 40 x 6 wt. per meter (kg) 11.9 14.2 16. 7 13.0 14.9 19.3 5.7 7.9 10.7 28.0 6.8 12.7 10 14.4 9.2 1.1 1.8 4.5 5.8 77 9.4 8.9 11.0 14.9 3.5 6.8
WBSEBEA - 228
FLATS Size 25 x 6 25 x 10 35 x 6 35 x 10 40 x 6 40 x 8 40 x 10 45 x 6 45 x 10 45 x12 50 x 6 50 x 8 50 x 10 50 x 12 50 x 16 65 x 6 65 x 8 65 x 10 65 x 12 65 x 20 Nuts & Bolts Dia 3/8", length 1" = 32 No/kg Dia 1/2", 1" -0" = 14 No/kg Dia 5/8", 1"-0" = 8 No./kg Wt/m 1.2 2.0 1.6 2.8 1.9 2.5 3.1 2.1 3.5 4.2 2.4 3.1 3.9 4.7 6.3 3.1 4.1 5.1 6.1 10.12 G I Wire 4 swg = 0.214 kg/.mt 6 swg = 0.167 kg/mt 8 swg = 0.102 kg/mt 10 swg = 0.066 kg/mt 12 swg = 0.048 kg/mt Stay wire 3/12 swg = 0.144 kg / mt 7/12 swg = 0.73 kg/mt 7/10 swg = 0.465 kg/mt 7/12 swg = 0.333 7/14 swg = 0.208 kg/mt Size 75 x 6 75 x 8 75 x 10 75 x 12 75 x 20 100 x 10 110 x 12 100 x 16 100 xc 20 150 x 25 200 x 10 200 x 12 200 x 25 250 x 12 250 x 20 250 x 25 300 x 12 900 x 6 wt/m 3.5 4.7 5.9 7.1 11.8 7.8 9.4 12.6 25.7 29.4 15.7 28.8 39.2 23.6 39.2 49.1 28.3 42.4
GI Barked wire = 0.1 kg/mt Shadle strup without mt = 0.414 kg/pain shadal strap with not bolbs = 0.525 kg/pain.
D' iron clamp = 0.487 kg/mt Twisted strap with nut & bolts = 0.918 kg/pin
WBSEBEA - 229
WATTAGE OF ELECTRIC DOMESTIC APPLIANCES

Clothes dryer (centrifuge) Electric Shaver Floor Polisher Hair dryer Heating Pad Heating Screen Hot Plate Single Immersion Heater Iron Automatic Iron non-automatic iRONING MACHINE Miniature range (hotplate) Radiant heater (elec. fire) Radiator hot water Radio single circuit Rage Kitchen Rapid Cooker Refrigerator Roaster Television set Toaster Vaccume Cleaner Washing Machine without electricity heater : Water Heaters : Immersion Rad Small 8 Lts. (161/2-2 ) (Instant Leaser) Medium 15 Lts. Large 80 & 60 Lts. Air Conditioners : 1.5 Tonne 2.0 Tonne Tube light 24" Tube Light 48" Night Lamp Rape Recorder Mosquito Replacnt Air Cooler Oven Video 100 10 300 100 60 1000 1500 1000-2000 1000 500 1500 & 1800 2200 & 2500 1500 1500 30 6500 to 7800 1200 to 1 600 100 to 160 1500 150 to 300 500 150 tto 300 (700 - 750) 300 1000 1000 1200 to 2000 3000 3000 to 4000 4000 to 6000 2250 3000 20 40 15 20 5 170 1000 w 40w.
WBSEBEA - 230
READY RECKONER FOR MONT
(1000 watts used for 1 hr =
No. of Units for the Month No. of Hrs. per d

Tape of appliances Lamp wattage 25 40 60 75 100 50 50 60 70 40 550 750 1000 2000 3000 6000 1000 1200 1500 550 750 1000 1500 1/2 0.355 0.6 0.9 1.125 1.5 0.75 0.75 0.9 1.5 0.6 8.25 11.25 15 30 45 90 15 18 22.5 8.25 11.25 15 22.5 1 0.75 1.2 1.8 2.25 3 1.5 1.5 1.8 2.1 1.2 16.5 22.5 30 60 90 180 30 36 45 16.5 22.5 30 45 2 1.5 2.4 3.6 4.5 6 3 3 3.6 4.2 2.4 33 45 60 120 180 360 60 72 90 33 45 60 90 3 2.25 3.6 5.4 6.75 9 4.5 4.5 5.4 6.3 3.6 49.5 67.5 90 180 270 540 90 108 135 49.5 67.5 90 135 4 3 4.8 7.2 9 12 6 6 7.2 8.4 4.8 66 90 120 240 360 720 120 144 180 66 90 120 180
Ceiling Fan 36" Ceiling Fan 48" Ceiling Fan 50" Ceiling Fan 60" Table Fan 16", 14", 12" Electric Iron Dhobi Iron Geyser (2KW) 1ph. (3kw) 3ph. (6kw) Storage 1 kw Type 1.2 kw Heater 1.5 kw Immersion Rod
WBSEBEA - 231
NO. OF UNITS FOR THE MO

Type of appliances Stove Cooker Toaster Mixer (Big) Air Conditioner 1.4 kw 1 Ton 1.8 KW Refrigerator Small 1/4HP Elctrolux Washing machine Cloth Drier/spin drier Radiator Elect Clock Radio TV Electric Kettle Oven 2 plates 3 KW 3 plates 5 KW Cooking Range 5 KW Radio gram Stereo system wattage 750 1000 1500 100 200 1400 1800 200 300 200 200 1000 5 50 150 750 1000 300 5000 5000 100 50 1/2 11.25 15 22.5 15 3 21 27 3 4.5 3 3 15 0.075 0.75 2.25 11.25 15 45 75 75 1.5 0.75 1 22.5 30 45 30 6 42 54 6 9 6 6 30 0.15 1.5 4.5 22.5 30 90 150 150 3 1.5 2 45 60 90 60 12 84 108 12 18 12 12 60 0.3 3 9 45 60 180 300 300 6 3 3 67.5 90 135 90 18 126 162 18 27 18 18 90 0.45 4.5 13.5 67.5 90 270 450 450 9 4.5 18 90 120 360 600 600 12 90 120 180 120 24 168 216 24 36 24 24 120 0.6
No. of Hrs. per d
WBSEBEA - 232
ASSESSMENT OF BILLS ( [I] IN CASE OF L & MV CONSUMER)
(a) For Domestic / Non-domestic / Commercial / Agricural consumer KW x DF x Hx LF ONTHS OF 30 DAYS KW = connected load, Df = Demand Factor H - Consumption hours asseged LF = Load factor
day
5 112.5 150 225 150
Category
Demand Factor
Load Factor
10
11 247 330 495 330 66 462 594 66 99 66 66 330 1.65 16.5 49.5 267 330 990 1650 1650 33 16.5
135Domestic 157.5 180Non-Domestic 210 270Agriculture 315 180 210
180 0.7 240 0.8 360 1 240 336 432 48 72
202.5 270 405 270 378 486 54 81

H 54
225 20 % 30 % 300 50 % 450 300 60 420 540 60 90

D 60 DF 24 60 0.25 24 3000.25 30 1.5 0.2 24 0.15 15 0.2 24 24 45 0.2 24 225 0.2 24 0.2 300 24 0.2 24 9000.15 241500 0.15 24 0.15 1500 24 0.15 30 0.15 24 24 15 0.15 24 0.15 24 0.2 30 0.5 24 0.25
HP - Load Found 210 H = Hour / day 252 294 270 D = Working day / month 324 378 (1-DF) = Discount factor 30 E = Efficiency 36 42
(b) 30 For industrial consumer = HP x 0.746 x H x D (1-DF) / E 36 42 48 54
45 30 30 150 0.75 7.5 22.5 112.5 150 450 750 750 15 7.5
54 36 Sl.No. 36 180 0.9 9 27 135 180 540 900 900 18 9

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
63
Nature of Industry 42 48
42 48 Ice Plant Hushing Mill 240 210 Cinema Hall 1.2 1.05 Wheat Grinding 10.5 12 Saw Mill 31.5 36 Lather Machine Motor 157.5 Garage 180 Welding Machine 210 240 Oil Mill 630 7210 Straw cutting Dal Grinding1200 1050 Painting 1050 1200 Coal Briauette 21 24 Medicine Soorki Mill 12 10.5 Drilling Spice Grinding Ice Cream Factory Stone Crusher
54 16 16 270 16 1.35 8 13.5 12 40.5 12 12 202.5 12 270 16 810 8 8 1350 8 1350 8 27 8 8 13.5 8 12 8 16
WBSEBEA - 233

(ii) In case of high & extra high voltage consumer MD x 14 x LF x D MD = either maximum demand / connected load / MD recorded at the time inspection, which ever is highest H = Number of hours LF = Load factor = 80% D = Number of day (25 to 30)
Sl. No. Type of consumer
Amount of assessment bill
Completent Authority for granting installment. Divisional Manager Circle Manager Zonal Manager Circle Manager Zonal Manager C.E. (Dist) C.E. (Comml) Member (comml)
1.
low & medium voltage consumer
Upto Rs. 10.00 lakh Above Rs. 10.00 lakh but upto Rs. 20.00 lakh Above Rs. 20.00 lakhs
2.
Decentralised high voltage consumer
upto Rs. 20.00 lakhs Above Rs.30.00 lakh but upto Rs. 50.00 lakh Above 50.00 lakh
3.
Centralized bulk Consumers
upto Rs. 1.00 core Above Rs.1.00 crore
TIME FRAME FOR GRANTING NEW INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION Consumer having contractual demand Sl No. a) b) c) d) Steps Below 50 KVA Above 50 KVA & upto 500 KVA Within 15 days Within 15 days Within 90 days Within 30 days Above 500 KVA
Joint Inspection Issuance of quotation after joint inspection Payment of S/C charges Effecting physical connection of receipt of S.C. charges security deposit, test forms & execution of Agreement
Within 10 days within 10 days Within 60 days Within 15 days
Within 30 days Within 21 days Within 90 days Within 30 days
WBSEBEA - 234
CONVERSION TABLE AMPS VS MVA

Amps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 Amps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 11 KV 0.019 0.038 0.057 0.076 0.095 0.114 0.133 0.152 0.171 0.191 0.210 0.229 0.248 0.267 0.286 0.305 0.324 0.243 0.362 0.381 0.476 0.572 0.667 0.726 0.857 0.953 1.143 1.334 1.524 1.715 11 KV 52.5 105.0 157.5 209.9 262.4 314 .9 367.4 419.9 472.4 524.9 577 .4 629.8 682.3 734.8 787.3 839.8 892.3 944.8 997.0 1050.0 1312.0 1575.0 1837.0 2099.0 2362.0 2624.0 3149.0 3674.0 4199.0 4,724.0 33 KV 0.057 0.114 0.171 0.228 0.286 0.343 0.400 0.457 0.514 0.571 0.629 0.686 0.743 0.800 0.857 0.915 0.972 1.029 1.086 1.143 1.429 1.715 2.000 2.286 2.572 2.858 3.429 4.001 4.573 5.144 33 KV 17 35 52 79 87 105 122 140 157 175 192 210 227 245 262 280 297 915 323 350 437 525 612 700 787 875 1050 1225 1400 1575 66 KV 0.114 0.229 0.343 0.457 0.572 0.686 0.800 0.915 1.028 1.143 1.257 1.372 1.486 1.600 1.715 1.829 1.943 2.058 2.172 2.296 2.858 3.429 4.001 4.73 5.144 5.716 6.8559 8.002 9.145 10.288 66 KV 8.7 17.5 26.2 35.0 43.7 52.5 61.2 70.0 78.7 87.0 96.0 105.0 114.0 122.0 131.0 140.0 149.0 157.0 166.0 175.0 219.0 262.00 306.0 350.0 394.0 437.0 525.00 612.0 700.0 787.0 132 KV 0.229 0.457 0.686 0.914 1.143 1,372 1.600 1.829 2.058 2.286 2.515 2.744 2.972 3.201 3.429 3.658 3.887 4.115 4.344 4.573 5.716 6.859 8.002 9.145 10.288 11.432 13.718 16.004 18.2909 20.557 132 KV 4.3 8.7 13.0 17.5 21.9 26.2 30.6 35.00 39.4 43.7 48.1 52.5 56.9 61.2 65.6 70.0 74.3 78.7 83.1 87.5 109.0 131.0 153.0 175.0 197.0 218.0 262.0 306.0 350.0 394.0 220 KV 0.381 0.762 1.143 1.524 1.905 2.286 2.667 3.048 3.429 3.810 4.192 4.573 4.954 5.335 5.716 6.097 6.478 6.859 7.240 7.621 9.526 11.432 13.337 15.242 17.147 19.053 22.863 26.674 30.484 32.295 220 KV 2.2 4.4 6.6 8.7 10.9 13.1 15.3 17.5 19.7 21.9 24.0 26.2 28.4 30.6 32.8 35.0 37.1 39.4 41.5 43.7 54.7 65.6 76.5 87.5 98.4 109.3 131.2 153.0 175.0 197.0 400 KV 0.69 1.39 2,08 2.77 3.46 4.16 4.85 5.54 6.23 6.93 7.62 8.31 9.01 9.70 10,.39 11.08 11.78 12.47 13.16 13.86 17.32 20.78 24.25 27.71 31.18 36.64 41.57 4850 55.52 62.35 400 KV 1.4 2.9 4.8 5.7 7.2 8.7 10.8 11.5 13.0 14.4 15.9 17.3 18.8 20.2 21.6 23.8 24.5 26.0 27.4 28.9 36.9 43.3 50.5 57.7 65.0 72.2 86.6 101. 0 115.0 130.0
WBSEBEA - 235
METER READING INSTRUMENT

TROUBLE SHOOTING OF FLEXICOM TYPE MRI
Problem Symptoms 1. MRI seems in a Hang Mode (While using MRI S/W, user finds that MRI does not respond to any keyboard command and Display remains blank.] [MRI does not give Display Unit user feels that keyboard is working]. Possible Reasons 1. MRI remains unused more than two weeks without Rechargeable NiCd batteries / with discharge NiCd batteries. 2. Battery Pack is inserted with wrong polarity. 3. Back cover with s trip is not screwed well. 4. External NiCd Batteries are not available in the MRI for long duration. 5. User has scrolled the Window where no text updation is found (Display remains Blank). Initial Operation before sending the MRI to SML 1. Press < Super Shift > and <L> keys to transfer working window (20 x 4) to the left side of the total DOS window (80 x25). 2. Press four keys (<T,Y,Down ArrowKey, Ehter>) of the right most column simultaneously until screen is clear with a beep. (It is required to keep these keys pressed for about 10-15 seconds. Momentarily pressing & releasing these keys may not rest the MRI.) 3. Check that External NiCd Batteries are inserted in the MRI. 4. Check that Battery Pack is inserted with correct polarity. 5. Charge the MRI fully for 1012 hrs. 6. If display comes back by any of above action prepare MRI before using it for field application. 7. If problem is not solved, contact SML Office. 1. Do same operation 1.1.2 2. If problem is not solved, contact SML Office.
2. MRI does give display but does not respond to any key pressed.
Generally this kind of phenomenon may occurs due to overcharged NiCd batteries in case of FLX1/ FLX5. 1. Meter may not powered up 2. Cable breakage 3. Cable is not properly connected 4. Damaged Optical Head.
3. MRI is not reading Meter while read option is chosen (COMMSFAIL)
1. Check Meter is POWERED UP. 2. Check OPTO whether window of METER is clean or not. 3. Connect cables properly. 4. Try to communicate with other Meter to isolate whether problem lies with MRI/Cable or with the Meter. 5. Change the cable for cable checking. 6. Make sure that the connector is inserted properly. Precautions : 1. Do not fold the cable with sharp bend near MRI connector. It will lead to wire breakage.
WBSEBEA - 236

Problem Symptoms Possible Reasons Initial Operation before sending the MRI to SML 1. No memory resident programm should run on PC such as Side Kik, Clock, etc. 2. Connect cables properly. 3. Keep the set-up same and change the cable for cable checking. 4. Keep the set- up same and check communication with other PC. 5. Do not use DOS shell for executing SEMS_PAK. 6. Also refer section 5.3 for baudrate setting for SuperLink user. Precautions : 1. Do not fold the cable with sharp bend near MRI connector. Refer section 2.2 for toggling NumLock & AlphaLok mode. Press <AlphaLock> key for toggling between Alphabat & Numerickeys. Press < SuperShift> +R for toggling between Numeric & arrows keys mode.
4. While Transferring / Receiving data to/from computer, BCS gives COMMS FAIL.
1. Cable breakage (MRI-PC). 2. Cable is not properly connected. 3. Using Windows shell to execute SEMS_PAK. 4. Communication Setting at BCS side is not proper. 5. Loaded Memory resident program at BCS side Ex. Clock, Side Kick.
5. In TERMINAL mode of MRI software, keys are not working as per notation. Examples : 1. I have problem typing V1, V2. 2. I have problem using delete key to delete wrong character.
1. Keyboard in a AlphaLock mode. 2. Keyboard in a NumLock mode.
6. MRI gives "Bad or Missing Command Interpreter" while resetting MRI.
1. User has removed COMMAND.COM line from CONFIG. SYS or given wrong PATH. 2. COMMAND.COM is corrupted or deleted.
1. Load Command.COM with exact path from : _promot. Ex. C:\DOS/COMMAND.COM. After getting DOS prompt change the contents CONFIG.SYS file as per default setting. 2. Take COMMAND.COM from other working MRI to PC and transfer the same into nonworkable MRI if FWCONFIG utility is supplied to the user otherwise send back to SML. 1. Press key marked "O" with "shift" key.
WBSEBEA - 237

TROUBLE SHOOTING OF ANALOGIC TYPE MRI Problem Symptoms Possible Reasons MRI seems in a Hang Mode [While using MRI S/W, user finds that MRI does not respond to any keyboard command and Display remains blank.] [MRI does not give Display but user feels that keyboard is working.] 2. MRI shows error to close the files. 3. MRI is not reading Meter while read option is chosen (COMMSFAIL) 1. Key marked " " is pressed with "Shift" key. Initial Operation before sending the MRI to SML 1. Press key marked "O" with "shift" key.
1. Battery become low
1. Put MRI on charger after RESET of the MRI. 1. Check Meter is POWERE UP. 2. Check OPTO whether window of METER is clean or not. 3. Connect cables properly. 4. Try to communicate with other Meter to isolate whether problem lies with MRI/Cable/ with the Meter. 5. Change the cable for cable checking. 6. Make sure that the connect is inserted properly. Precautions : 1. Do not fold the cable with sharp bend near Meter connector. It will lead to breakage. 1. No memory resident programme should run on PC such as Side Kick, Clock etc. 2. Connect cables properly. 3. Keep the set-up Same & change the cable for cable checking. 4. Keep the set-up same a check communication with other PC. 5. Do not use DOS shell executing SEMS PAK. Precautions : 1. Do not fold the cable with sharp bend near meter connector.
1. Meter may not be powered up 2. Cable breakage. 3. Cable is not properly connected. 4. Damaged Optical Head.
4. While Transferring / Receiving data-to / from computer. BCS lives COMMS FAIL.
1. Cable breakage (MRI-PC) 2. Cable is not properly connected. 3. Using Windows shell to execute SEMS_PAK. 4. Communication Setting at BCS side is not proper. 5. Loaded Memory resident program at BCS side Ex. Clock. Side kick.
5. In TERMINAL mode of MRI software, keys are not working as per notation. Example : 1. I have problem typing V1, V2 2. I have problem using delete. 3. Key to delete wrong character.
1. For capital letters use caps lock key (F key) at key board. 2. For deleting the character use shift and backsp.
WBSEBEA - 238

Problem Symptoms Possible Reasons Initial Operation before sending the MRI to SML 1. Normal penavior. 2. Charge MRI and reset it.
6. Takes lot of time to come to DOS command line after selecting Quit uption of the main menu.
1. Updating diagnostic information. 2. Battery low does not allow it to proceed further after showing the halting signal.
7. MRI takes lot of time to declare COMMS-FAIL.
MRI is configured for MF summator while reading meter.
1. Configure MRI for Meter, Who reading meters.
8. Dump data is declared unsuccessful after transferring some data.
Multi-tasking operations have been performed on computer
1. Repeat without doing any the other then what is suggest by the BCS software.
Don't do : 1. Do not press Power/resume key, when MRI operation is going on. 2. Do not work with MRI, when low battery message has come on display. 3. Do not press any key at keyboard of MRI, when operations are going on. 4. Do not reset the Unit. RESET the MRI only when the battery low warning comes and says you to reset the MRI. 5. Do not go to the Setup Menu (2nd key with the key marked 'S') and do not change any parameters there. Do. 1. When Battery low message comes on MRI display, put MRI on charging and reset the unit. Operate only when it is charged. 2. Before using the MRI keep MRI on charger for 3rd hrs. to charge it fully. 3. When MRI is used in laboratory, then connect charger if possible. 4. We recommend MRI to be kept in POWEr OFF if the MRI is not used for very long time. 5. Press POWER/RESUME switch for 1-2 second to make to MRI in ON condition whenever the screen blanks which shown the SUSPEND mode of the MRI.
WBSEBEA - 239
DISPLAY ITEMS FOR ABB ORDER NO. A ICMEC002201 WBSEB ORDER NO. P & SP - 11/2000 PC-11/240 P5
Sequence 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ID 888 002 003 004 SYS 006 007 888 002 003 004 SYS 006 007 008 Pxx Pdr Pxx Pdr SYS PhA Phb PhC PhA Phb PhC SYS Ltd. 020 Normal / Alternate Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate Tems Complete LCD Test Present Date Present Time Total kWh Delivered System Power Factor Rate C Max kVA Q1 Demand Reset count Complete LCD Test Present Date Present Time Total kWh Delivered System Power Factor Rate C Max kVA Q1 Demand Reset Count Rate C Max kW Delivered PB Total kWh Delivered* PB Total kWh Delivered PB Rate C Max kVA Q1* PB Rate C Max kVA Q1 System VAs A Phase Voltage B Phase Voltage C Phase Voltage A Phase Current B Phase Current C Phase Current Average Power Factor kwh-del Last Event Date Occurrence/Restoration Outage Log
PB stands for Previous Billing. * Displays the previous three months reading. where xx indicates the month. Like 01 For January, 02 for Feb & so on. It will appear in "lastes first" order Also Pdr indicates the reading at the time of Manual Demand Reset (if any)
WBSEBEA - 240
Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark. Display Identifiers Tis is used to identify the displayed quantity. Except for the energy and power identifiers, these identifiers can be turned on or off using the AlphaPlus software Unoike the numeric identifier, you cannto chagne the display identifier for a displayed quantity. All display identifiers are predefined as follows : ABCD COUNT CUM KWARh Indicates the rate period A, B, C or D of the displayed data (TOU only) : note that the active rate period blinks when displayed. Indicates a continuous demand reading; with CUM Indicates a cumulative demand value; used with KWARh Selectively, displayed portions of this identifier allows the meter to indicate power or energy as follows : kW, kWh, kVA, kVAh, kVAR, kVARh (the "V" is created by displaying half of the : W") Indicates a maximum demand value; used with kWARh Indicates the previous billing period, or previous season information when used with SEAS Indicates the rate period (TOU only) : used with ABCD Indicates the number of demand resets Indicates the previous season information (TOU only) Used with PREV to form PREV SEAS Indicates a total energy value; used with kWARh
MAX PREV RATE RESETS SEAS TOTAL
These display identifiers may be combined together in various ways to indicate a particular displayed quantity. For example RATE A kWh = kWh for rate period A (TOU only) : CONT CUM KW = the continuous cumulative kW demand ; MAX KW-the maxinim kW demand.
WBSEBEA - 241
VARIOUS MODE OF CONNECTION OF ACCUCHEK METER
ACCUCHEK
IR
IY
IB
VR VY VB
1S
1L 2S
2L 3S
3L
MUT
R Y B N
CLAMP ON CT 3,400 V, 50Hz, AC SUPPLY
TO LOAD SIDE
ACCUCHEK LT + CHECKING LT CT OPERATED METER USING CLAMP-ON CT (Checking system accuracy including external CTs)
ACCUCHEK
P
1S 1L
MUT
PHASE NUETRAL
TO LOAD SIDE
CLAMP ON CT
SINGLE PHASE 230 V, 50Hz, AC SUPPLY
ACCUCHEK LT +CHECKING SINGLE -PHASE CT OPERATED METER USING CLAMP-ON CT (Checking system accuracy including external CT)
WBSEBEA - 242
1 230 V, 50 Hz AC Supply
PHASE NUETRAL
CLAMP ON CT To Load Side
MUT
VR
1S 1L N
ACCUCHEK
ACCUCHEK LT* Checking Single Phase Direct Connected Meter Using Clamp-On CT
P
1S 1L
P
1S 1L
MUT
ACCUCHEK
PHASE NUETRAL
To Load Side
1 230 V, 50 Hz AC Supply
ACCUCHEK LT* Checking Single Phase LT CT

Meter Using 1A/5A Current Range
WBSEBEA - 243
R
1S 1L
Y
2S 2L
B
3S 3L
R
1S 1L
Y
2S 2L
B
3S 3L
MUT
ACCUCHEK
R Y B N 3, 400V, 50 Hz, AC Supply ACCUCHEK LT* Checking LT CT Operated Meter Using 1A/5A Current Range To Load Side
3, 400V, 50 Hz, AC Supply R Y B N
Clamp-On CT To Load Side
1R
1S 1L 2S 2L 3S 3L N MUT
1Y
1B
VR
VY
VB
ACCUCHEK
ACCUCHEK LT* Checking Direct Connected Meter Using Clamp-On CT
WBSEBEA - 244
DATA FOR VARIOUS

MATERIALS Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. Plain cement concrete (1:2:4)m3 Plain cement concrete (1:3:6)/m3 Plain cement concrete (1:4:8)/m3 Reinforced cement concrete (1:11/2 : 3)m3 Rinforced cement concrete (1:2:4)/m3 Rough stone dry packing / m
3
Description of work
Stone (cum) 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 1.10 1.10 1.10 Bricks 512 Bricks 512 Bricks 512 Bricks 52
Sand (cum) 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.34 0.34 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.12 0.15 Cement=100.80 Cement =43.20
+ R.R. Masonry in C.M. (1:5)/m3 R.R.Masonry in C.M. (1:6)/m3 Brick work in C.M. (1:4)/m3 Brick work inC.M. (1:5)/m3 Brick work in C.M. (1:6)/m3 Hollow brick masonry in C.M. (1:5)/m3 Plastering in C.M. (1:3) 12 mm thick/10m2 Plastering in C.M. (1:3) 20 mm thick/10m2 Flush pointing R.R. in C.M. (1:3)/10m2 White washing (One Coat)/10m2 White washing (Two Coats) 10m2 White washing (Three coat) 10m2 White cement (One coat) 10m2 White cement (Two coats) 10m2 Snowcem paint (one coat)/10m
2
Sand = 0.21 Sand = 0.09 Lime=0.05 Cum Lime=0.07 Cum Lime=0.091 Cum White Cement= White Cement= Snowcem= Snowcem= Paint = Paint = Paint= Paint= Paint =
2
2.00 Kg 3.50 Kg 2.00 Kg 3.50 Kg 0.40 Ltrs. 0.70 Ltrs 1.20 Ltrs. 0.70 Ltrs. 0.50 Ltrs. 1.10 Ltrs. 0.90 Ltrs.
Snowcem paint (Two coat)/10m2 Plastic Emulison paint (One coat) OW/10m2 Plastic Emulsion paint (Two coats) / OW/10m2 Synthetic Enamel Paint-NWW (Two Coats)/10m2 Synthetic Enamel Paint - OWW (One coat) 10m2 Synthetic Enamel Paint-OIW (Two Coats)/10m2 Synthetic Enamel Paint - OIW (Two Coats) / 10m Synthetic Enamel Paint - OIW (Two Coats) / 10m2
Paint = Paint =
30. Red Oxide Paint - (One Coat) / 10m2 Paint = $ 30% of the skilled labour provided in the data may be taken as 1st class and remaining 70% as second class. + R.R. Random Rubble; *23x11x7 cm Traditional size burnt clay brick; *40x20x20 cm size cement concrete hollow bric NWW-New Wood Work; OWW-Old Wood Work; OIW - Old iron Work; NIW - New Iron Work, OW - Old Wall/Woo
WBSEBEA - 245
PLANNING OF
Size of rooms 1. Drawing room (Living) 2. Bed room 3. Kichen room 4. Dining Hall 5. Bath and WC 6. WC 7. Bath room Following are the minimum Requirements : Standard type Ordinary Type 4.2x4.8 M to 5.4x7.2 M (14'x16' to 18'x24') 4.2x4.8 M (14'x16') 3.0x3.0 M (10'x10') 4.2x4.8 M to 4.8 to 6.0 M (14'x16' to 16'x20') 1.8x2.5 M (6'x8') 4.2 x 4.8M (14' x 16') 3.0x3.5 M (10'x12') 2.5x3.0 M (8'x10') Combined drawing and dining room 1.8x1.8 M (6'x6') 1.2x1.2M (4'x4') 1.2x1.8 M (4'x6')
While planning the Building its functional utility, cost, habits, taste, requireme
Rooms 1. 2. 3. 4. Living room Kitchen room Bath room WC
Minimum floor area of Rooms and heights : Floor Area Height 10 Sq. Mtr. (100 Sq. Ft) 6 Sq. Mtr. (60 Sq. Ft.) 2. Sq. Mtr. (20 sq. Ft.) 1.6 Sq. Mtr. (15 Sq. Ft.) 3.3 Mtr. (11') 3.0 Mtr. (10') 2.7 Mtr. (9') 2.7 Mtr. (9')
Minimum height of plinth : 0.60 M (2') Minimum depth of foundation-0.9 M (3') Thickness of Wall : 20 to 35 cms (8' to 10') Minimum aggregate area of opening of habitable rooms and kitchen excluding doors, shall not be less than :' 1) 1/10th of Floor area - for wet hot climate. (2) 1/6th of Floor area - for dry hot climate (3) 1/ 8th of Floor area - for climate which is neither dry hot nor wet hot. Size & Weight of Expanded Metal (XPM) Sheets Size of Mesh Dimensions of Strands Weight Size of Sheet Swm Lwm Width Thickness per sq. m normally mm mm mm mm kg stocked 100 250 6.25 3.15 3.082 75 200 6.5 3.15 4.282 2.5X3.75 25 75 3.25 2.24 4.564 25 75 3.25 1.60 3.262 12.5 50 3.25 1.60 6.525 2.5X2.75 12.5 50 2.5 1.6 5.019 Swm - short way of Mesh Lwm - Long way of Mesh For 10 Users. } Excluding thickness of wan L=1.8m B=0.6m H-1.35 m } Exclucing thickness of botton Stab. 0./15 m to be provided for Fexboard.
WBSEBEA - 246
Bottom width (inch)
3.5 4.312 3.937
PARTICULA USERS For 50 User L=3.45 m E B=0.7 m H=1.876 = E to be provid
BUILDING
Weight of square and round 3ars : 0.7843 Kg/cm2 per metre of 1 cft. of seal 490 lbs. Weight per metre Diameter Weight per metre Square Bar kg Round Bar kg or width mm Square Bar kg Round Bar kg 0.20 0.15 22 3.80 2.98 0.24 0.19 25 4.91 3.85 0.28 0.22 28 6.15 4.83 0.38 0.20 32 8.04 6.31 0.50 0.39 36 10.17 7.99 0.64 0.50 40 12.56 9.86 0.78 0.62 45 15.90 12.49 0.95 0.75 50 19.62 15.41 1.13 0.89 56 21.62 19.34 1.54 1.21 63 31.16 24.47 2.01 1.58 71 39.57 31.08 2.54 2.00 80 50.24 39.46 3.14 2.47 Weight in kg per sq. m. 39.25 47.10 62.80 78.50 94.20 109.90 Weights of MS plates (plain) Thickness Weight in kg. in mm per sq. m. 16 18 20 22 25 125.60 141.30 157.00 172.70 196.25
ents needs to be paid due attention for, considering funds at disposal
Diameter width mm 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10 11 12 14 16 18 20
hickness in mm 5 6 8 10 12 14
65x65x5 4.9 100x100x6 9.2 65x65x6 5.8 100x100x8 12.1 65x65x8 7.7 SS 1.75 3.74 6.55 3.5 50x50x6 4.5 BSS 2.25 5.77 12.98 4.25 50x50x5 3.8 BSS 1.97 5.13 10.10 3.937 75x75x6 6.8 LAR OF SEPTIC TANK FOR DIFFERENT 75x75x8 8.9 80x80x6 7.3 rs For 100 Users Excluding thickness of watt. L=4.35 m Excluding thickness of watt. } Excluding thickness of bottom Slab 0.15 m B=0.85 m H=2.25m - Excluding thickness of bottom Slab 0.15 m to ded as Fxeboard. WBSEBEA - 247 be provided as Fxeboard.
Particulars of Rails ght Distance Section Moment Total il in from top Moduli of inertia debth /yd) of rail to about about (inch.) NA (inch.) X-X X-X 2 (inch ) (inch4)
Weights of Indian Standard Equal Angles Size ISA Weight in Size ISA Wt. in kg/m kg/mm

SALIENT FEATURES OF REGULATIONS FRAMED BY WEST BENGAL STATE ELEETRICILY REGULAR COMMISSIONS TILL JAN' 2005 AS PES EA-2003 APPLICATION FOR SUPPLY Application by any person, firm or company for New Service/New Load of Existing Service/Additional Load/Shifting or alteration or Strengthening of Service/Street Lighting/Pump House (Temporary and Permanent connection) must be made to the West Bengal State Electricity Board in prescribed format in duplicate as mentioned hereunder. The prescribed format for application for Supply-Cum-Agreement is obtainable free of cost from: Voltage of supply Low & Medium Voltage Supply (Installed capacity upto 50 H.P) High Voltage Supply (Contract demand between 50KVA & 500 KVA) High/Extra HighVoltage Supply. (Contract demand above 500 KVA) Office Group Electric Supply Office. Distribution Circle Office Central Commercial Department Bidyut Bhavan.
At the time of application the prospective consumer has to make provisional payment in advnce against charges payable for the supply as shown below. Consequent upon making detailed calculation, necessary adjustment will be made through refund / realisation in the first energy bill. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) For Single phase L.T. Supply Rs. 2,000/- (Rupees two thousand only) For two phase L. T. Supply. Rs. 3,000/- (Rupees three thousand only) For three phase L.T. Supply. Rs. 4,000/- (Rupees four thousand only) For H.T. Supply upto a contract Rs. 50,000/- (Rupees fifty thousand only) demand of 125 KVA (v) For H.T. Supply above a contract Rs. 2,00,000/- (Rupees two lakh only) demand of 125 KVA The prospective consumer has also to make payment in advance against security deposit as below. After the final calculation of the requisite security deposit, the advance will be adjusted through the first energy bill. (i) 0 - 500 W @ Rs. 300/- only (ii) 500 -1 KW @ 500/- only (iii) For every additional KW or part thereof. @ Rs. 500/- only All industrial consumers shall have to produce the consent of the West Bengal Pollution Control Board before effecting power supply by the Board. ENFORCEMENT MECHANISM :If the Board fails to meet the specified guaranteed standards against various service areas laid down in these R egulations, the Board shall be liable to pay compensation to the consumer (s) for default against each item as specified below : Item (a) Failure to release new electric connection with due time (b) All other specific complaints specified under paragraphs 17.1, 18, 19 and 20 Year of Regulation's operation 1st year 2nd year 3rd year and thereafter 1st year (Urban & Rural) 2nd year (Urban & Rural) 3rd year and thereafter (Urban & Rural) Amount of compensation Rs.25/- for each additional day Rs.125/- for each additional day Rs.500/- for each additional day Rs.25/- for each addl. slab of time Rs.125/- for each addl. slab of time Rs.500/- for each addl. slab of time
WBSEBEA - 248

AGREEMENT On submission of duly filled up prescribed form for Application for supply cum Agreement along with the advance provisional amount of service connection charge and security deposit the applicant becomes entitled to obtain power supply by entering into an agreement. The Agreement, so executed, is valid for one year and will continue till substituted by a new Agreement which is required in case of reduction or enhancement of load/contract demand. For H.T. consumers the Board may require the consumer to furnish more details about the nature of load, working hours, load forecast for next 5 years etc. If the power supply to any consumer remains disconnected for a period of three months for nonpayment of electricity charges or any other charges or noncompliance of any direction by the Commission and no effective steps have been taken by the consumer to remove the cause of disconnection, the agreement of the licensee with the consumer for supply of electricity shall be deemed to have been terminated with consequential effect on expiry of such period of three months. This will be without prejudice to such other action or the claim that may arise from the disconnection of supply or related issues therefor. On termination of agreement, the licensee shall have the right to remove the service line and other installation through which electricity is supplied to the consumer. The temporary supply shall be automatically terminated after expiry of the period of contracted for. METER READINGS : (i) For supply of power at low voltage the readcings of the meter shall be taken by the prepresentative of the Board once in a quarter on or as near as practicable on the same day and month of each quarter between a period of 89 days and 93 days of the last meter reading unless specifically exempted by the Commission in deserving cases keeping in view the area of operation, type of consumer etc. In case of bi-monthly billing the meter readings shall be taken between a period of 58 days and 62 days of the last meter reading unless specifically exempted by the Commission. (ii) For supply of power at medium/high/extra high voltage, the readings of the said meters shall be taken by the representative of the Board once in calendar month on or as near as practicable the same day of each calendar month between a period of 28 days and 32 days of the last meter reading unless specifically exempted by the Commission. The readings so taken shall be binding and conclusive between the consumer(s) subject to sub-clause. (iii) Hereunder. (iv) The consumer (s) may send his/its/their representative at the time of the reading of meters but in case the consumer (s) does / do not arrange for his/its/their representative to be present or any such representative is not present for the reading of the meters, the readings of the meters taken by there presentative of the Board shall be conclusive and consumer (s) shall not have the right to raise any objection regarding the correctness or accuracy of such readings. DISCONNECTION FOR THEFT / TAM PERING ETC. (a) The Board may disconnect the supply if there is appropriate and sufficient reasons to suspect that the consumer is including in tampering the meter including the metering equipment or using tampered meter or enagage in any other improper acts as stipulated under Section 135 (1), 138 and / or 139 of the Electricity Act, 2003 and / or the consumer indulges in malpractice by improper use of electricity for a purpose other than for which the supply has been provided / intended or allows / extends supply of energy to any other premises or consumer or person from his connection. The Board shall serve in writing the detailed reasons for such proposed disconnection along with the right of the consumer or the person in this regards to appeal against such disconnection. (b) The decision for disconnection under the Regulation shall be taken on the basis of available material on record at an appropriate level which should normally be not less than an Executive Engineer or its equivalent in case of LT. supply and Superintending Engineer or its equivalent in case of HT supply. However, depending upon circumstances of each case the consumer may me asked to explain on the alleged act of omission or commission before actual disconnection is made. The disconnection may be effected with out prejudice to others action in terms of the provision of the Electricity Act, 2003. (c) The charges for thieft of electricity / tampering etc. shall be calculated as per the relevant provisions of the Act and / or Regulation.
WBSEBEA - 249

DISCONNECTION FOR DISTRESS OR DAMAGE TO THE ELECTRICAL PLANTS, ELECTRIC LINES OR METER (a) The Board may disconnect the supply of electricity if the consumer uses any appliance or equipment or uses the energy in such a manner as may endanger the Board's service lines, supply mains, meters and other plants / equipment and works of the Board. However a notice in writing of not less than 24 hours shall be given to the consumers before such disconnection along with the reasons / cause of such disconnection. (b) The supply may be disconnected normally if the cause for the same is not removed within the notice period. (c) In emergent circumstance the Board may disconnect even within the notice period or without notice, if continuation of supply is likely to endanger supply mains, service lines and other plants or equipment or the work of the Board or endanger the life. In such a case the employee of the Board who is taking the decision to disconnect shall submit a report within 24 hours of disconnection to a officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer in case of L.T. supply and Superintending Engineer in case of HT supply. (d) The decision to issue the notice of disconnection shall be taken at appropriate level which shall not normally be less than an Assistant Engineer. DISCONNECTION ON REQUEST (a) The Board shall disconnect the supply of energy to a consumer within two (02) working days of making such request by the consumer. It shall be the duty of the consumer to clear all the outstanding payments payable by him to the licensee except the last bill for supply till the date of disconnection before making request for such disconnection. However, this should not hold for disconnection of supply by the Board and for any non payment the consumer may continue to be treated as consumer in default for the purpose of Regulation prescribed under clause 29 regarding 'Disconnection of Supply'. REDRESSAL OF CONSUMERS' GRIEVANCES In accordance with the West Bengal Electricity R egulatory Commission (guidelines for Establishment of Forum for redressal of Grievances of Consumers and Ombudsman) Regulation, 2003, a 3-Tier forum for redressal of consumers' grievances has been constituted by the Board. Tier -1 The Tier-1 of the forum for redressal of Grivevances h as been constituted at the office of each Circle Manager at Distribution Circle headed by the Divisional Engineer/Superintending Engineer (Electrical) attached with the Distribution Circle Office and designated as Circle Grievance Redressal Officer (CGRO). The consumer should approach Tier-1 initially within 2 months of the last of the period for which the grievance relates and his written grievance will be registered, acknowledged and a grievance no will be given. The grievance will be attended promptly, normally within 7 days from the date of receipt and in case it involves consultation with the other officers or needs a technical scrutiny then a provisional reply will be sent informing the consumer that his/her complaint is being looked into. Complaints of this type will be finally disposed off usually within 21 (twenty one) days from the date of receipt of the complaint from the consumer. Normally the Grievance Redressal Officer should deal with complaints without insisting upon the personal presence of the complainant. However, if the complainant desires to be heard in person and the Grievance Redressal Officer is of the opinion that it is necessary to give the complainant a hearing or if the Grievance Redressal Officer is not able to fully understand the grievance he may either talk to the complainant on the telephone to understand his problem and in required case he may ask consumer to come to the office. The decision of the Grievance Redressal Officer should be duly intimated to the consumer. In case the request of the consumer is not accepted, then the detail reasons will be given. During disposal of grievances the provisions of the Electricity Act, 2003, Rules and Regulations made thereunder shall be kept in view and fuly followed.
WBSEBEA - 250

Nothing contained in this guideline shall affect the rights and privileges of the consumer under any other law for the time being in force. In case the consumer has filed and application/case in any Consumer Forum or Court, the same has to be mentioned with all relevant details in the application. Tier-2 In case the consumer is not satisfied with the outcome of his complaint at tier-1 he may approach to tier-2 with all the r elated correspondence of Tier-1. Procedure is similar to that of Tier-1. The Tier-2 of the forum for redressal of Grievances has been constituted at the Distribution Zonal Office headed by one Superintending Engineer (Electrical) and designated as Zonal Grievance Redressal Officer (ZGRO). Tier-3 If the consumer is not satisfied with redressal at Tier-2 he may approach to Tier-3 with all related correspondence with Tier-1 and Tier-2 and the reply of the complaint shall be given within 7 days of the receipt of the grievance. The Tier-3 of the forum for redressal of Grievances has been consituted at the Corporate Head quarter at Vidyut Bhawan headed by the Chief Engineer (Corporate) and designated as Principal Grievance Redressal Officer (PGRO). Ombudsman Any consumer aggrieved by an order made by the Forum for redressal of Grievances of the consumers after Tier-3 may prefer an appeal in writing in the prescribed form as attached at the end of this charter within 15 days of the receipt of such order to the 'Ombudsman' appointed by the Hon'ble West Bengal Electricity Regulatory Commission. PLANNED INTERRUPTIONS. When there is a planned interruption of supply lasting more than 6 hours at a stretch, the Board shall notify the consumers at least 24 hours before the supply is cut off through announcements in radio / T.V., advertisement in leading dailies, beating of drums etc. and restore the supply within the time to be anounced. If the planned interruption is for more than 12 hours at a stretch, temporary arrangement will be made to provide power after 12 horus.
1. SERC Regulation No. 10/WBERC Subject Guidelines for Establishment of forum for Redressal of Grivences of consumer and Ombudsman Miscellaneous provision Conduct of Business Electricity Supply Code Phasing of open Acess in distribution/sale of Electrticity Standereds of performance of licensees relationg to consumer services Licensing & Conditions of Licences Tariff Notification Date Remarks
23/09/2003 12.11.2003 12.11.2003 05.02.2004 09.06.2004 Clause of security depsosit Tariff petition related format
11/WBERC 12/WBERC 13/WBERC 15/WBERC 16/WBERC
09.06.2004 09.06.2004 09.06.2004
17/WBERC 18/WBERC
WBSEBEA - 251

Up to date Govt. notification as per EA - 2003 2. Sub section (1) of section 127 of EA 2003 the officers of WBSEB function as appellate authority (1) for L & MV consumers (2) For decentralised Bulk Consumers (3) For Centralised Bulk Consumers 3. Circle Manager CE (Dist) C.E. (Commercial)
Sub section (1) of section 152 of EA 2003 the officers of WBSEB authorised for compounding of offence (1) for L & MV consumers Zonal Manager (2) For decentralised Bulk Consumers C.E. (Dist) (3) For Centralised Bulk Consumers C.E. (Commercial) Section 152 of EA, 2003 the Station Manger, D.E. & S.E. of WBSEB au thorised as Assessing Officer
4.
VSAT TECHNOLOGY
Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT) based Wide Area Network (WAN) is used for Voice & Data communication. The Network in WBSEB uses INSAT-3C satellite and operates in Extended - C band with uplink frequency band of 6921.5 - 6926 MHz and downlink frequency band of 4696.5 - 4701 MHz. The Network operates in Star / Mesh configuration for Data / V oice communication. The TDM/ TDMA data & voice connectivity works in star confirguration. In star confirguration the connectivity between two remote VSATs is always routed through Central HUB. The inbound (VSAT to HUB) information rate is 64 Kbps (which may be increased in future). The Outbound (HUB to VSAT) information rate is 512 Kbps. Mesh voice & data connectivity is provided using SCPC carriers in DAMA. In a mesh topology, the Central HUB establishes the link between two remote VSATs and after that the VSATs communicate directly with each other without any intervention of the Central HUB. Network Management System at HUB station performs the network monitoring, control and management operations from a system operator console. Management functions at the HUB station include provision of multipoint connections between HUB station and several VSATs such that monitoring and control of the VSATs can be effected continuously. The Network uses following multiple access protocols as per traffic requirements at different sites :A. TDM/TDMA : TDM/TDMA data network is engineered in star configuration with HUB facility at one central location and VSAT facility at other remote locations. The HUB provides both point to point or point to multipoint connectivity. VSATs communicates with HUB directly. However VSAT to VSAT communication is possible only via the HUB. The (TDMA) link from remote to HUB is called Inroute and the (TDM) link from HUB to remote is called Outroute. Central HUB transmits single outroute carrier, containing data pakets, to all remote sites in Time Division Multiplexed form. Data packets in outroute stream carry addresses of specific remotes to which they are aimed. The remote VSAT electronics receives the TDM stream and picks up data packets addressed to it. Remotes transmit to HUB through shared inroute channel in Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) format. The inroute is divided into a number of time slots. Different sites transmit at different times to avoid collision.
WBSEBEA - 252

B. DAMA NETWORK : Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA), SCPC works on Frequency Division basis where each earth station is allocated a unique frequency pair to communicate with other station. This allocation is done on demand after user requests for a connection. The network uses a pool of satellite channels, which are available for use by any station in the network. On demand a pair of available channels are assigned so that a call can be established. Once the call is completed, the channels are returned to the pool for an assignment to another call. HYBRID NETWORK : Hybird Network is a combination of DAMA and TDM/TDMA network. VSAT ELECTRONICS : The VSAT Electronics consists of Antenna, Solid State Power Amplifier (SSPA), Low Noise Amplifer (LNA), Up Converter, Down Converter, Indoor data & voice units and IF combiner / splitter electronics. Antenna size, SSPA rating and LNA depend upon the number & type of voice & data circuit that a VSAT shall support. The Indoor unit and the Outdoor unit are interconnected with IFL cable which is capable of carrying both signal and DC power required for the operation of Outdoor electronics. HUB ELECTRONICS : The HUB electronics consists of RF electronics and base band equipment. RF electronics consists of TWTA, Up Converter, Down Converter and LNA. The base band & IF electronics consists of Modulator, Demodulator, Coder, Decoder, HUB protocol processor, DAMA and TDM/TDMA NMS. The HUB protocol processor supports variety of protocols and data rates and interfaces to NMS. The protocol procssor converts the user protocol to space protocol for transmission over the satellite link. The packet switching exchange at the HUB does switching of data packets from one VSAT to other VSAT. The HUB base band equipment procesds inbounds signal received from various VSATs and generates TDMA outbound signal for transmission over satellite link. The outbound data is coded using FEC 1/2, modulated to IF frequency and fed to RF electronics. In the receive direction the inbound is demodulated, decoded and the resulting data passed to HUB processor. The RF electronics provides iterface between HUB base band equipment and satellite. The Up Converter converts the IF signals to satellite frequency and fed to TWT amplifier for amplifying to required level. In the receive direction, the RF signals received from satellite are amplified by LNA and Down Converted to IF frequency by Down Converter and fed to the IF and base band unit for further processing. The DAMA controller at the HUB provides allocation of pair of frequencies from the available pool to the originating and destination VSATs. DAMA controller supports inbound common signaling channel and outbound common signaling channel. NETWORK MNAGEMENT SYSTEM (NMS) : Network Management System performs the task of network operations and management. NMS provides the following facility : 3 Monitoring network status. 3 Configuration of all network components including VSATs. 3 Downloading of operational software to network components from Central HUB. 3 Recording detailed statitics of traffic, both network traffic and renmote traffic. 3 Recording details of network operations like events, billing and statistical data. 3 Fault diagnosis and display of alarms. 3 Generation of reports regarding configuration, faults, alarms, events and statistics.
WBSEBEA - 253
OVERVIEW OF THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CENTRAL HUB : Antenna Size Antenna Transmit Gain Antenna Receive G/T Frequency Range TWTA Power Out Put FEC Coding Modulation HUB Based Interface : Inbound Data Rate Outbound Data Rate Data Broadcast Access Mechanism : : : : : : : : 9M 54.4 db. 31.7 dB/deg K Transmit 6.7-7.025 GHz. Received 4.5 - 4.8 Ghz. 400 W. Rate 1/2 Conolutional Coding and Sequential Decoding. BPSK / QPSK. LAN Port _ IEE 802.3, UTP Port. Telephone/EPABX-FXS, FXO, 4 Wire E & M. 64 Kbps, and be upgraded to 128 Kbps. 512 Kbps. IP over LAN. Slotted Aloha, Pure Aloha, Transaction Reservation.
: : : :
TDM/TDMA VSAT Antenna Size Antenna Transmit Gain Antenna Receive G/T Frequency Range SSPA Power Out Put FEC Coding Modulation IDU Interface
: : : : : : : : : :
1.8M 40.3 db. 15 dB/deg K Transmit 6.7-7.025 GHz Received 4.5 - 4.8 GHz 5W Rate 1/2 Convolutional Coding and Sequential Decoding BPSK/QPSK. Serial Port - V.35 64 Kbps, RS-232 19.2 Kbps, LAN Port-IEE 802.3, UTP Port. Telephone/EPABX-FXS, FXO, 4 Wire E & M. TCP-IP, X.25, SLIP. Slotted Aloha, Pure Aloha, Transaction Reservation.
Protocols supported Access Mechanism
: :
WBSEBEA - 254
HYBRID VSAT Antenna Size Antenna Transmit Gain Antenna Receive G/T Frequency Range SSPA Power Out Put FEC Coding Modulation IDU Interface
: : : : : : : : : :
3.8 M 46.9db, 23.6 dB/deg K Transmit 6.7-7.025 GHz Receive 4.,5-4.8 GHZ 5W. Rate 1/2 Convolutional Coding and Sequential Decoding. BPSK/QPSK. Serial Port-V.35 64 Kbps, RS-232 19.2 Kbps, LAN Port - IEE 802.3, UTP Port Telephone / EPABX-FXS, FXO, 4 Wire E&M TCP-IP, X.25, SLIP, Clear Channel. Slotted Aloha, Pure Aloha, Transaction Reservatio. Binary Phase Shift Keying. Demand Assigned Multiple Access. Forward Error Correction. Gain/Temperature. Intermediate Frequency. Inter Facility Link. Local Area Network. Low Noise Amplifier Network Management Software. Quardrature Phase Shift Keying. Radio Frequency/. Single Carrier Per channel. Solid State Power Amplifier. Time Division Multiplexing. Time Division Multiple Access.
Protocols supproted Access Mechanism GLOSSARY : BPSK DAMA FEC G/T IF IFL LAN LNA NMS QPSK RF SCPC SSPA TDM TDMA
: :
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
WBSEBEA - 255
"E-SURAKSHA-A PRACTICAL APPROACH IN NETWORK SECURITY"

To get a clear idea on computer security, three main concept : threat, vulnerability and attack, is to be discussed. * Threat - A threat to computer system security is a possible act which can effect the system itself or the information stored within the system. * Vulnerability - In a computer system, it is a weak point which makes such a threat possible. * Attack - It is an action performed by an attacker with the aim of finding and exploiting some of the vulnerabilities. Three basic types of security threats are there. 1. Threat of Exposure - This arises due to the fact that inforamtion is revealed to a person who should not know it. 2. Threat of Integrity - This includes any intentional change (modification or even deletion) of data stored in a computer system of transferred from one system to another. 3. Denial of Service - This threat is present every time access to some resources of computer system is blocked due to certain actions. In real life, the block or obstruction can be permanent. System Administrator should know the possible methods used by the Hackers / Crackers to break into the systems and best practices in order to defend against attacks. A System Administrator should also know about the following examples of system vulnerabilities to rectify himself accordingly. # Lack of Firewall and inadequate firewall policies. # Inadequate network management. # Not using the latest version of operating system one can lead to exploitation of security weakness. # Not keeping up to date with various online security. organizations, such as CERT will lead to a known weakness not being corrected in a timely manner. # Unencrypted Communications. # Lack of Physical security over data communication closets or hubs. # No antivirus Software, lack of r egulr update of Antivirus Softw are and inadequate education of staff on virus. # Uncontrolled downloading and use of software off the internet. # Lack of policy on reopending of email attachments and using floppy disks before scanning by Antivirus Software. # Lack of Intrusion detection software. # Lack of update of operating system security patches. # Unrestricted use of modems of dial into the network and lack of inventory of dial up lines leading to inability to dial up access. # Lack of time restriction on user access and lack of dial back authentication. # Lack of policy restricting the provision of information by staff over the phone. # Lack of policy requiring all enquiries for information to be withheld until the identity of the requestor can be verified. Vigilance is best maintained by tracking security issues closely. Monitoring of vendor security information and independent security websistes and mailing lists are required. Some important websites, which should be visited regularly by a good network administrator are as follow : * www.securityfocus.com - For Security Focus. * eve.mitre.org(By MITRE Corporation)-For getting list of common vulnerabilities and Exposure list. * www.cert.org/(By CERT) * www.ciac.org/ciac(By CLAC)
WBSEBEA - 256

Cryptology It is the art and science of "secret writing" - provides ideal methods to solve these problems of data security in net. Cryptology is divided into two branches - cryptography and cryptanalysis. Cryptography is the science, which embraces all the methods and devices whereby an intelligible, wirten message may be converted into unintelligible or secret form. Cryptography, to most people, is concerned with keeping communications private. The most important automated tool for network and computer security is encryption. Encryption is the transformation of data into some ureadable form. Its purpose is to ensure privacy by keeping the information hidden from anyone for whom it is not intended, even those who can see the encrypted data during transmission of the data in the net. Decryption is the reverse of encryption, it is the transformation of encrypted data back into some intelligible form to authenticated acceptor. Cryptanalysis , on the other hand, is the sc ience, which embrances all the principles, methods and means employed in the analysis of secret messages (cryptograms). The explosive growth in computer systems and their interconnections has inceased the dependence of both organizations and individuals on the information stored and communicated using these systems and these computer hosts are accessible in a variety of ways, including gateways, routers, dial-up connections, and internet service providers. Individuals and organizations worldwide dcan reach any point on the network without regard to national or geographic boundaries or time of day. However, along with the convenience and easy access to information come new risks. A mong them are the risks that valuable information will be lost stolen, currupted or misused and that the computer systems will be corrupted. This led to keen awareness of the need to protect data and resources from disclosure and to guarantee the authenticity of data and messages and to protect systems from network based attacks. The area of cryptography has matured leading to the development of practical, readily available standards, protocols and applications. A security protocol is a communication protocol that encrypts and decrypts a message for online transmissio. Security protocols generally also provide authentication. Some of the readily available protocols to enforce net work security are PG, Kerberos, SSL/TLS, SHTTP, IP Sec. S/MIME etc. Different types of cryptographic algorithms like RSA, Digital signature, Digital certificate etc are used for security. FIREWALLS A firewall is a barrier between two networks (or even two hosts) which have different security requirements. A firewall is normally placed between the corporate network and internet. It is always better to install two firewalls for improved protection. If one of the firewall becomes dysfunctional, the other will ensure protection until the first firewall is recovered. Security monitoring is a continuous process. There should be a regular search for different possibilities of vulnerabilities and vulnerabilities should be immediately patched to avoid any attack. Sat isfaction about system security should never come into the mind of the system administrator. In WBSEB one Wide Area Network (WAN) is already running using SATCOM network. In this network all DCC or WBSEB are connected. Valuable L & MV, BULK billing data and PIS data of different employee of the Board are there is DCC. So, security of these data may be given as the highest priority. Moreover, this is a age of customer satisfaction. To give the customer satisfaction, bill collection facility from all of our collection centers is to be provided to customrs from any corner of West Bengal. At the same time, Website is to be available to consumers for billing data and payment collection. So, we have to be very security conscious, specially when our data will be in net. Proper security policy may be designed before placing the data in website to avoid any inconsistency. A special security team may be formed to monitor these activities.
WBSEBEA - 257
References
1. Lectures note of Er. Aloke Roychowdhury (WBSEB) 2. Lectures note of Er. B. Sengupta (WBSEB) 3. Lectures note of J. R. Nanda, K. R. Krishnaswamy, R. K. Kumar, R. Pannur Selvam of Central PowerResearch Institute, Bangalore 4. Lectures note of Er. Uma Chakraborty (WBSEB) 5. Lectures note of Er. P. K Pradhan (WBSEB) 6. Jvs relay manual - Publication No. JR302-1 7. English Electric Relay Manual 8. Power News flash of Reamker - February - 2004 9. Lectures note of Er. J. C. Mondal (WBSEB) 10. Lectures note ofEr. D. P. Chakraborty (WESEB) 11. Exide Battery Manual 12. Manual of Power Supply Under taking (TSSA, WBSEB) 13. WBSEBEA Journal '96 14. ABB Alpha Motor user's manual 15. MRI operating man ual, Verson - 2.02 (secrme) 16. MRI (Smile) operating manual, Version, 1.00 (secme) 17. Accuatek user manual 18. Lectures note of Er. A. K. Mitra (WBSEB) 19. Lectures note of Note of Er. Dipankar Basu & Er. Kumkum Majumder (WBSEB) 20. Note of Er. Shyamal Das (WBSEB) 21. Note of Er. Sudip Ghowh ) (WBSEB) 22. Note of Er. Biswajit Chatterjee (WBSEB)
WBSEBEA - 258

Technical Diary

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Technical Diary

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday 1

July Monday 4 Tuesday 5 Wednesday 6 Thursday 7 Friday 1 8 Saturday 2 9 Sunday 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Ad elaide Brisbane Melbourne Sydney Perth

New Amsterdam Hongkong Hungary

3 852 36 Hongkay Budapest Derbrecer 1 1 32 361 21 631 51 1 30 42 2 2 2 6 2 75 6 3 45 6 2 51 2 1 8 63 71 54 91 3 95

Bogra Dhaka Khulna

Belgium Bhutan Brazil

Brasilia Rio De Janeiro

Chawa Toronto Conception Santiago Beijng

SChina Colombia Cuba Denmark 57 53 45

Shangae Medlin Havana Aalborg Horsens Naestved

Alexandria Cairo Port Said

Fiji France Germany

Suya Paris Berlin Breman Hamburg Berlin

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

Sri Lanka Sudan

Colombo Medani Port Sudan

Kathmandu Amsterdam Holland

Berne Geneva Zurich

Aukland Hamilton Ellington

Norway Oman Pakistan

Oslo Musoat Islamabad Karachi Lahore Rawalpindi

Turkey Uganda Undant U.A.E.

Anhara Entebbe Kier Abudhabi Dubai Sharjah

Birmingham Bristol London (Inner) London (Outer) Manchester

Doha Buzao Oradea

Moscow St. Piherbuze

Al Khobar Damman Layla

Senegal Singapore Somalia South Africa

Dahar Singapore Mogadisclo Cape Town Pretoria Johannesburg

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

WORLD TIME CHART

Please purchase PDFcamp Printer on http://www.verypdf.com/ to remove this watermark.

AIR DISTANCES DISTANCE SHOWN IN THOUSAND KILOMETERS 1 KILOMETER = 0.621 MILE

2.6 9.0 18.6 4.8 9.4

7.4 12.1 8.5 2.2 5.1 7.4 4.2 9.8 6.3

7.0 7.3. 5.2 9.0

9.2 1 2 9.9 1. 3.3 2.5 3.3 2.5

0.5 13.8 0.6 6.0

6.6 1 2 1. 5.5 5.5 2.9 9.9 0.7 7.6

1.2 1 7 3.6 1. 1.2 10.6 2.6

5.2 5.8 1 6 1. 6.4 4.6 10.4

3.0 10.9 4.2 9.7 1.4 7.2

5.3 3.7 5.8 1 1 1. 6.6 3.2 5.3 10.0 0.8 7.6

9.6 1 7 10.6 1. 3.8 1.1 7.4 2.5 3.6 2.6

0.4 14.5 8.0 6.3

6.9 10.3 1 6 16.3 1. 7.6 5.2 9.2 0.5

6.3 2.7 10.8 7.8 16.8 7.8 9.6

4.9 10.4 2.7 16.0 8.0 9.7 1.1 5.0

14.3 13.3 1.1 13.3 9.0

9.0 13.8 4.3 6.8 1.0 8.6

9.0 10.0 16.0 9.6 4.7 4.7

8.7 1.5 1.2

7.5 10.1 2.5 4.6 9.0 5.0 6.7 6.5

8.7 6.3 1.5 3.2 1.2 5.3

0.8 7.6 10.4 16.3 9.4